s« HANDBOOK OF PALI
I CD
CO
PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS Sf NORQATE.
Clotli, gilt. Price 18«.
Buddha; His Life, His Doctrine, His Order. By
Dr. Hehjtaxn Oldexbeho, Professor at the University of Berlin, Editor of the Yinaya Pitakam and the Dipavamsa in Pali. Translated from the German by "William Hoey, M.A., D.Lrr., Member of the Royal Asiatic Society, Asiatic Society of Bengal, etc., of Her Majesty's Civil Service.
8vo. cloth. Price 21«.
A Manual of Buddhism in its Modem Development ;
translated from Singhalese MSS. By R. Spence Hardy, M.R.A.S., Author of "Eastern Monachism." Second Edition, with a complete Index by Dr. 0. Ekankfubtee.
By the same Author. 8vo. cloth. Price 12».
Eastern Monachism ; an Account of the Origin, Laws, Discipline, Sacred "Writings, Mysterious Rites, Religious Cere- monies, and Present Circumstances of the Order of Mendicants founded by Gotama Buddha (compiled from Singhalese MSS. and other Original Sources of Information). "With Compara- tive Notices of the Usages and Institutions of the "Western Ascetics, and a Review of the Monastic System.
8vo. cloth. Price 10«. 6rf.
Ehys Davids' Buddhism ; Lectures on the Origin and Growth of Religion, as illustrated by some points in the History of Indian Buddhism. By T. \V. Rhys Davids, Esq. Being the Hibbert Lectures 1881.
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London; and 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
PUBLISHED BY WILLIAMS ^ NORQATE.
BOOKS IN PALI.
BUDDHIST SCRIPrrRES IN PALI.
In 5 vols. 8vo. Price 21« each vol.
The Vinaya Pitakam, one of the principal Buddhist Holy Scriptures in the Pali Language. Edited by Dr. H. Oldenbeeg. Vol. I. The Mahavagga, with an Introduction. — Vol. II. The Cullavagga.— Vol. III. The Suttavibhanga, I. (Parajika, Samghadisesa, Anyata, Nissaggiya). — Vol. IV. The Suttavibhanga, II. End of Mahavibhanga, Bhikkhunlvi- bhanga. — Vol. V. The Parivara. Published with the assist- ance of the Royal Academy of Berlin, and of the Secretary of India in Council.
8vo. cloth. Price 21«.
The Dipavamsa, an Ancient Buddhist Historical Ee- cord in the Pali Language. Edited, with an English Transla- tion, by Dr. H. Oldenberg.
The Dipavamsa is the most ancient historical work of the Ceylonese ; it con- tains an account of the ecclesiastical history of the Buddhist Church, of the conversion of the Ceylonese to the Buddhist faith, and of the ancient history of Ceylon.
8vo. Price 21«.
The Milinda Pafiho. Being Dialogues between King
Milinda and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. The Pali Text edited by V. Tbencknee, of Copenhagen.
*' A very interesting dialogue between Milinda and Nagasena." — Max Miilier in Chips I.
" Next in order of interest should undoubtedly be named the * Milinda Fafiha ; or. Questions of Menander.' "Whatever be the origin of this remarkable work, there can be no doubt of its great antiauity, for it exhibits a familiarity with Greek names and places, and records a religious discussion between the Buddhist divine Nagasena and a * Yona ' king Milinda, who can be identified with cer- tainty with the Bactrian king Menander." — Childera in FuH Dictionary.
Also Bvo. Price 4».
Pali Miscellany, by V. Trenckner. Part I. The Intro- ductory Part of tiie Milinda Panho, an English Translation and Notes.
WILLIAMS & NORGATE, 14, Henrietta Street, Covent Garden, London ; and 20, South Frederick Street, Edinburgh.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
3^
.^
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR, A CHRESTOMATHY, AND A GLOSSARY.
COMl'ILEU BY
0. FRANKFURTER, Ph.D.
WILLIAMS AND NORGATE,
14, HENRIETTA STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON;
AND 20, SOUTH FREDERICK STREET, EDINBURGH.
1883.
HERTFORD:
rUMTED BT 8TKPBBN AVSTI.t AMD BOMS.
TO THE EEVEEEND
RICHARD MORRIS, LL.D., M.A.,
TICE-PBESIDEKT OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIEir,
AS A TOKEir
OF FBIEKDSHIP AND KESPECT.
ERRATA
|
Page |
line. |
HKAD. |
Page |
line. |
RKAD. |
|
4 |
33 |
tanhd. |
31 |
36 |
tr. najjo to 1. 35. |
|
5 |
5 |
prthivi. |
34 |
28, 29 |
mdtuyd, mdtubhi. |
|
6 |
25 ' |
moha. |
35 |
22 |
sakhdresu, sakhesu. |
|
6 |
32 |
odariko, oddro. |
35 |
33 |
attdnath. |
|
8 |
31 |
mudho. |
45 |
5 |
yam. |
|
It |
5 |
mrnala. |
47 |
18 |
ekdrasa. |
|
9 |
7 |
ekddasa. |
48 |
27 |
adhiko. |
|
17 |
4 |
qravaka. |
52 |
6 |
kiyddi, tanddi. |
|
17 |
16 |
qalmali. |
60 |
17 |
kareyyum, kubbeyum |
|
17 |
18 |
khalldto. |
68 |
10 |
uccate. |
|
19 |
18 |
nikkho. |
68 |
14 |
ganhdti. |
|
21 |
11 |
ganhdti. |
68 |
21 |
daddallati. |
|
21 |
21 |
tikhino. |
68 |
33 |
bubhukkhatl. |
|
28 |
11 |
dvikoromi. |
74 |
8 |
dvi. |
|
31 |
10 |
adau. |
75 |
29 |
ddsiddsam. |
|
89 |
27 |
bliikkhu. |
105 |
29 |
nana. |
|
90 |
17 |
satapadl. |
108 |
28 |
ug^ranbatha. |
|
94 |
29 |
pahiyissati. |
108 |
31 |
rakkba. |
|
95 |
7 |
Isanassa. |
109 |
5 |
amantesi. |
|
102 |
22 |
adinnadana. |
no |
22 |
katabban. |
|
103 |
8 |
sabbadhi. |
110 |
24,26 |
gilmini. |
|
103 |
10 |
panudanam. |
113 |
15.' |
uetbani. |
|
103 |
20 |
sa. |
114 |
19 |
addasuih. |
|
103 |
29 |
samekkhasi. |
114 |
21 |
addakkliuiii. |
|
104 |
2 |
yasassi so. |
117 |
30 |
asayarnvasi. |
|
104 |
3 |
namaso. |
121 |
28? |
paradaresii. |
|
104 |
12,13 |
vandama. |
121 |
29 |
vijauaina. |
XXIV
ERRATA.
Page. line. BUD.
124 9 paligiintliito.
125 8 dakklUnti.
125 18? Kasibharadvajo.
132 12 sampajano.
143 20 upajjhayena.
144 11, etc. ussaho. 144 35 haritattaya.
Page. line.
146 7,8?
147 14 144 16
148 24
149 27
150 9
BKAU.
sammata.
sammata.
avippavasaih.
anumodama.
yacati.
dharayamlti.
1544 18 1544 30 159a 12 165a 2
anu'kathayati. anu-parayati. ussaho. satta-nikdyo.
167a 9 add. panudanam ' removal.'
170* 29 bhikkhunl.
1735 34 valittaro.
176a 25 add. sata-padt (f) ' a centi- pede.*
Pag'e 60. — The first person plural of the optative ends sometimes in ' a,' e.g. viharemu, j'dnemu. This is an archaic form, occurring mostly io verses.
CONTENTS.
Preface
Pali Bibliography
Pakt I
Alphabet Pronunciation Classification of Letters Vowels . Short Vowels Long Vowels Nasal Vowels Interchange of Vowels Consonants . Phonetic Changes . Compound Consonants Sandhi .
Euphonic Changes Declension . Declension of Nouns Comparison . Declension of Pronouns Numerals
Cardinals .
Ordinals . The Verb .
Present System .
Modes of the Present
Perfect System .
Aorist and Imperfect
Future
Conditional
Participles, Infinitives Indeclinables Adverbs Prepositions . Compounds .
FAOB
. ix
. XT
Tense
Gerunds
Part II.
Saranagamanam (Khuddaka Nikaya)
1
1
2
2
3
5
7
7
7
8
II
21
24
25
29
41
42
47
47
49
61
53
58
60
61
66
67
69
70
70
73
74
PAOB
SamaneraPanham (Khuddaka Nikaya) 82 Dvatimsakuram ,, ,, 82
Paccavekkhana (Anguttara Nikaya) 82 Dasadhammasuttam ,, ,, 83
Mahamangalasuttam (Khuddaka
Nikaya) . . . . .84 Ratanasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) . 85 Karanlyamettasuttam „ „ 88
Khandhaparittam(AnguttaraNikaya) 89 Mettasuttam „ ,, 90
Mettanisamsam (Jataka) . .91 Moraparittam ,, . .92
Candaparittam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 92 Suriyaparittam ,, ,, .93
Dhajaggaparittam „ „ . 94
Mahakassappattherabojjhangam
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 96
Girimanandasuttam (Samyutta
Nikaya) 97
Atilnatiyasuttam (Digha Nikaya) . 101 Dhammacakkappavattanasuttam
(Samyutta Nikaya) . . 109
Mahusamayasuttam (Dlgha Nikaya) 112 Alavakasuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) . 118 Parabhavasuttam (Khuddaka Nikaya) 120 Vasalasuttam „ „ 122
KasibharadvajasuttaTn ,, ,, 126
Saccavibhangam (Majjhima Nikaya) 127 Arunavatisuttam (Samyutta Nikaya) 133 Devadahasuttam „ ,, 136
A Collection of Kammavacas . . 142
Part III.
Glossary 162
Tables of Alphabets : —
Sinhalese Alphabet.
Burmese Alphabet.
Kambodian Alphabet. Comparative Table of Alphabets. b
PREFACE.
The Handbook of Piili which I place before my readers consists of three parts, an Elementary Grammar, a Chresto- mathy, and a Glossary.
I have called the grammar an elementary one, because no attempt has been made to distinguish the different periods in the development of the language. To write a scientific grammar of Pali, it would be necessary not only to have recourse to the different so-called ancient Prakritic dialects, but also to the modern Aryan languages of India, more especially Mahrathl. I believe MahrathI to be, if not the daughter of Pali, at least more closely allied to it than any other of the Indian vernacular tongues ; and among these I include also Sinhalese. In fact, a scientific Pali grammar can, in my opinion, only be written as part of a comparative grammar of the Aryan languages of India.
I have called this work a Handbook of Pali. This requires some explanation. I am well aware that Professor Forch- hammer, in his report of the Rangoon High School, 1879- 1880, has shewn conclusively, as did the late Professor Childers before him, that Pali means only Sacred Texts. Professor Forchhammer, quoting from Burmese books, says : " The Tipitaka Pali was written by means of the Magadha- bhasha ; " and again, " The Pali of the Tipitaka may be preached by means of any language." He goes on to remark that "a Pali grammar and a Pali dictionary must
X PREFACE.
appear to the Burmans as an incomprehensible misnomer, or at best what to us would be a Bible dictionary or a grammar of the New Testament." I believe the examples are not very well chosen. In a grammar of the New Testa- ment we expect to find the New Testament Greek. A Bible dictionary would mean a cyclopaedia, in which one can find information on any Bible subject.
I could have chosen "Handbook of Miigadhl" as a title of the book; but this would imply more than is actually given in the book. Under such a title one would expect to find a grammar of the Miigadhese Inscriptions and of the MagadhI of the drama. Moreover, in calling it a Handbook of MagadhI, I should have committed myself to a definite statement about the country in which the language of the Buddhist Scriptures was spoken. Pali means for European scholars the sacred language of the Buddhist Scriptures, and as a matter of convenience this designation ought to be kept until conclusive proofs are adduced to shew in which part of India this Prakrit dialect was spoken. "We have moreover the excellent authority of Subhuti, who calls his Abhidhdnappadlpikd a Pali dictionary, and his Ndmamdld a work on Pali grammar.
As a reading-book I have chosen the Paritta. The text is based on a MS. in the British Museum (Or. 1092), written in Sinhalese characters. Besides this I had several printed Burmese copies, and one printed Sinhalese copy of the book. They however vary in the selection they give. None contains all the extracts given in the reading-book. Part of the Paritta has, as is well known, been published by the late Professor Childers, and by the late M. Grimblot, with notes and translations by M. L^on Feer. Some of the suttas which in the " Extraits du Paritta " are given as
PREFACE. xi
belonging to the Sutta Nipata occur also in the Samyutta Nikaya. The two suttas of the Digha Nikiiya wore pub- lished by the late M. Grimblot in the " Sept Suttas Palis." I have consulted the MSS. of the individual Nikayas in constituting the text. The translation of the Sutta Nipata given by Professor FausboU in the "Sacred Books of the East " was of great service to me in deciding on the merits of the various readings. I have not seen the " Ceylon Friend," in which the late Rev. D. Gogerly has translated most if not all the suttas belonging to the Paritta. I shall take an early opportunity of giving a more elaborate account of the compilation of the book and the different versions which we have of it.
The other extracts given are "A Collection of Kamma- vacas." If the Paritta was intended to represent the style of the Sutta Pitaka, these may be taken as a fairly good specimen of the Yinaya Pitaka. I also reserve for a later occasion any mention of the relation of the Kammavacas to the Vinaya Pitaka, viz. if they stand in the same rela- tion to the Mahavagga and Cullavagga as the Patimokkha stands to the Sutta Yibhanga. The text of the Kam- mavacas is based on MSS. belonging to the Bodleian Library (Pali 1 and 2). They are written in the square character, and represent the usual Burmese orthography. A distinction between linguals and dentals is seldom made, nor do they write anusvdm after * and u. For several chapters I have consulted other MSS. in the British Museum, and some belonging to the Liverpool Free Library. They present the same texts, and are also written in the square painted character. Whilst examining the Liverpool MSS., in company with Professor Rhys Davids, to whom they had been sent by Sir James Allanson Picton for
xii PREFACE.
identification and report, we found that one of them (No. L 24091) was of especial value, as it contained a few extra Kammavueas not appearing in the usual text which I have given in the Chrestomathy. Professor Spiegel and Mr. Dickson have published part of the text (see Bibliography).
The third part contains the Glossary. I have omitted in it all proper names. In employing two sorts of type and hyphens I have tried to distinguish between compound words and simple ones. Compound words ought all to have been given under their last member, as is done in Benfey's Sanskrit Dictionary. This is the only scientific way. The last member in the Indo-European languages is explained by the preceding ones, or as the late Professor Benfey put it in his lectures, " the defining members always precede the defined." But as all the second members did not occur in the glossary, I had to give up this plan, and to limit myself to using italics for compound words. I employ capitals, however, for compound words when the individual meaning of the component parts is another than that of the whole word ; e. g. addhayogo was printed in capitals for that reason. I have not attempted to explain the difierent philo- sophical terms which occur in the extracts. I give mostly one translation, and put a 1. 1. (technical term) after them. Fault may perhaps be found with the explanation of Nihhdnam as the summum bonum of the Buddhists; but among so many different views it seems to me best neither to offer an opinion nor to defend one.
I have given the third person singular present of the verb, and translated this throughout with the infinitive. The third person singular present, as is well known, has in Indian grammar the same value as the infinitive of modern grammar. It is the type given for the verb by the
PREFACE. xiii
native grammarians. To give the so-called root did not commend itself to me — for two reasons. First, — the principle of the root- theory has been recently, and not without reason, greatly shaken, so that it would not be wise to introduce it. Secondly, it is difficult to determine what is the root of a Pali word. I have given the nominative case of nouns, and here I think I may deserve some blame. But, as is shewn in the chapter on declension, through the working of the phonetic laws none of the declensions keeps within its own range, and the crude form of a Pali noun is thus not easily fixed.
I have availed myself on every occasion of all the books published on Pali grammar, and consulted Childers's Dic- tionary of the Pali Language. These works will be found in the appended Bibliography. I name here more particu- larly the works of Professors Kuhn and Minayefi", of M. Senart, of the Terunnanse Subhuti, and of Dr. Trenckner.
I hope the Tables of Alphabets will be found useful.
In conclusion, I have to thank Dr. Morris for many valuable suggestions, and for his kindness in looking over the proof-sheets. I am also indebted to the authorities of the Bodleian Library, the British Museum, and the India Office Library, for the courtesy and ready help I have uniformly received from them.
0. FRANKFURTER.
OxroKD, February, 1883.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
I. PALI LITERATURE.
TuRNOUR, G. Examination of the Pali Buddhistical Annals. J.A.S. of Bengal, 1837, 1838.
Westergaard, N. L. Codices Indici bibliothecae regioe Havniensis enumerati et descripti. Copenhagen, 1846.
Hardy, Rev. R. S. List of Books in the Pali and Singha- lese Languages. J.R.A.S. Ceylon Branch, 1848.
Alwis, J. DE. Descriptive Catalogue of Sanskrit, Pali, and Sinhalese Literary "Works of Ceylon. Colombo, 1870.
Zoysa, L. de. Catalogue of Pali, Sinhalese, and Sanskrit Manuscripts in the Ceylon Government Oriental Library. Colombo, 1876.
Forchhammer, E., Professor of Pali, Rangoon High School. Report by, for the year 1879-1880.
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Report on Pali and Sinhalese. Transactions of the Philological Society, 1875-1876.
Feer, L. Les nouveaux Manuscripts Palis de la biblio- theque nationale. Annales de I'extreme Orient, 1880.
Morris, Rev. Dr. Richard. Report on Piili Literature, 1875-1880. Transactions of the Philological Society, 1881.
Haas, E. Catalogue of Sanskrit and Pali Books in the British Museum. London, 1876.
Trubner & Co. Catalogue of leading Books on Pali, Prakrit, and Buddhist Literature. London, 1881.
xvi TALI BIBLIOORAPnY.
II. TEXTS.
ViNAYA PiTAKAM. One of the principal Buddhist Holy Scriptures. Edited by Hermann Oldenbcrg. 5 vols. London, 1879-1883.
Kammavaca.
Spiegel, F. Kammavjikyam, liber de officiis buddhicorum piilice et lutine edidit. Bonn, 1841.
Anecdota Palica. Chaps, ii, iii. v.
Leipzig, 1845. Boehtlingk, 0. Bulletin de I'Academie Imp^riale
des Sciences, 1844, No. 22, chap. iv. Dickson, J. F. Upasampada Kammavaca. J.R.A.S.
1875. The Pall Manuscript written on
Papyrus, preserved in the Library of the
Armenian Monastery, St. Lazaro. Venice,
1875. (This appears to be a reprint of the
preceding.)
Patimokkha.
Minayeff, J. Pratiraoksha Sutra buddijskij sluzeb-
niku izdannyj i perevedennyj. Petersburg,
1869. Dickson, J. F. Piltlraokkha, being the Buddhist
Office of the Confession of Priests. J.R.A.S.
1876.
SUTTA PiTAKAM.
DTOHA NiKAYA.
Qrimblot, P. Sept Suttas Palis, tir^s du Digha
Nikaya. Paris, 1876. Childers, R. C. Mahaparinibbanasutta. London,
1878. Mahasatipatthanasutta. Maulmain, 1881.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPEY. xvii
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
SaMYUTTA NlKAYA.
Feer, H. L. Le Bhikkhuni Samyuttam, M^raoires de la Societe d'Ethnographie, Sect. Orient, 1877.
Frankfurter, 0. Buddhist Nirvana and the Noble Eightfold Path. J.R.A.S. 1880.
MaJJHIMA NlKAYA.
Pischel, R. A8sala3'anasuttam. Edited and trans- lated. Chemnitz, 1880.
Anguitara Nikaya.
Morris, Rev. Dr. R. Publications of the Pali Text Society.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
FausboU, y. The Jataka, together with its Com- mentary. Vols. i. and ii. London, 1877, 1879.
Two Jatakas ; the original Pali text,
etc. London.
Five Jatakas. Copenhagen, 1861.
Ten Jatakas, Copenhagen, 1872.
The Dasaratha Jataka. Copenhagen,
1874. Zachariae, Th. Die sechszehnte Erzahlung des
Vetalapaucaviri9ati. Contains the Umma-
dantl-jataka. B.B. iv. p. 375. "Weber, A., and Fausboll, V. Die Sage von der
Entstehung des Sakya und Koliya Ge-
schlechtes. Indische Streifen i. Berlin,
1868. Fausboll, V. Dhammapadam, ex tribus codicibus
Havniensibus Palice edidit. Copenhagen,
1855. Childers, R. C. Khuddaka Piitha, with English
translation, etc. J.R.A.S. 1870. Spiegel, F. Anecdota Palica. Leipzig, 1845.
Contains the Uragasutta of the Sutta Nipata.
xviii TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY.
SUTTA PlTAKAM.
Khuddaka Nikaya.
Alwis, J. de. Buddhist Nirvana. Colombo, 1871.
Contains extracts from the Sutta Nipata. Morris, Rev. R. Cany a Pitaka.
Buddhavamsa. (Publications of
the Piili Text Society.) Feer, H. L. Textes tir^s du Kandjour. 11 livraisons.
Paris, 1864-1871. Gray, J. Ajjhatta Jaya Mangalam. Rangoon, 1881. Grimblot, P. Extraits du Paritta, texte et commentaire, avec introduction, traduction, notes et notices par L^on Feer. J.A. 1871. Feer, H. L. Fft\ides Buddhiques. J.A. 1870, etc. Pirit Pota {i.e. Paritta). Colombo, 2411 (1869). Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1879. Mahaparitto. Rangoon, 1881. Mangalasutta. 2nd ed. Rangoon, 1881.
Mahavamso. In Pali and English, with an Introductory
Essay on Pali Buddhistical Literature. Vol. i. By
Q. Tumour. Colombo, 1837. From the 37th Chapter. Translated and edited
by H. Sumangala and Don Andris de Silva Batuwantu-
dawa. 2 vols. Colombo, 1877. DiPAVAMSA. A Buddhist Historical Record. Edited, with
an English translation, by H. Oldenberg. London, 1879. Dhammakitti. The Dathavamsa, the Pali text and its
translation into English. By Mutu Coomdra Swamy.
London, 1874. Hatthavanagallavamsa. The Attanagalluvansa. Trans- lated from the Pali by J. d* Alwis, with the Pali text.
Colombo, 1866. MiLiNDAPANHO. Being Dialogues between King Milinda
and the Buddhist Sage Nagasena. Edited by V.
Trenckner. London, 1880.
PALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xlx
III. TRANSLATIONS.
Clough, Rev. B. The Ritual of the Buddhist Priesthood. Translated from the original Pali work entitled Karma- vakya (Miscellaneous Translations from Oriental "Writers, vol. ii. London, 1834).
Beal, Rev. S., and Gogerly, Rev. D. J. Comparative Arrangement of Two Translations of the" Buddhist Ritual for the Priesthood. London, 1862.
Davids, T. W. Rhys, and Oldenberg, H. Vinaya Texts. Translated from the Pali. Part I. The Piitimokkha ; the Mahiivagga. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii.)
Davids, T. W. Rhys. Buddhist Suttas. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi. Contains the Maha- parinibbtina Sutta, the Tevijja Sutta, the Mahasudassana Sutta, the Dhammacakkappavattana Sutta, the Sabba- sava Sutta.)
Buddhist Birth Stories, or Jataka
Tales. London, 1880.
Weber, A. Dhammapadam (Indische Streifen).
MtJLLER, F. Max. Buddha's Dhammapada. Translated from Pali. (Buddhaghosha's Parables. Translated from Burmese by H. T. Rogers. London, 1870.)
Dhammapada ; a Collection of Verses,
translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x. part 1.)
Hu, Ferd. Dhammapadam traduit en Fran9ais, avec intro- duction et notes. Paris, 1878.
SwAMY, Sir M. Coomara. Sutta Nipata, or the Dialogues of Gotama Buddha. Translated from the Pali, with Introduction and Notes. London, 1874.
Faxjsboll, V. The Sutta Nipata ; a Collection of Discourses, translated from Pali. Oxford, 1881. (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x. part 2.)
XX PALI BIBLIOGRAPnT.
IV. DICTIONARIES, GRAMMARS, AND GRAMMATICAL PAPERS.
MoGOALLANA Thero. Abhidlulnappadlpiku, with English
and Sinhalese Interpretations, etc. By Waskaduwe
Subhuti. Colombo, 1865. Childers, R. C. A Dictionary of the Pali Language.
London, 1875. Clough, B. a Compendious Pali Grammar, with a Copious
Vocabulary in the same Language. Colombo, 1824. BuKNouF, E., and Lassen, Chr. Essai sur le Pali. Paris,
1826. Observations grammaticales sur quelques
passages de I'essai sur le Pali. Paris, 1827. Storck, "W. De declinatione nominum in lingua Piilica.
Berlin, 1858. Casuum in lingua Palica formatio. Miinster,
1862. MiJLLER, F. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Pali Sprache.
Vols. i. ii. iii. Vienna, 1867-1869. MiNAYEFF, J. Gram'maire Palie, traduite par St. Guyard.
Paris, 1874. KuHN, E. W. A. Beitrage zur Pali Grammatik. Berlin, 1875. ToRP, A, Die Flexion des Pali in ihrem Verhaltnis zum
Sanskrit. Christiania, 1881. Trenckner, V. Pali Miscellany. Vol. i. London, 1879. GoLDSCHMiDT, S. Prukritica. Strassburg, 1879.
BIlavataro. Pandita Devarakkhitacariyena Samsodhito. Colombo, 1869* [2412 a.b.].
Kaccayana.
Alwis, J. de. Introduction to Kaccayana's Grammar
of the Pali Language. Colombo, 1863. KuHN, E. W. A. Kaccayanappakaranae specimen.
Halle, 1869. „ „ specimen
alterum. Halle, 1871.
TALI BIBLIOGRAPHY. xxi
Kaccayana.
Mason, F. The Piili Text of Kachcliayano's Graraniar,
with English Annotations. Toongoo, 1871. Senart, E. Kaccayana et la litterature grammaticale
du Pali, l"* Partie. Paris, 1871. SIlavamsa. Kaccayana's Dhatumanjusa. Edited, with a translation in Sinhalese and English, by Deva- rakkhita. Colombo, 1872. Waskaduwe Subhuti. Naraamala, or a "Work on Pali
Grammar. Ceylon, 1876. Sumangala. Declension and Conjugation of Pali "Words.
Edited by M. Gunaratana. Ceylon, 1873. Sangharakkhita Thera. Subodhalahkara. (Pali Studies,
by Major G. E. Fryer.) Calcutta, 1875. "Vuttodaya. Edited, with trans- lation and notes, by Major G. E. Fryer. Calcutta, 1877. Yuttodaya, die Pali Metrik des
herausgegeben von J. Minayeff. Melanges Asia-
tiques, vi. Childers, R. C. On Sandhi in Pali. J.R.A.S. n.s. iv.
p. 309.
Dakkh in Pali. K.B. viii. p. 150.
The Prakrit Dekkh. K.B. vii. p. 450.
PiscHEL, R. Die wurzeln ^pekkh, dakkh und dekkh in
Prakrit. K.B. vii. p. 453. "Weber, A. Zur Yerstiindigung. K.B. vii. p. 458. PiscHEL, R. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiii. p. 423. Jacobi, H. Vocaleinschub in Pali. K.Z. xxiii. p. 594. ZiMMER, H. Zur Paligrammatik. K.Z. xxiv. p. 220. Oldenberq, H. Bemerkungen zur Paligrammatik. K.Z.
XXV. p. 314. GoLDscHMiDT, S. Priikritische Miscellen. K.Z. xxv.
pp. 436, 610. Z.D.M.G. xxxii. p. 99. PiscHEL, R. Pali acchati. B.B. iii. p. 155. Die de9lcabdas bei Trivikrama. B.B. iiL
p. 255.
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS.
abl.=: ablative.
ace. = accusative.
adj. = adjective.
adv. = adverb.
aor.=aori8t.
attn.=atmane.
caus. = causative.
comp., cp.=eompare.
cond. =conditional.
conj. = con junction.
dat.= dative.
f. = fem.
foil. = following.
fr. = from.
fut. = future.
gen. = genitive.
ger. = gerund.
Imperat. = Imperative.
inf. = infinitive.
instr. = instrumental.
loc.=locative.
m. = masculine.
n. = neuter.
num. = numeral.
opt. = optative.
p. f. p. = participle of
future passive, p. p. = participle present.
the
p. p. p. = participle of the per- fect passive.
par.=para8mai.
part. = particle.
pass. = passive.
pers.= person.
pe=peyyalo, etc.
pi. = plural.
prep. = preposition.
pres. = present.
pret. = preterite.
sep. = separately.
sing. = singular.
t.t.= technical term.
voc.= vocative.
J. A. = Journal Asiatique.
J. II. A. S. = Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society.
B. B. = Bezzenberger, bei- trage sur kunde der indo- germanischen sprachen.
K.B. = Kuhn's Beitrage.
K.Z =Kuhn*8 zeitschrift fiir vergleichende sprachfor- schung.
Z. D. M. G. = Zeitschrift d. deutschen morgenlan-
dischen gesellschaft.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
PART I.
AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR.
§ 1. THE ALPHABET.
Pali, the sacred language of the Buddhists, is written, according to the countries from which the MSS. come, either in Sinhalese (Ceylon), Burmese (Burma), or Karabodian (Siam) characters. The system of writing in the original characters is syllabic and consonantal (as will be seen from the appended table).
To transliterate these characters the following system is now mostly adopted : —
u u e 0
urn
g gh n
j jh n
d {I) dh (/h) n
d dh n
b hh m
I V
§ 2. PRONUNCIATION.
The vowels are pronounced in the Continental way. The short a has mostly the indistinct sound as in English hut. The uasal vowels are now pronounced in Ceylon and Burma
1
|
Vowels : |
a a |
it |
|
Nasal vowels ; |
: am |
im |
|
Consonants : |
k' |
kh |
|
c |
ch |
|
|
t |
th |
|
|
t |
'th |
|
|
P |
ph |
|
|
y |
r |
|
|
8 |
2 PALI GRAMMAR.
like the guttural nasal in English hang. e and o are metrically always long, but pronounced short before two consonants.
The consonants are pronounced in the manner known from Sanskrit grammar.
c is English ch.
» is the Spanish ti and French ng in campagne.
V is pronounced as English or French v, except when preceded by a consonant in the same syllable, in which case it has the sound of English w.
The aspirated letters, surd and sonant, are pronounced as the corresponding non-aspirates followed by /*.
The sound of the nasal is defined by the letter which follows it, cf. English hang, hand, bench, hemp.
§ 3. CLASSIFICATION OF LETTERS.
All the vowels and consonants are arranged by the native grammarians under the following classes : —
1) a k kh g gh h and h are considered gutturals (kanthaja).
2) t c chjjh n and y are termed palatals {tdluja).
3) u p ph h bh m are termed labials {oHhaja).
4) t th d (/) dh (Ih) n r are termed linguals {muddhaja)}
5) t th d dh n I .t are termed dentals {dantaja).
6) e is termed gutturo-palatal [kaiithatdluja).
7) 0 is termed gutturo-labial {kantkoUhaja).
8) V is termed dento-labial (dantolthqja) ,
% 4. VOWELS.
1) Pali being one of the Indian dialects, is best con- sidered in comparison with one of those dialects of which the grammar is already firmly established, viz. Sanskrit.
» In the Sacred Books of the East, edited by Prof. Max Miiller, the palatals are printed, like gutturals, in italics, and the cerebrals likewise as dentals in italics, thus : k kh g gh n, t th d dh n.
This transliteration seems to imply that the palatals arise always from the gutturals, and that they stand in the same relation to these as the linguals stand to the dentals. This is, howerer, not the case in Pali.
The system adopted in this handbook is used in most of the texts published up to the present time, such as Dr. Oldenbcrg's edition of the Vinayapi^aka, Prof. Fausbiill's Jataka, and also in Childers's Dictionary of the Pali Language.
SHORT VOWELS. 3
2) In comparing Piili with Sanskrit forma, it must always be kept in mind that Sanskrit is not to be regarded as the parent language : but as the dialect which best represents the primitive Aryan speech, to which Sanskrit and Pali stand in the relation of elder and younger sisters.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, we find that Pali has no written characters for the r and / vowels. It has not the diphthongs ai au, and lacks the long nasal vowels.
We find therefore in Pali three short vowels a i u, and five long vowels a I u e o, and three nasal vowels am hn urn, which are also considered long, and which are technically called niggahlta.
As to the accent, which plays such a conspicuous part in Vedic Sanskrit, no accented texts have been handed down. It is, however, clear that Pali possessed a free accent just as much as Sanskrit, and every other Aryan language. It is now the fashion in Ceylon and Burma to give the accent to the long syllable in every word.
A syllable is considered long, if it contains one of the long, or nasal vowels, or a short vowel followed by two consonants.
A Pali word may only end in a vowel or nasal vowel. For exceptions see the chapter on Sandhi.
§ 5. SHORT VOWELS.
In comparing the Pali vowels with those of Sanskrit, it will be seen that the short vowels a i u correspond as a rule to those of Sanskrit.
A short vowel followed by two consonants corresponds to a Sanskrit long vowel ; thus we have : — maggo Skr. nijirga * path ' ; majjdro Skr. miirjara ' cat ' ; ratti Skr. ratri * night' ; saddhim Skr. sardham * with ' ; ikkhati Skr. Ikshati * to look * ; kitti Skr. kirti * fame ' ; tittham Skr. tirtha ' landing- place*; t//<!«^^o Skr. dhurta 'gamester'; mutlam Skr. mutra ' urine ' ; suttam Skr. sutra.
4 PALI GRAMMAB.
An original long vowel following a simple consonant can arbitrarily be shortened by doubling the consonant. This seems only to be graphic, as in the metre no difference is made between a form hahunnam and bahunam, gen. plur. m. and n. of ba/iu ' much,' or al/dpo and d/dpo 'speech.'
In the gen. plur. m. and n. of the numerals tinnam pahcan- nam channam the forms with doubled nasals are in use.
The syllable ya is changed to i. Among the examples given is nigrodho for Skr. nyagrodha, majjhimo for Skr. madhyarad. The process called samprasarana.
In the same way va is contracted into u in such words as latukikd Skr. latvakii * quail.'
§ 6. Pali has, as was shown above, no written character corresponding to the Sanskrit r and / vowels.
It is a well-known fact that those two vowels originate in Sanskrit and other languages for the most part through the abbreviation of a syllable which contains an r or /through the influence of the accent.
Theoretically, therefore, one would expect to find in Pali a short syllable containing an r or / element. This r or I element may be inherent in the vowel. We find a whole syllable with the consonant r to represent the Sanskrit vowel.
r, practically speaking, therefore, is represented in Pali by one of the short vowels a i u or by the consonant r in con- junction with one of the vowels a i m, which in this case are vowel fractures (svarabhakti).
There is no fixed rule for the use of these vowels, and in difierent, sometimes in the same, texts, they are used in- diflferently in the case of the same word, and the divergency in the use of these vowels shows that they were employed in a merely tentative way to indicate the sound in writing.
1) a=r in kato Skr. krta ' made * ; gmihdti Skr. grhnuti * to seize * ; mato Skr. mrtd ' dead ' ; ianhTt Skr. trshna ' lust.'
2) i=^r in isi Skr. rshi *a sage' ; kicco Skr. krtyd ' what is to be done' ; pitthatn pitlhl Skr. prshtha ' back ' ; inam Skr. rn4 * debt.'
3) M=r in samvitto Skr. saravrtd 'restrained'; uju Skr. rjd ' straight.'
4) r=r in iritvyo Skr. ytvij *a priest'; iru Skr. re 'hymn';
LONG VOWELS. 6
bi'uheti Skr. brmbayati * to increase ' ; hrohd Skr. brh&nt
* great ' ; ruhkho Skr. vrkshd * tree.'
5) r=« or i or u in the same word :
niigo mago Skr. mrga * antelope ' ; accho ikko Skr. rksha 'bear*; pathavi put hurl Skr. prthivi 'earth'; sati sainuti Skr. smrti * thought ' ; vuddhi vaddhi Skr. vrddhi * increase.'
The long r vowel is of later development in Sanskrit, and has therefore no equivalent in Pali.
The so-called root klip, the only one which contains an / vowel, in Sanskrit becomes kappati.
§ 7. In comparing Pali words with corresponding Sanskrit, in several instances a difference in the vowels is to be found. This is generally the case in unaccented syllables, and the reason for such a practice lies in assimila- tion. In several instances, however, words are used with both vowels.
muti mati Skr. mati * mind ' ; pana puna Skr. punar ; puriso puruso Skr. purusha 'man ' ; ucchu Skr. ikshu ' sugar-cane.'
Pukkuso Skr. Pukka9a ; Kondantio Skr. Kaundinya ; candimd Skr. candramas ' moon ' ; saddhim Skr. sardham ; jigucchati Skr. jugupsati ' to dislike ' ; timisam tamisam Skr. tamisra * darkness ' ; Timingalo Titnihgilo Skr. Timingila ; nitthuhhati nutthubhati Skr. nishthiv ' to spit out ' ; muca- lindo Skr. mucilinda * a tree ' ; dyasma Skr. ayushmant
* venerable ' ; kutumbam kutitnbam Skr. kutumba ' family.'
Where a difference in the vowel takes place in conjunction with one of the semivowels or nasals, the vowels only desig- nate a partial vowel, such as in garu Skr. guru, Greek ^apv,
§ 8. LONG VOWELS.
The long vowels a i u agree with the corresponding Sanskrit, with the exception above stated, that a long vowel followed by two consonants is represented in Pali by a short one.
1) a: d=a 'the prep.' sddhu Skr. sadhu 'good'; data Skr. datr * giver.'
2) T : iti Skr. Iti ' calamity * ; gltam Skr. gita * a song ' ; j'nitam Skr. jivita 'life.'
6 TALI GRAMMAR.
3) u : &no Skr. iina ' deficient * ; 8upo Skr. supa * broth ' ; mulho Skr. mudha ' foolish.*
§ 9. The long vowels e and o correspond to the Skr. diph- thongs e and o, and sometimes to the diphthongs ai an.
They combine therefore guna and vrddhi of i and u, and they go back to these vowels accordingly, before a compound consonant.
1) e: eti Skr. eti 'he goes'; ekam Skr. eka 'one'; hetu Skr. hetu ' cause.*
jeguccho ' contemptible ' goes back to jigucchd ; keldso * suffering from a cutaneous complaint ' to kilaso.
ediso eriso edikkho erikkho * such ' to idam.
gelanfiam 'sickness' to gildno, in which, however, the • is svarabhakti for Skr. gluna.
2) E=Skr. ai : Eravano Skr. AirJivana.
etihyam Skr. aitihya ' traditional instruction.' ekdgdriko Skr. aikjigarika * a thief.'
3) aya is contracted to e in the middle of a word ; katheti= kathayati ' to relate ' ; jeti^-jayati ' to conquer.'
4) e arises out the contraction of avi in e.g. thero Skr. sthavira * an elder.*
1) o: okam Skr. okas 'a house'; ojo Skr. ojas 'splendour'; lobho ' covetousness ' from luhhati Skr. lobha ' to be greedy ' ; tnoho Skr. moho ' delusion ' ; doso Skr. dosha ' blemish.*
pothujjaniko ' belonging to an unconverted person,* puthujjano ; this latter stands for Skr. prthak. A form puthujjaniko, however, is also given.
2) o=Skr. au :
opammam Skr. aupamya 'comparison.' orahbhiko Skr. aurabhrika ' a shepherd.' odariko and odaro Skr. audiirika ' greedy.'
3) ava is contracted to o in the beginning of a word ; the fuller form is almost always also in use: otdro and avatdro ' descent ' ; okdro avakdro * vileness.'
4) 0 sometimes arises from the vocalisation of v and its combinations with d as hoti=.bhavati and dhovati Skr. \/dhav ' to wash.'
CONSONANTS. 7
§ 10. THE NASAL VOWELS.
The nasal of every class, if preceded by a vowel, may arbitrarily become niggahlta. They correspond in every respect to Sanskrit.
For a nasalized vowel, a simple long one can be substituted: nho ' lion ' for Skr. simha ; tlsati Skr. vim9ati. sam very often becomes sa : sdrdgo ' possessed of passion.*
Every one of the five nasals can, before any other con- sonant or nasal, become niggahlta. The MSS. vary greatly in the expression of the nasals : mn/io, anno, ' other,' pamha, pofiha and panha 'question.' In very many cases the long vowel and the nasalized vowel appear in the same word.
In later texts a short vowel is often nasalized : nagaram becomes nahgaram. This seems, however, a mistake of the Sinhalese copyists.
§ 11. INTERCHANGE OF VOWELS.
By the side of hhlyo bhiyi/oz^Skr. bhuyas we find yehlmyyo yehhuyo, which is a contraction of yad+ bhuyas.
Skr. a appears as u in the last part of such compounds as addhagu katannu, which stand respectively for Skr. adhvaga and krtajiia.
In merayam 'intoxicating liquor,' Skr. maireya, second e appears in Pali as a. In milakkJw Skr. mleccho the Pali preserves the older form. It stands for mlaska.
We sometimes find the gunated forms of words in Pali by the side of Sanskrit ungunated.
§ 12. CONSONANTS.
The consonants are divided by the native grammarians into ghosavd * sounding,' and aghosd * surd.' They are : —
Ghosava : g, gh, h \ j, jh, n ; d, dh^ n ; d, dh, n ; b, bh, m ; y, r, /, V, h.
Aghosa : k^ kh ; c, cA ; t, th ; t, th\ p, ph ; 8.
The simple consonants of Piili mostly agree with those of Sanskrit and the other Indo-European languages.
8 TALI GRAMMAR.
The Gutturals, Palatals, Linguals, Dentals, Labials, as well as the semivowels and « and /t, correspond in Sanskrit and Pali.
Piili possesses all the consonants of Sanskrit, with the excep- tion of the palatal and lingual sibilant; the last of which is even in Sanskrit of late origin, and occurs only in the numeral 8h(Vih and its derivatives, and in a few words in conjunction with the linguals according to phonetic rules. The dental sibilant « takes the place of the three sibilants of Sanskrit. However, the aspirated surd palatal is found in, eg.
chokam Skr. 9akrt * dung ' ; chdpo Skr. yava * young of an animal ' ; chavo Skr. 9ava * a corpse.*
Skr. shash, which goes back to a form svaks, is represented in Pali by the form cha and chal.
% 13. PHONETIC CHANGES.
None of the changes pervades the whole grammar ; they only take place optionally, and can scarcely be called con- sistent. In most instances the leading motive for the change is euphony or false analogy ; in many instances also two forms occur, of which one preserves intact the form known from Sanskrit grammar.
General Remarks.
1) For Skr. mleccha Piili has milakkho *a stranger.* Here the Piili form is the older one, just as in bhhakko Skr. bhishaj * physician.'
2) Palatals, in conjunction with one of the semivowels y, V, become sometimes dentals,
3) Cerebrals /, M, can optionally be substituted for d, dh, in the middle of a word between vowels, the difference only being graphic, e.g.
khiddd kild Skr. krTda * play * ; mulho mudho Skr. mudha ' foolish ' ; dalho Skr. drdha * firm.'
4) Through the influence of r, vowel or consonant, and « and /*, the dentals are sometimes made cerebrals, e.g.
dahali Skr. v/dah * to burn * ; daddho Skr. dagdhd * burnt.*
PHONETIC CHANGES. 9
ha to Skr. hrtd * seized ' ; pati Skr. prati * to.' upaft/idpanam Skr. upastliiipana * providing.*
5) l=:d is substituted sometimes for n, e.g. muldlo Skr. mrnala * lotus-fibre ' ; vein venu Skr. venu * bamboo.'
6) An interchange between d and r takes places, e.g. in ekdddsa ekdrasa ' eleven ' ; ediso eriso * such.'
7) The mutes of one class are occasionally used for the mutes of another :
Pakudho and Kakudho.
kipiUiko and kipi/lako Skr. pipllika * ant.'
gadduhano Skr. dadrughna * good for leprosy.*
takkollam Skr. kakkola ' bdellium.'
samputito sahkutito sahkucito from Skr. y/ kut or \/ kuc 'shrivelled'; cikicchati and tikicchali Skr. cikits 'to care'; jighncchd dighacchd Skr. jighatsa * hunger.'
8) For sonants the surds appear : — pdtu Skr. priidur (in comp.). akildsu Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.* chakalo Skr. chagala ' a he-goat.*
palikho paligho Skr. parigha 'an iron beam.*
mudihgo mutihgo Skr. mrdanga ' a kettle-drum.*
thakam Skr. sthagana ' covering.'
chdpo Skr. 9a va ' young of an animal.'
paldpo Skr. palava * chafi*,' perhaps through tbe influence of paldpo Skr. pralapa * nonsense.'
avdpiirati and apdpurati Skr. ava-j- \/vr ' to open.' Several derivatives of sad show t in the place of d.
9) An interchange between surd and sonants takes place, e.g.:
Sdgald Skr. Qiikala ; elamugo Skr, edamuka ' deaf and dumb.'
Nighandu Skr. Nighantu.
For the cerebral t in such instances / appears, e.g.
dlaviko Skr. iitavika ' dwelling in forests ' ; cakkavdlam and cakkabdio for Skr. cakraviita and cakrabala.
10) We find v interchanged with p in the same word, and vice versd. This last change seems only graphic, e.g.
kavi kapi Skr. kapi ' a monkey.'
10 TALI GRAMMAR.
11) A change takes place sometimes between the sonant aspirates, for which the aspirate h is substituted.
lahu laghu Skr. laghu * light ' ; holi by the side of hhacati Skr. bhavati ; but also idha and iha for Skr. iha ' hither,' where the original form is, perhaps, preserved in Piili.
12) n and / are frequently interchanged in Piili, e.g. nahgalarfi lahgalam Skr. liingala *a plough'; pilandhanam
Skr. pinaddha ' an ornament.'
Semivowels.
1) y is inserted in a word to avoid hiatus after a consonant has been elided between two vowels, e.g. khdyito P.P.P. from khadati Skr. v/khad ' to eat ' ; sdyaniyo from sdyati for Skr. svadate * to taste.'
For the same reason it appears as if y was interchangeable with V in such words as dniso voc. to ayasma, where it stands for duso.
2) y is interchangeable with r in antardrati and antardyati
* to run into danger ' Skr. antaraya * danger, impediment ' ; nahdru Skr. snayu * a sinew.'
3) r is interchangeable with /, e.g. taluno taruno Skr. taruna
* tender ' ; cattalisam cattarlmm Skr. catvarira9at * forty ' ; further in some of the numerals where r is interchanged with d, telasa terasa and tedasa Skr. trayoda^an 'thirteen.' jaldbu corresponds to Skr. jariiyu 'womb'; halidydhho haliddo and hari correspond to Skr. haridrabha and hari * yellow.'
4) Purindado, an epithet of Indra, corresponds to a Skr. Purandara, the change being due to false etymology, just as in. palihodha 'obstacle,' where two roots have been confounded.
5) For /, r is substituted occasionally, and the former is generally the original sound : kira Skr. kila ' they say ' ; drammanam Skr. iilambana ' support, basis * ; arahjaro Skr. alinjara ' waterpot.'
6) We find / for Skr. d in bubbulam budbuda ' a bubble.'
Nasals.
The MSS. greatly vary in the expression of the nasals. No fixed rules can therefore be given, as also the native
COMPOUND CONSONANTS. H
grammarians are at variance in this respect. It may, however, be stated that r, h and s cerebralize a dental nasal, which then is interchangeable with the palatal nasal.
§ 14. COMPOUND CONSONANTS.
In the beginning of every Pali word only vowels, simple consonants, or consonants in conjunction with the semivowels y, V, r, occur. Assimilation is the commonest means of eflfecting this change. This assimilation, of course, considerably alters the shape of a word, and therefore, when a word commences with a vowel or simple consonant in Sanskrit, in Pali also a vowel or simple consonant appears; whereas, if a double consonant, otherwise than in conjunction with y, r, v, com- mences a word, the corresponding word in Pali takes a different form.
The same rules which apply to the beginning of a word also apply to the middle of a word. Here, also, conjunct consonants, belonging to different classes, are avoided through the help of assimilation, or through the insertion of a vowel.
The rules of assimilation apply to the beginning of a word as well as to the middle, and if, at the beginning of a word, a simple consonant is exhibited, the word takes in com- position always the two sounds from which the simple sound originated.
The chief rule for assimilation is, that of two consonants the former is entirely assimilated to the latter. The two sounds, if the one was a surd, the other a sonant, are assimilated (viz. the final letter is assimilated to the following initial) ; a perfect assimilation takes place, so that the two sounds are not only made to belong to one class, but also to the same order. In Piili itself it will be sufl&cient if the last of these processes is pointed out, as the first has taken place in common with other Indian dialects, anterior to the fixing of the Pali language.
A second means of avoiding conjunct consonants was the insertion of a vowel between two letters. This could only
12 TALI GRAMMAR.
take place when one of the letters was a semivoicel or a nasal, in either of which the part of a vowel (svarabhakti) is already inherent.
It remains now to consider the Phonetic changes which tuke place in the word itself :
1) It is self-evident that when two consonants belonging to the same class meet together, they are preserved intact, e.g. cittani Skr. citta * mind, thought ' ; lajjd Skr. lajja * shame * ; annam Skr. anna ' food..'
2) Mutes + Mutes are Assimilated.
k + t =tt lattakam Skr. laktaka *a red dye'; wM/^d Skr.
raukta 'pearl ' ; mutto Skr. mukta * released.' k-{-th=ztth sittham Skr. siktha 'bee's wax'; satthi Skr.
sakthi * thigh.' g-\-dh=.ddh duddho Skr. dugdha 'milked.* g-\-hh=.bhh pahbharo Skr. pragbhara *a cave.* d-\-g ^=gg sagguno Skr. sadguna * good quality ' ; puggalo
Skr, pudgala ' individual.* d-\-gh=:.ggh ugghoso Skr. udghosha 'proclamation'; uggharati
Skr. ud+ \/ghr ' to open.' d-\-h =^bb bubbulam Skr. budbuda 'a bubble.* d-\-bh = bbh abbhufo Skr. adbhuta 'wonderful, mysterious.* p-\-t =U tatfo Skr. tapta ' burnt.' b-\-j =^jj khvjjo Skr. kubja 'limping,* b'\-d =.dd saddo Skr. 9abda ' sound.' b+dh=ddh laddho Skr. labdha ' taken.*
3) Mutes + Nasals.
ASSIMILATION. SVAKABIIAKTI.
k ■\-n sakkoti sakunati Skr. 9aknoti * to be
able.* k + m rumma rukuma Skr. rukma * gold.*
g +n naggo Skr. nagnd * naked ' aggi aggini gini Skr. agni ' fire.*
gh 4- n agghd Skr. aghnat * not kiUing.'
SEMIVOWELS. 13
A8SIMILATI0IT. STAKABHAKTI.
/ +n fl'ww Skr. ajnji. 'command.'
fidti Skr. jfiati * kinsman.' d •{•m kudumalo Skr. kudmala *an
opening bud.' t +» sappatto Skr. sapatna
' hostile.' ratanam Skr. ratna * jewel.'
gahapatdnl Skr. grhapatnl * housewife.' t + m attd atumd Skr. atman * self.'
th + n mattho Skr. mathna
* shaking.' rf +m chaddam Skr. chadman
' roof.' padumam Skr. padma * lotus.'
dh-\-m idhumam Skr. idhma * fire-
wood.' p -^-n pappoti pdpiinati Skr. prapnoti * he
obtains.' 4) Nasal + surd remains mostly unchanged. However, by the side of amhd Skr. amba * mother,' we have amwd, and by the side of paaca ' five,' paJihdsa and pamidsa Skr. panca9at * fifty,' where the nn is probably due to the influence of s.
Further, hhdjiako * a jar ' by the side of hhandaham * a utensil ' Skr. bhanda.
6) Of two nasals the first is assimilated to the second, eg. : ninnam Skr. nirana 'depth.' jammam Skr. janman 'birth.'
Semivowels.
6) No fixed rules can be given, y, after gutturals, palatals, labials, and the sibilant s, is either preserved or assimilated, alwaj's so that the semivowel is assimilated to the preceding consonant (not as is the case with mutes in conjunction with mutes where the first sound is assimilated to the second) or a vowel is inserted between the mutes and the semivowel.
An example will suffice :
Sdkiyo Sakyo Sakko Skr. Qilkya.
14 PALI GRAMMAR.
7) j is made through the influence of // arbitrarily a dental in dosino ISkr. jyotsnii * a moonlit night,* but we have also junhd ; daddallati Skr. jiijvalyate * to blaze.*
jijd eindjif/d Skr. jya * a bowstring.*
8) The preposition abhi before vowels becomes ahhha. We have, of course, simple assimilation. Is gheppati pass, to Vgrah *to take *= Skr. grbhyate?
9) In conjunction with the sibilants we have : dlasiyani diasyam dlassam Skr. alasya * sloth.* sdlo Skr. 9yala * brother-in-law.*
10) The dentals in conjunction with y are palatalized or kept intact.
c and ch sometimes represent the surd dentals when followed by y and j, and j'h, the sonant dentals in con- junction with y. The dental nasal -\-y Ib also palatalized, becoming tiFi.
The preposition adhi before vowels becomes aj'/ha ; ati in the same way ace ; iti ' thus ' becomes ice. A form atyappo, is of frequent occurrence, this form, however, only shows i=^y before a vowel.
Other examples are :
paecmo Skr. pratyiisha * dawn ' ; saceo Skr. satya * true ' ; cdgo Skr. tyaga * abandoning ' ; majjam Skr. madya * strong drink'; majjho Skr. madhya 'middle*; hnjjo Skr. hrdya 'dear.*
11) r, in conjunction with y, is either assimilated or both letters are preserved intact with intervening vowel. If assimilation takes place, r is always assimilated to y, thus we find yy, not rr, which never occurs in Pali.
Cpr. ariyo and ayyo Skr. arya and arya ' noble.* bhariyd and hhayyd Skr. bhiirya * wife.' kdn'yo and kayyo Skr. karya * that ought to be done.*
12) In a few instances r+y is assimilated to //, as in pallahko Skr. paryanka ' couch.*
13) l-\-y is either preserved or y is assimilated to /=//. kalydno and kalldno Skr. kalyuna ' fortunate.*
mllo Skr. 5alya ' an arrow * ; nallako Skr. 9alyaka * a porcupine.*
14) v-\-y is difierently treated if it begins a word or if it is in the middle of a word.
SEMIVOWELS. 15
vy, according to Burmese and Siamese manuscripts, be- comes hy, whilst the Sinhalese write vy throughout at the beginning of a word, vydmo or hydmo Skr. vyama *a fathom.' This is often assimilated to v : vdio Skr. vyala * snake.'
In the middle of a word it is either written 6y, ty, or with assimilation hb, or, though less frequently, yy.
From kavi *a wise man, a poet,' kahbam and kavyam Skr. kavya * poetry.'
pattabbo, but also pattayyo and pattabyo Skr. praptavya
* attainable.'
The preposition vi becomes by before vowels.
15) h-\-y appears as yh, just as for A + r, the metathesis vh takes place. Besides this, we have assimilation and svarabhakti.
asayho Skr. asahya * unendurable.' The participle P.P. from lehati is leyyo Skr. lehya ' to lick ' ; hiyo and hiyyo appear for Skr. hyas * yesterday.*
16) ;* before gutturals, palatals, cerebrals, dentals, labials and the sibilant s is mostly assimilated.
saggo Skr. svarga * heaven ' ; dlgho Skr. dirgha * long,' but digghikd * an oblong pond ' ; maggo Skr. marga * path ' ; kakkatako Skr. karkataka * a crab.' In sakkhard Skr. 9arkara
* a potsherd,' we find aspiration.
accati Skr. -v/arc * to honour ' ; ajjavam Skr. arjava * recti- tude ' ; maijdro Skr. marjiira * a cat * ; nijjaro Skr. nirjara 'free from decay'; khajju Skr. kharju 'itching'; gajjati Skr. Vgarj * to roar ' ; miicchd Skr. murcha ' fainting.*
pakinnako Skr. praklrnaka * miscellaneous ' ; unno Skr. urna
* wool ' ; ramio Skr. varna * colour.'
Before dentals assimilation takes place, and the dental is sometimes altered to a cerebral. The MSS., however, differ greatly in the use of dental and cerebral letters.
We have kitti Skr. kirti ' fame * ; kevatto Skr. kaivarta ' fisherman ' ; vattati and vattati Skr. y/\rt ; addho and addho Skr. ardha' half.'
sappo Skr. sarpa * a snake * ; tappati Skr. Vtrp * to be glad ' ; gabbho Skr. garbha * womb ' ; dabbho Skr. darbha ' kuca grass ' ; dhamrno Skr. dharma ' law ' ; katnmam Skr. karman * action ' ; Nammadd Skr. Narmada * Nerbudda.'
16 TALI GRAMMAR.
17) r-\-r=zbb: nibbdrtam Skr. nirvana (a technical term) ; gnbbo Skr. garva * pride * ; pabbato Skr. parvata ' mountain ' ; ubbt ' earth ' Skr. urvl.
18) r-\-h. In this combination both letters are preserved with or without an inserted vowel: arahu Skr. arhant; tarahi tarhi Skr. tarhi * then ' ; garahati Skr. Vgarh * to blame.*
19) If r follows gutturals, it is either assimilated or a "vowel is inserted, and both letters are preserved. In case of
assimilation the guttural is optionally aspirated.
cakkam Skr. cakra *a wheel*; akkodho Skr. akrodha 'mild- ness * ; kujjhati Skr. -v/^rudh * to be angry * ; gdhati Skr. -v/grah * to take * ; ghdyati Skr. -v/ghrii * to smell ' ; aggo Skr. agra * first ' ; kiriyd kriyd Skr. kriya ; kkiddd kild Skr. krida •play.'
20) For r followed by a palatal cpr. vajiro Skr. vajra ' thunderbolt,' and paj'tro Skr. pajra * firm.*
21) Dentals followed by r are either assimilated or preserved intact, r sometimes aspirates a preceding dental. Optionally, also, the dental is changed to a cerebral. In many instances we find three forms :
kutra, kuttha, kutta Skr. kutra ' where ' ; gattam Skr. gatra
* limb ' ; sattu satthu Skr. 9atru * enemy * ; bhadro bhaddo Skr. bhadra * good * ; giddho Skr, grdhra * greedy ' ; Dd/nilo Skr. Dravida ; dravo davo Skr. drava * liquid ' ; chuddho khuddho Skr. kshudra * mean.'
22) After labials, r is assimilated: /)fl//Skr. prati (a prep.) ; pa Skr. pra (in compos.) ; pdno Skr. pnTna * breath * ; pii/o Skr. priya * dear * ; bhdmo Skr. bhrama ' whirling * ; sappamio Skr. sa+prajna * wise.*
br is preserved in Brahmd Skr. Brahman ; bravlti Skr. ■v/bru *to speak.*
mr is assimilated in the beginning : makkheti Skr. v/mrksh
* to anoint' ; miyyati miyati Skr. v/mr * to die.'
For mr in the middle of a word, cfr. ambo Skr. amra * the mango tree ' ; tambo Skr. tamra * copper.*
23) v-\-r in the beginning of a word is assimilated to r, in the middle of a word it always becomes bb.
vajati Skr. \/vraj * to walk ' ; hut pabbojati Skr. pra+ v^vraj
SEMIVOWELS. 17
* to go forth'; vajo Skr. vraja *a cow-pen*; subbato Skr. suvrata * conscientious ' ; tibbo Skr. tlvra ' sharp.*
24) r, after sibilants, is assimilated :
sdvako Skr. 9rdvako * pupil, follower ' ; sauu Skr. 9va9ru
* mother-in-law ' ; assu Skr. a9ru * a tear * ; sitnoti Skr. y/<}r\x
* to hear ' ; asso Skr. a9ra * corner* ; assavo Skr. asrava * dis- charge * ; but 8iri Skr. 9ri * fortune,' with svarabhakti.
25) For /i + r, cp. hiri Skr. hrl * shame' ; ahirikd Skr. ahrl
* shamelessness * ; rasso Skr. hrasva ' short ' ; rahado Skr. hrada * a pool.'
26) / is assimilated before gutturals and labials. phaggu Skr. phalgu * reddish.'
appo Skr. alpa * little ' ; kappo Skr. kalpa * period of time ' ; jappo Skr. jalpa ' word, speech * ; goppho Skr. gulpha * ancle.*
27) Through metathesis gumbo Skr. gulma * thicket ' ; simbali Skr. ctilmali * cotton-tree.*
28) For /+ V cp. kibbisam Skr. kilvisha * fault * ; billo, but also beluvo Skr. bilva and bailava * the vilva-tree ' ; khallato Skr. khalvata ' bald ' ; pallalam Skr. palvala ' small tank.'
29) / after gutturals shows svarabhakti in kileso Skr. kle9a
* sin * ; kilissati Skr. ■v/kli9 * to suffer * ; kilomakam Skr. kloman * right lung ' ; kilamati Skr. V^lara * to be tired ' ; gildno Skr. glana ' faded ' ; and from this an abstract gelanmm is formed, see § 9. akildsu Skr. aglasnu ' healthy.* Without svarabhakti kleso ' sin.'
30) For / after labials cp.
pilavo Skr. plava ' a kind of duck ' ; pihakam Skr. pllhan
* spleen * ; piluvati and plavati Skr. y/^\\x ' to float * ; plavo Skr. plava * a raft.*
ambilo Skr. amla 'sour*; milakkho Skr. mleccha 'stranger.*
31) After r, / is assimilated in dullabho Skr. durlabha.
32) For I after sibilants cp.
siloko Skr. 9loka ' stanza ' ; sileaumo semho Skr. 9leshman ' phlegm ' ; silittho Skr. 9lishta * adhering * ; sildgha Skr. 9lagha * praise ' ; asilesd Skr. a9le8ha ' name of a lunar mansion.*
33) For h + l cp. hilddati, hilddo, hilito Skr. ^lilad 'to be glad.*
.2
18 PALI GRAMMAR.
34) r, in conjunction with gutturals in the middle of a word is assimilated : thus pnkko Skr. pakva 'cooked.' In the beginning of a word, kathito Skr. y^kvath ' boiled.*
35) For V after palatals op. jaldti * to blaze,' and the intensive daddallati Skr. jajvalyati.
36) V after cerebral: kinnam Skr. kinva ' yeast.'
37) t? AFTER DENTALS.
1) t-\-V'. tvam, tiivam, tarn Skr. tvam 'thou'; tarati Skr. ■v/tvar ; taco Skr. tvac 'skin, bark.' In cattdro Skr. catvaras
* four,' and in ittaro Skr. itvara * going,' we have assimila- tion. In caccaro Skr. catvara *a court' v was changed into p, which then palatalized the t. The gerundial suffixes ivdna and tra are mostly preserved, but sometimes hdna is contracted into tuna. IriMjo Skr. rtvij 'an officiating priest.'
2) d-\-v'. dlpo Skr. dvlpa 'an island'; doso Skr. dvesha 'hatred'; saddalo Skr. 9advala 'grassy.' For Skr. dvi, as separate numeral, the forms dve and duve occur ; in com- position, however, dvi^ di, du and hd : bdrasa Skr. dvada9an
* twelve ' ; hdvlsati Skr. dvavim9ati.
3) dh-\-v=dh: dhajo Skr. dhvaja 'flag'; dhamseti corre- sponds to Skr. -v/dhvams * to fall, to perish,' and in composition uddhamseii ; dhani Skr. dhvani * sound ' ; addhd Skr. adhvan 'path.'
38) V after sibilants is mostly assimilated :
asso Skr. a9va ' horse ' ; bhassaro Skr. bhasvara * brilliant.' In the beginning of a word 8V is sometimes preserved. We find also svarabhakti and assimilation, sdmi and suvdml Skr. svamin * lord.* sd Skr. 9 van ' dog,' has the following forms besides : aono, suno, sdno, svdno and snvdno. svannam and Borpiam correspond to Skr. svarna ' gold.' saggo Skr. svarga ' heaven, paradise,* but the adjective soraggiko. are, sure Skr. 9vas ' yesterday ' ; soithi and suratthi Skr. svasti 'health.*
39) Through metathesis h-^v has become rh in jirhd Skr. jihva ' tongue ' ; savhayo Skr. sahvya ' called, named.*
gahhharatn Skr. gahvara ' cavern.'
40) Sibilants in conjunction with the surd letters. Following or preceding the surds, the sibilants are always
SIBILANTS. 19
assimilated ; mostly an aspiration of this combination takes place.
Skr. ksh becomes kkh and cch ; some of the words exhibit both forms. Skr. shk and %\.=-kkh.
1) cakkhu Skr. cakshus 'eye'; Rakkhaso Skr. Eakshasa; riikkJio Skr. vrksha * tree ' ; hhikkhu Skr. bhikshu ' a mendi- cant'; khalati Skr. v/skhal *to tumble'; khandho Skr. skandha
* shoulder ' ; khattiyo Skr. kshatriya * member of the second caste ' ; khayo Skr. kshaya * decay ' ; khipati Skr, Vkshlv
* to spit.*
2) kacchd Skr. kaksha * a girdle ' ; kitcchi Skr. kukshi
* belly ' ; chamd Skr. kshama * earth.'
3) akkhi acchi Skr. akshi * eye ' ; ikko, accho, and with a singular assimilation iso and isso Skr. rksha * bear ' ; khuddo chuddho Skr. kshudra 'small'; chano khano Skr. kshana
* moment, a festive time ' ; pakkho paccho Skr. paksha
* a wing ' ; khuro Skr. kshura * razor ' ; cullo, culo, culo Skr. kshuUa * small ' ; sakkato Skr. samskrta ' Sanskrit ' ; nikko Skr. nishka ' a golden ornament ' ; nikkeso Skr. nishke^a
* bald.'
4) Skr. 9C=ecA: acchariyo Skr. accarya * wonderful ';/)accAd Skr. paccat ' behind ' ; vicchiko Skr. vr9cika ' a scorpion ' ; nicchinati Skr. ni8+ Vci 'to ascertain.'
5) t% and ps become alike cch.
hibhaccho Skr. bibhatsa * loathsome * ; cikicckati tikicchati Skr. cikitsati * to cure ' ; dicchati Skr. ditsati (desid. to Vda) ; macchari Skr. matsarin * selfish.'
acchard Skr. apsaras ' a nymph ' ; lacchati Skr. lipsati (desid. to v/labh).
6) 8htshth = tth: ^(//Aa^i Skr. tishthati 'to stand'; yittho Skr. ishtk P.P.P. to Vyaj 'to sacrifice'; attha Skr. ash tan 'eight' ; chattho Skr. shashtha ' sixth * ; hhattJio Skr. bhrashta * fallen ' ; mattho and matto Skr. mrshta ' polished ' ; hhattho and hhatto Skr. bhrshta' fried.'
7) leddu * a clod of earth,' is supposed to stand for Skr. loshta. The modem vernaculars, however, show the forms lendu and leddu.
8) Skr. st and sth are generally represented by tth. This
20 PALI GRAMMAR.
may optionally be cerebralized. atthi Skr. asthi 'bone*; atthi Skr. asti *to be'; hatthl Skr. hastin 'elephant/ and without aspiration atto Skr. asta * thrown.*
9) In the beginning of a word cp. thakanam Skr. sthagana
* covering ' ; thamhho Skr. starabho ; thdnam Skr. sthana ' standing,' and other derivatives from Vsthji with cerebrali- zation ; thero Skr. sthavira * priest ' ; ihupo Skr. stQpa
* a tope * ; thcvo and chevo * a drop,* to Skr. ^/stip, and perhaps chamhhati Skr. \/stambh * to amaze ' ; khdnu Skr. sthiinu ' stump of a tree.*
10) In conjunction with the labials the sibilants are assimi- lated ; sometimes an aspiration takes place. The characters for /), ph being very much alike in Siamese, Burmese and Sinhalese MSS., it is very difficult to say if this is more than graphic.
11) phasso Skr. spar^a 'touch'; phusati Skr. y/^VT9 '^ touch' ; puppliam Skr. pushpa 'flower'; by the side of pupphiio a form phitssito occurs, both going back to Skr. pushpita 'flowering.'
12) happo Skr. vashpa * a tear ' ; apphotd Skr. asphota 'jasmine'; nippapo Skr. nishpapa 'free from sin'; nippaco Skr. nishpava * winnowing, clearing * ; mpphddanam * ac- complishment,* to nipajjati Skr. nis+Vpad; nij^phalo Skr. nishphala * fruitless.'
41) Groups of nasals with sibilants following are treated in difierent ways : 1) The group is preserved intact ; 2) be- tween the sibilant and the nasal a vowel is inserted ; 3) the sibilant is changed to A, and metathesis takes place. In the beginning of a word assimilation may take place.
In several instances a word appears under more than one form.
1) sineho sneho Skr. sneha ' friendship ' ; nisneho * without love * ; sindnam nahdnam Skr. sniina ' bathing ' ; siniddho niddho Skr. snigdha * oily ' ; snnhd smiim husd Skr. snushu ' sister-in-law ' ; Sineru Neru Mem Sumeru probably belong together, and point to a form Sneru.
2) panhi Skr. pr9ni ' variegated ' ; pmiho Skr. pra9na ' question ' ; tajihd tasind Skr. trshna * lust ' ; kanho kasino Skr. krshna ' black ' ; unho Skr. ushna ' hot.'
SANDHI. 21
3) aitam mihitam Skr. smita * smile ' ; massu Skr. 9ma9ru
* beard ' ; gimho Skr. grishma ' summer ' ; asmd am/id Skr. agman 'stone'; semho silesumo Skr. gleshman 'phlegm'; rasmi ramsi Skr. ra9rai * a ray of light ' ; ramsimd Skr. ra9mimat
* radiant ' ; apamdro apasmdro Skr. apasmara * epilepsy.'
4) In the oblique case of the pronoun sm is optionally changed into mh, and thus also in the form of the^ verb, subst. anihi asmi amlie asme.
42) In combination with nasals, h shows svarabhakti or metathesis.
ganhati Skr. grhnati ' to grasp ' ; hanute hnute Skr. hnute 'to conceal oneself' ; cihanam cinham Skr. cihnana 'mark, sign * ; jimho Skr. jihma * crooked.'
43) Groups of three or more consonants are treated like those consisting only of two. Assimilation takes place, in some instances svarabhakti.
uddham uhhham Skr. urdhvam ' upwards.' The repre- sentation is, of course, due to the different assimilation which took place ; just as in disvd, and less frequently datt/iu, for Skr. drshtva v'dr9; uddhumdyati (pass.) Skr. ud+\/<ihma 'to be blown up ' ; tikkino tikklio tinho Skr. tikshna * sharp ' ; sanho Skr. 9lak8hna * smooth ' ; jiinhd dosino Skr. jyotsna ' moonlight ' ; kasino Skr. krtsna * entire ' ; satti Skr. 9astri 'knife'; idattat/am=.idam-\-frai/a; lacchati Skr. lapsyati fut. to \/lahh ; checchati fut. to chindati Skr. -v/chid * to cut ' ; macco Skr. martya ' mortal ' ; maccho Skr. matsya ' fish ' ; alio Skr. adra 'wet'; vatumam vattam Skr. vartman; itthi itthi thl Skr. strl ' woman.'
44) Three consonants are only allowed in conjunction with the semivowels.
§ 15. SANDHI.1
In the preceding paragraphs the phonetic changes which take place in the midst of a word have been considered. It remains now to be seen what changes take place in the
> Cpr. On Sandhi in Pall by the late R. C. Childen, Journal Royal Asiatic Society, 1879.
22 PALI GRAMMAR.
sentence. None of the Sandhi rules known from Sanskrit grammar as imperative are so in Pali. We have of course only to deal with external Sandhi in Pali, as internal Sandhi has been treated under the heading of phonetic changes, to which it properly belongs.
In prose the MSS. differ greatly in the use of Sandhi, and whilst, for instance, Burmese and Siamese MSS. prefer writing khvdham, the Singhalese MSS. separate the words into kho aham. In verse Sandhi of course takes place according to the exigencies of the metre. Later texts, such as ""the Dipavamsa, take great liberties, omitting whole syllables, etc.
The following tables will show the most frequent changes that occur : —
VOWEL SANDHI.
VOWELS IN COMBINATION VHTH VOWELS.
a+a=:id'. ndhosi=na ahosi.
a+a+coNjUNCT coNSONANT=a : na 'tthi=na atthi; pana annam=:pan' annam.
flf4-fl+ CONJUNCT CONSONANT =d : ndssa=na assa.
a before a is rarely elided. Such elision generally takes place before aham * 1/ ai/am * this,' and the forms of the verb atthi * to be.*
d-\-h=d: taddyam=tadd ayam ; iaddsi=tadd dai.
d-{-i=:e: bandhuss 'eva=.bandhussa ica.
d + ^ = 0 : nopetizn na upeti.
a + iti=. d : Tissdti vacancna = Tissa Hi.
a-\-piz=. dpi : ajjdpi = ajja.
d + M=u : cubhayam-=.ca ubhayam ; tadup(f = tadd upa- sammanti.
a-{-i=d (elision of i): yena *me=yena ime. This elision seems only to take place in case of the pronoun idam.
a+t or M=» or w (elision of a) : pahdy* imam=pahdya imam ; tatr' idam-=tat)'a idam; yass* indriydnznyassa indriydnii; ten* upa8ankami= fena upasahkami.
VOWEL 8ANDHI. 23
a is elided before d u e o: yen* di/asmd ; uithdi/* dsand ; idh* dcuso; eken* uno-=.ekena um\ netv' ekamantikam \ o* etarahi tass' okdsam.
d sometimes elides a short vowel, and less often a long vowel other than d : disvd 'panissayam for diavd upan° ; sided *va for sutvd eva.
d is often elided before a long vowel or a short followed by a conjunct consonant : tath' eva=.tathd\ netv* ekamantikam eva=neti'd ek°.
d-|-i=e in seyyathldam=.seyyathd idam and saddhidhdzs, saddhd idhd.
% is elided before short or long vowels : gacchdm* aham gacchdmi a° ; p' ajja=-pi ajja ; dasah' upagatam-=dasahi upa°.
i is elided in timh' a^sa=.tmihi assa.
«+t=l: in combinations with iti: samanUdha=.8amantiidha.
i-\-a=.a : kihcdp)i=.kinci api (more frequently kiticid apt).
i preceded by t or tt and followed by a vowel becomes fy: jlcanty elaka ; ty ayam ti ayam. The examples are from late Pali works, and are perhaps doubtful.
itl-\-ecam: ity evam, but also according to the rules after which iy h palatalized ice evam, and thus di=jj ; api=app, etc., as pointed out above, § 14, and ifv evam.
u is elided before a vowel: samef dyasmd=sametu d°; sadh* dvuso=-sadhu° \ tusites' upapajjat/iaz=tusitesu upa°.
u-\-i=.u~^ sadhuti=.sadhu iti; kitnsudha=-kimsu-\-idha. 5efore a vowel changes into v. The examples are doubtful : vatthv* eva-=vatthu eva.
e may be elided before a long vowel: w' d8i=me dsi; stlavant* ettha-=.sllavanto ettha.
e sometimes elides a following vowel: te 'me=^te ime; sace 'jja=ajj'a.
e+a=.d : sacdham = sace + ahaip .
e-\ra=jyi the a being lengthened: tydham=.te aham. After
louWe consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.
0 often elides a following vowel: so '/iam=.so aham ; pattiko *vaz=°eva; kattahbo' posathe=.k° upo°.
0 is elided before a vowel : kuV eUha=kufo ettha \ katam' assa^^katamo assa.
24 PALI GRAMMAR.
o+a=d: duJikhAyam—dukkho ayam.
o+a=r, the a being lengthened: 8vdham=-80 afiam; khvd' ham=.kho aham. After a double consonant lengthening takes place arbitrarily.
0 becomes v before a long vowel.
§ 16. EUPHONIC CHANGES.
1) If a word ending in d, is followed by idam, or one of its oblique cases, y is inserted : na yklam, na-y-iinassa.
2) iva after words ending in vowels or nasal vowels becomes viya sometimes : e.g. kim v'uja like what.
3) V is inserted if a vowel is followed by u or u.
4) eva becomes yeva after words ending in vowels or nasal vowels.
6) m is inserted between two vowels : idha-m dhu:=idha dhu; jeyya-m attdnam=jeyya atf\ idha-m-ijjhati, giri-m-iva.
6) r is inserted when a word ending in a vowel is followed by a word commencing with a vowel: dhiratthu and vijjur eva.
7) d\a inserted in sammad eva, anvad eva, satthud anvayo. These consonants have been inserted according
to false analogy.
8) A few instances occur of the original consonant reappear- ing which, according to the phonetic rules in Pali should be omitted.
manasdd atmavimxittdnam-=mana8d° \ yasmdd apeti (and so in Sanskrit) ; tasmdd eva=ta8md; kenacid eva; ahud eva (Skr. abhud eva) ; puthag eva (Skr. prthag eva) ; pageva (Skr. prageva) ; tunhltn dslnam (Skr. tushnim) ; vuttir esd (Skr. vrttir esha) ; sahhhir eva (Skr. sadbhir eva) ; pathavi dhdtur eva=dhdtu eva (Skr. dhiitur eva) ; punar eva=puna eva (Skr. punar eva) ; hhattur atthe=hhattu atthe (Skr. bhartur arthe) ; chal eva (Skr. shad eva).
9) The niooahTta stands sometimes for an original final consonant. This can be replaced by an original consonant before vowels : sakim stands for Skr. sakrt, and before eva it becomes aakid eva, in accordance with Sanskrit.
10) The same is the case with tarn yam etam, which stand
/
DECLENSION. 26
for tad yad etad respectively, and appear in this shape before vowels : tad eva ; etad avoca.
11) Owing to false analogy, wrong consonants sometimes appear by the side of the right : punam eva for punar, artnad atthu for annam, hahud eva for hahur.
12) Original double consonants which are assimilated are sometimes after vowels doubled.
13) In verse the niggahTta is elided before a consonant : no ce muhceyya candimam for munceyyam ; maccdna jlvitam for maccdnam ; etam huddhdna sdsanam for buddhdnam sds°.
14) Sometimes the nasal vowel 4*«ntirely elided : im* etam z=.imam etamy^mpajf aham =. nipajjim aham,
am-\-a=a: ekam iddham samayam; ekam idam aham; evdyam=evam ay am.
15) If a word ends in niggahTta and a consonant follows, it may be changed to the nasal of that class to which the con- sonant belongs: tn-\-k-=nk, m-\-c:=nc, m=^tz=nt, m-\-t=-nt, m-\-p'=^mp.
16) A word ending in the niggahTta, followed by a word beginning with y, becomes nn : tarn yeva=.tanneva ; dnantari- kannam.
17) The niggahTta before h optionally becomes n : evanhi.
§ 17. DECLENSION.
1) We have drawn attention in the chapter on Phonetics to the fact that Pali only allows vowels and nasalized vowels at the end of a word. Through this law the shape of a word is considerably altered. Roughly speaking, vowels are either substituted at the end of a word, or those consonants which would impede the action of this law are dropped. A con- sequence of this process is, that, although the essential features of the various Sanskrit declensions are preserved, no declension has kept within its proper range.
2) The nominative case as a prototype case has influenced the other cases, and since stems e.g. ending in as or a alike
26 PALI GRAMMAR.
form the nominative case in o, the as and a declension follow respectively the analogy of the as or o declension.
3) Besides this the influence of the declension of the pronouns on the declension of nouns has to be noticed, and vice vend.
4) Pali distinguishes three genders : masculine, feminine and neuter, two numbers singular and plural, and, including the vocative, eight cases. In the declension of neuter nouns and of pronouns some traces of an old dual are to be found, which will be noticed hereafter ; but practically speaking the dual is extinct.
5) The Piili grammarians recognize six case relations, which by their name indicate the functions of the cases. The nominative and vocative cases are of course omitted in this enumeration.
6) The nominative case is simply called the first case (pathamd). It simply expresses the subject. It is sometimes used instead of the vocative, which latter is called the alapanam * the addressing case.*
7) The names given respectively to the other cases to show their relation {karakam) are :
kammam accusative.
karanam instrumental.
sampaddnam dative.
apdddnam ablative.
sdmi genitive.
okdso or ddhdro locative.
Other terms are : for the accusative upai/ogo, for the ablative nissakko, and for the locative hhummo.
USES OF THE CASES.
I) The relation of the Accusative (kammam). The accusative is used as the case of the direct object of a transitive verb. The transitive verba have a somewhat wider range in all the Indian languages than in the related ones, and so we find an accusative as the goal of motion
USES OF THE CASES. 27
with verbs of * going/ * bringing,* * sending/ etc. Vihdram
gantid * having gone to the monastery/
Verbs of €peaking may follow the same rule. Tarn rdjd
idam abruii ' the king said this to him.*
The accusative is further used to denote space traversed
and duration of time. Patindsa yajandni gacchati ' he marches
fifty yojanas.*
It is used with verbs signifying to have recourse, to appear,
to ask. Buddham saranam gacchdmi ' I take my refuge in
the Buddha.*
Causative verbs have a double accusative. Updsakam mam
hhavam Gotamo dhdretu 'let the lord Gotama receive me as
a disciple.*
The accusative is used with the following prepositions : pati : Sangamam pati pihd * longing for union.*
pari : rukkham pari * in the direction of the tree.*
anu : arm Sdriputtam pannavd hhikkhu * a priest
inferior to S. in learning.* anto,antara: antara vUhim olokayamdno 'looking down into
the street.' abhi abhito: abhito gdmam 'round the village.' tiro : tiro bhdvam gacchati * he goes out of sight.*
II) The relation of the Instrumental (karanam). The instrumental denotes adjacency, accompaniment,
association, and of course, instrumentality. All the uses
of this case may be derived from its original meaning.
We notice particularly the use made of the instrumental
to denote 1) equality, likeness, accordance, default :
Rdgena samo aggi ndma natthi * there is no fire like lust/ akkhind kdno * blind of one eye.*
2) the space traversed and duration of time : nabhasd gacchati ' he goes through air.'
3) the construction of a passive verb or participle : evam me mtam ' thus it was heard by me.'
4) the prepositions aaha saddhim vind, though generally used with the instrumental, are also found with other cases :
Saha gabbhena jiiitakkhayam pdpunissdmi ' I shall perish together with my unborn child * ; Mahatd bhikkhu'Sahg/ieiia
28 PALI GRAMMAR.
saddhim * with a great company of priests ' ; vind dosena * without any fault.*
Ill) The relation of the Dative (sampaddnam) [effect- ing case]. The case of the indirect object. It is used to denote objects * to, towards, for, at, against,' which, anything is done or intended.
It is used, therefore, with words signifying
1) give, share out, and assign : Maggam dehi rahno ' make room for the king.'
2) Show, announce, declare : tasaa abruvi ' said to him * ; tut/ham avikaromi * I will explain thee.*
3) Give attention, have a regard or feeling, inclination, obeisance : Bhavato bhaddam hotu ' may good happen to the lord.*
4) In an infinitive sense : lokdnukampdya ' out of pity to the world.'
lY) The ablative relation (apdddnam). The 'from' case. It is used to denote removal, distinction, separation, issue, deprival, restraint: mdtito sudd/io '.pure on the mother's side ; ' avijfd paccayd sahkhdrd.
As special applications, we notice
1) the ablative after words expressing fear in interchange with the genitive : Sahbe bhdyanti maccuno or maccund ' all fear death.'
2) the ablative of distinction: yato panitataro id vaaitthataro vd natthi 'than whom there is none better or more ac- complished.' Also in interchange with the genitive and instrumental.
The ablative is used with the prepositions and adverbs implying the notion of distance, removal, such as dra * far off'; purd * formerly,' which are ablatives according to their formation : drd so dsavakkhayd * he is far from the extinction of passion* ; t<u%a dgamand purd * before his arriving.*
V) The genitive relation [sdmi]. The case relation is an adjectival one, out of which all other uses arise.
It is to a great extent interchangeable with IV) the locative [okd8o]y the * in' case.
Thus we find a locative and genitive absolutely employed :
DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 29
rudato ddrakassa or rudantasmim darake ' whilst the child was crying ' ; Evam vutfe ' having said thus.'
In connection with verbs and substantives denoting either possession or dominion, either the genitive or locative is used.
The locative is used interchangeably with the accusative, instrumental, dative, and ablative.
Among prepositional uses of the locative we notice upa and adhi having respectively the sense of inferior and superior to. Upa khdriyam dono ' a drona is inferior to a kharl ' ; adhi devesu Buddho * Buddha is superior to the gods.*
In interchange with the instrumental, the locative is used , with adjectives of the sense of satisfied, eager, zealous.
I. DECLENSION OF NOUNS.
"We shall now give the paradigms for the different declensions, of which we make two divisions.
I. Stems in vowels.
II. Stems in consonants.
We shall mark those forms which belong to the pro- nominal declension with f, those which are taken from another declension with *, obsolete forms with :{:.
STEMS IN YOWELS.
Masculine and Neuters in a.
Dhamma.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. dhammo dhamma J dhammase
Voc. dhamma dhammd dhamma
Ace. dhammam dhamme
Instr. dhammena vinaycL dhammehhi dhammehi
Dat. dhamtndya * dhammassa dhammdnam
Abl. dhammd fdhammasmd
t dhammamhd dhamynebhi dhammehi
Gen. dhammassa dhammdnam Loc. dhamme f dhammasmhn
fdhammamhi dhammcsu
\
|
30 |
PALI GRAMMAR. Neuters in a. Citta. |
|
|
8IM0VLAB. |
PI.UBAL. |
|
|
Nom. |
\ |
cittdni X ^i^^^ * citte |
|
Voc. |
cittam |
cittdni |
|
Ace. |
) |
cittani X ^^^^^ |
|
Instr, |
citiena |
cittehhi cittehi |
|
Dat. |
dttdya cittasm |
cittdnam |
|
Abl. |
cittd t ciltasma t cittamha |
cittehhi cittehi |
|
Gen. |
cittassa |
cittdnam |
|
Loc. |
citte t cittasmim cittamhi |
ciftesu |
The forms of this declension correspond more to those of Vedic Sanskrit than those of classical Sanskrit.
Cp. instr. sing. yajTid ; pi. nom. devdsas ; pi. nom. neut. pugd; pi. instr. devebhis. Is the form citte an old dual neuter?
Feminine Stems in a.
|
Kamid |
. |
|
|
SINGULAR. |
PLURAL. |
|
|
Nom. kanfid |
kamid * kanhdyo |
|
|
Voc. kufine |
kamid * kamidyo |
|
|
Ace. hahnam |
kamid * kamidyo |
|
|
Instr. hamidya |
kamidhhi kamidhi |
|
|
Dat. kamidya |
kamidnam |
|
|
Abl. kauhdya |
kamidbhi kanndhi |
|
|
Gen. kamidya |
kamidnam |
|
|
Loc. kamidyam |
* kamidya |
kahhdm |
|
The voc. sing, of |
ammd 'mother' is given as amma and |
|
|
ammd. |
||
|
Masculines |
in *. |
|
|
Aggi. |
||
|
SINGULAR. |
PLURAL. |
|
|
Nora, aggi |
aggayo aggiyo * aggi |
|
|
Voc. aggi |
aggayo aggiyo aggi |
|
|
Ace. aggim |
aggi * aggayo * aggiyo |
|
|
Instr. aggind |
agglhhi aggihi |
Dat.
aggino ^aggtssa
agglnam
STEMS IN VOWELS.
31
SIN'OVLAB.
Ahl. * oggind faggimhd f aggismd aggibhi agglhi Gen. * aggino * aggissa agglnam
Loc. aggini faggimhi ■faggismim agglsu
The voc. sing, of isi * a sage ' occurs as u€y corresponding to Sanskrit rshe.
From muni *a recluse' the loc. sing, occurs as mune.
Of ddi ' starting-point ' the following locative sing, forms occur :
ado, ddu corresponding both to Skr. adau, * ddim f ddiinhi f ddismim.
The neuters in i follow the declension of those in in. As paradigm aithi * a bone ' will be given.
|
Feminines in I. |
||
|
Ratti. |
||
|
SINOTTLAB. |
||
|
Nom. |
ratti |
|
|
Voc. |
ratti |
|
|
Ace. |
rattim |
|
|
Instr. |
rattiyd |
|
|
Dat. |
rattiyd |
|
|
Abl. |
rattiyd |
|
|
Gen. |
rattiyd |
|
|
Loc. |
rattiyam |
\ * rattiyd |
* ratti
* ratti
*
rattlyo
raiilhi
PLinEUL.
rattlyo rattlyo ratti rattibhi rattlnam rattibhi rattlnam %ratto rattim
Instead of the forms of the instr. sing, in iyd, yd occurs, corresponding to Sanskrit. This unites with the preceding consonant, and palatalizes the same arbitrarily ; matyd santyd for matiyd santiyd jaccd najjd for Jdtiya nadiyd A palatalization occurs in conjunction with other forms. The paradigm of nadt ' river * will show the declension.
Nom. nadi
Voc. nadl
Ace. nadim
Instr. nadiyd nadyd najjd
nadiyo * najjo * nadl
nadiyo * najjo * nadi
nadi * nadiyo J naj/e.
nadihhi nadihi * najjo
32
PALI GRAMMAR.
Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc.
SINGULAR.
nadiyd nadyd
najja
PLIRAL.
nadlnam nadlhhi nadihi nadlnam nadlsu
nadiyani nadiyd najjam The loc. sing, of Bdmmsl is given as Bdrdnasim. itthi, thl * a woman/ corresponding to Skr. strl, shows the following forms :
SINGULAR.
Nom. itthi
Voc.
Ace.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
Gen.
Loc.
itihl
itthim
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyd
itthiyam
thl itthlyo
thl itthlyo
itthiyam itthi
thiyam itthlbhi
thiyam itthinam
thiyam itthlbhi
thiyam itthinam
itthiyd itthlsu
Declension in u. Bhikkhu.
PLURAL.
thiyo
thiyo
* itthlyo
itthlhi
thlnam
itthlhi
thlnam
thlsu
* itthi
* itthi
Nom. Yoc.
Ace.
Instr.
Dat.
Abl.
SINGULAR.
bhikkhu bhikkhu
bhikkhiim bhikkhund * bhikkhuno bhikkhuno
bhikkhavo * bhikkhu bhikkhavo bhikkhave
* bhikkhu bhikkhu * bhikkhavo bhikkhuhi bhikkhubhi bhikkhunam bhikkhubhi bhikkhuhi
* bhikkhussa t bhikkhusmd t bhikkhumhd Gen. bhikkhuno * bhikkhussa bhikkhunam
Loc. t bhikkhusmim f bhikkhumhi bhikkhusu bhikkhusu
We have in adverbial use the gen. sing, heto and hetu from hetu.
The influence of other declensions we find in such forms as nom, plur. oi jantu and hetu : jantuyo jantuno, hctuyo hetuno. Masculines in u agree with those in m, showing the long u in the nom. voc. ace. plur. In those forms we have also formations according to other declensions, e.g. : sabbatmu : sabbammno abhibhu : abhibhuvo abhibhuno
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
33
Neuters in u form their nom. ace. plur. either in u or uni. The form of the aco. sing, in m is also used for the nomi- native.
Feminines in &. Jamhu.
|
8INOULAB. |
PLCRAL. |
|
|
Nom. |
jamhA |
jamhhjo * jamhu |
|
Voc. |
Jamhu |
jamhAyo * jamhu |
|
Ace. |
jamhiim |
jamhu *jamhuyo |
|
Instr. |
jamhuyd |
jamhuhhi jamhuhi |
|
Dat. |
jambuya |
jamhunam |
|
Abl. |
jamhuyd |
jamhuhhi jamhuhi |
|
Gen. |
jamhuyd |
jamhunam |
|
Loc. |
jamhuyam jamhuyd |
jamhum |
The loe. of bhu is hhuvi adverbially used.
Of crude forms ending in Sanskrit in diphthongs we find only go ' a cow.'
SINOULAB.
Nom. go
Voc. go
Ace. gam *gavam *gavum *gdvam
Instr. X ga id * gd vena
Dat. gdvassa
Abl. gdvd fgdi'asmd fgdvamha
Gen. *gdvassa
Loe. gdve fgdvamhi fgdvasmim
The influence of the ace. sing, of the diphthongal conjugation in other declensions, e.g. ace. sing. Skr. niyam from rai, Pali rdyo * wealth ' ; ace. sing. Skr. navam from nau, Pali ndvd * a ship.'
PLURAL.
gdvo
gdro
*gdvo
gobhi gohi
gavam *gunnam *gonam
gobhi gohi
gavam *giinnam *gonam
gosu *gdvesu
has effected a transition
|
II. STEMS IN CONSONANTS. |
|
|
Stems in ar, Skr. r. |
|
|
Satthd * teacher.' |
|
|
8IK0VLAR. PLURAL. |
|
|
Nom. |
mtthd satthdro |
|
Voc. |
satthd sattha satthdro |
34 TALI GRAMMAR.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Acc. aatthdram satthare *8atthd.ro
Instr. aatthard * satthund * aatthdrd satthdrebhi satthdrehi Dat. safthtt * satthmsa satthanam * satthdnam
* satthuno * mtthdrdnam
Abl. sat (hard mtthdrd sattharehhi * satthdrebhi
Gen. satthu satthiissa aatthatiam * satthdrdnam
* satthdnam Loc. satthari sattharesu *satthdresu
With the declension of satthd, that of pita nearly agrees.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. pita pitaro
Voc. pitd pita pitaro
Acc. pitaram pitare * pitaro
Instr. pitard *pitund pituhhi *pituhi pitarehhi
Dat. pitu *pitu8sa *pituno pitunnam pitHnam pitdnam
*pitardnam pituhhi *pituhi *pitarehhi
*pitareh,i pitunnam pitunam pitdnam
*pitardnam pitusu *pitusu *pitare8u
|
Abl. |
pitu *pitard |
|
Gen. |
pitu *pitu8sa *pituno |
|
Loc. |
pitari |
|
Mdtd |
|
|
SINGULAR. |
|
|
Nom. |
mdtd |
|
Voc. |
mdta *mdtd |
|
Acc. |
mdtaram |
PLURAL.
mdtaro mdtaro
mdtare * mdtaro Instr. mdtard*mdtuya*mdtyd mdtubhi *matubhi *mdtarehhi Dat. mdtu *mdtuya * mat yd mdtunam *mdtunam mdtdnam
* mdtardnam
Abl. mdtard*mdtuyd*matyd mdtubhi * mdtubhi *mdtarebhi Gen. mdtu *mdtuyd *matyd mdtunam * mdtunam mdtdnam
* mdtardnam
Loc. mdtari * mdtuyarn mdt- mdtusu * mdtmu * mdtdresu yam *mdtuyd *mdtyd
As an appendix to the declension in ar, it will perhaps be best to give the declension of aakhd * a friend.'
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
35
The word corresponds to the Skr. sakhi, which shows an irregular declension. The same irregularities we find also in Piili, and besides this we find the influence of other de- clensions. The forms are not marked.
SCrOULAK.
Nom. sakhd
Voc. sakhe sakhi sakhl sakhd sakha
Ace. sakhdram sakhdyam sakhdnam sakham
Instr. sakhind
Dat. sakhissa sakhino
Abl. sakhind
Gen. sakhissa sakhino
Loc. sakhe
Nom. sakhdyo sakhino
Voc. sakhdyo sakhino
Ace. sakhl sakhino
sakhdno sakhdno sakhdyo sakhdno
Instr. sakharehi sakhdrehhi sakhehi
Dat. sakhinam sakhdrdnam
Abl. sakharehi sakhdrehhi sakhehi
Gen. sakhardnflm sakhdrdnam sakhinam
Loc. sakkhdresu sakkhesu
II. Stems in Nasals.
|
1) in an. |
|||
|
Atfan 'self.' |
|||
|
SmOULAR. |
ThVVJiL. |
||
|
Nom. |
attd |
attdno |
|
|
Voc. |
atta *attd |
attdno |
|
|
Ace. |
attdnam *attanam *attam |
attano |
* attdno |
|
Instr. |
attand * attena |
*attanebhi |
*attebhi |
|
Dat. |
attano |
attanam |
* attdnam |
|
Abl. |
attand fattasmd |
*attanehhi |
*attebhi |
|
Gen. |
attano |
attanam |
* attdnam |
Loc. attani fattasmim attamhi attanesu
36
PALI GRAMMAR.
The form tltumd is of comparatively rare occurrence. We find : Ace. sing, dtumdnam
Nom. ace. plur. dtum&no Gen. and dat. plur. dtumdnam.
Brahman.
|
BlNOfLAJ |
I. |
PLIHAI,. |
|
|
Nom. |
brahmd |
hrahmdno |
|
|
Voc. |
hrahme |
hrnhmdno |
|
|
Ace. |
hrahmdnam |
* hrahmam |
hrahmano * hrahmdno |
|
Instr. |
hrahmttnd |
hrahmand |
* hrahmehhi |
|
Dat. |
hrahmuno |
* hrahmassa |
hrahmunam * hrahmdnam |
|
Abl. |
hrahmund |
hrahmand |
hrahmehhi |
|
t hrahmasmd |
|||
|
Gen. |
hrahmuno |
* hrahmassa |
hrahmunam * hrahmdnam |
|
Loc. |
hrahmuni |
hrahmam |
* hrahmesu |
|
•\hrahmasmim |
|||
|
Rdjan * king.* |
|||
|
BINOrLAR. |
PLURAL. |
||
|
Nom. |
rdjd |
• |
rdjd no |
|
Voc. |
raja * rdjd |
rdjdno |
|
|
Ace. |
rdjdnam *rdjam |
rdjano * rdjdno |
|
|
Instr. |
rahhd rdjina *rdjena |
rdjubld *rdjuhhi *rdjehhi |
|
|
Dat. |
rarim rdjino *rdja8sa |
ramam rdjunam * rdjdnam |
|
|
Abl. |
rawid t rdjamha |
rdjuhhi *rdjuhhi *rdjehhi |
|
|
Gen. |
ranno rdjino rq/assa |
rafiiiafn rcyunam * rdjdnam |
|
|
Loc. |
rdjini rantii *ranm |
rq/usu *rdjusu *rqfe8U |
|
|
Yucan 'young.' |
|||
|
SIXGVI.AU. |
|||
|
Nom. |
yard |
||
|
Voc. |
yuva |
yuvd |
*yurdna *yuvdnd |
|
Ace. |
yuednatn |
* yucam |
|
|
Instr. |
Xyund |
*yuvdnd |
* yuvena * yuvanena |
|
Dat. |
tyuno |
*yuvdna.'isa |
*yuvassa |
|
Abl. |
Xyuno |
*yucdnd |
fyuvanasma |
|
Gen. |
ty&no |
*yutas8a |
*yuvdna88a |
|
Loc. |
yuve |
yuci |
fyuvamhi fyuvasmim |
|
j/urdne |
fyuranasnn'm |
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
37
|
PLGRAI. |
|||
|
Nom |
1. yuvdno |
* yuvdnd |
|
|
Voc. |
yuvdnd |
||
|
Ace. |
yuve |
*yuvdne |
* yuvdnd |
|
Instr. yuvdnehi |
yuvehi |
||
|
Dat. |
yuvdndnam |
yuvdnam |
|
|
Abl. |
yuvdnehi |
yuvehi |
|
|
Gen. |
yuvdndnam |
yuvdnam |
|
|
Loc. |
yuvdnesu |
yuvdsu |
yuveau |
|
8d' |
dog.' |
||
|
SINOUT.AR. |
PLUHAl. |
||
|
Nom. |
sd |
sdno *8d |
|
|
Voc. |
sd |
sdno 8d |
|
|
Ace. |
sdnam *sam |
aano *8dno |
|
|
Instr. |
sund sand |
*send |
sdhhi |
|
Dat. |
*sdya *sassa |
sdnam |
|
|
Abl. |
sd t sasfnd |
t samhd |
sdhhi |
|
Gen. |
*sassa |
sdnam |
|
|
Loc. |
se fsasmim \samhi |
sdsu |
'sa "'se
Besides this, the following forms occur, and are declined as if belonging to the first declension :
sono mno svdno and suvdno. The fem. is sonl.
|
Pumd \_puma7i]. |
|||
|
SINGULAR. |
PLURAL. |
||
|
Nom. |
pumd |
pumdno |
|
|
Voc. |
pumam |
pumd |
pumdno |
|
Ace. |
pumdnam |
*pumam |
pumune pumdno |
|
Instr. |
pumund |
*pumdnd *pumend |
pumdnehi |
|
Dat. |
pumuno |
*pumassa |
pumdnam |
|
Abl. |
pumund |
pumdnehi |
|
|
Gen. |
pumuno |
*pumassa |
pumdnam |
|
Loc. |
pumane |
*pume |
pumdsu putnesu |
These paradigms have been given to show the way in which the an stems are treated. We find several instances where, according to what was said in the introduction, a
38
PALI GRAMMAR.
word has only preserved a few traces of its belonging to this class.
Besides the regular forms of the a declension of kammam, we find the instr. sing, kammund kammand, the gen. sing. kammuno, and the loc. kammani.
In several instances forms of the an declension are in adverbial use only.
2) Declension of Stems in mant vanf.
SmOULAR UASC. SmOULAB NBTTT.
Nom. gnnavd *gunavanto gunavam
Voc. gunavam *gimard *gunava
Ace. gunavantam * gunavam gunavam
Instr. gunavatd * gwiavantena
Dat. gunavato * gunavantassa gunavassa
Abl. gunavatd
Gen. gunavato
Loc. gunavati
* gunavantassa *gunavante
gunavassa f gunavantasfnim -fgum- vantamhi
Nom. ■)
Y \ gunavanto *gunavantd gunavanti gunavantam
Ace. *gu7iavante gunavanti gunavantdni
Instr. gunavantehhi
Dat. gunavatam
Abl. * gunavantehhi
Gen. gmiavatam
Loc. gunavantesu
The corresponding feminine is made by adding t to either the strong or weak form : gunavanti or gunavati. It is then declined like a form l.
* gunavantehi
* gmiavantdnam
* gunavantdnam
The participles in ant are declined like those in mant, with the exception of the nom. sing, case, which is gaccham or *gacchanto. Compare further :
Nom. sing, arahd and araham ' venerable.*
„ mahd mahaw * mahanto ' great*
STEMS IN CONSONANTS.
San/o P.P. to atf/ii ' to be.' shows the following forms :
39
|
SINGULAR. |
PLVaAT.. |
|
|
Nona. |
santo |
santo |
|
Ace. |
santam |
sante |
|
Instr. |
said *santena Instr. |
and Abl. sabbhi *santehi |
|
Gen. and Dat. |
sato santassa |
satam |
|
Log. |
sati Bhavam. SINGULAK. |
|
|
Voc. |
bho hhonfa |
|
|
Ace. |
hhatantam hhotani |
|
|
Instr. |
hhavafd bhotd |
bhavantena |
|
Gen. and Dat. hhavato hhoto |
bhavantassa |
|
|
Abl. |
bhavatd bhotd PLURAL. |
|
|
Nom. |
bhavanto bhonto |
bhavantd |
|
Voc. |
bhavanto bhonto |
bhante |
|
Ace. |
bhavante bhonte |
The fern, appears under the forms of :
bhavatl bhavanti bhoti Fern. nom. plur. bhotiyo
3) Stems in in.
In this declension several stems have been combined in one system.
|
SINOXTLAR. |
PLURAL. |
|||
|
Nom. |
dandl |
dandino |
* dan^i |
|
|
Voc. |
dandi |
dandino |
* dandi |
|
|
Ace. |
dandinam dandim |
* dandino |
dandi |
|
|
Instr. |
dandind *datidind |
dandibhi |
* dandibhi |
|
|
Dat. |
dandino *dandlno |
* dandissa |
dandinam |
* dandinam |
|
Abl. |
damlind f dandismd f dandimhd |
dan/libhi |
*dandihi |
|
|
Gen. |
damlino * dandino |
* dandissa |
dandinam |
* dandinam |
|
Loc. |
dandini *dandlni |
t daiidimhi |
dandisH |
*dandisu |
|
The short vowel in the |
oblique cases of the pli |
irul appears |
40
PALI GRAMMAR.
optionally in verses; the forms with long vowels are the more frequent.
Notice nom. plur. d'lpiyo, from dipl *a panther.' [
The word atthi ' a bone/ corresponding to Skr. asthan and asthi, shows the following forms :
|
8INOULAB. |
PLURAL |
||||
|
Nom. |
atthi |
* atthim |
atthini |
atthi |
|
|
Voc. |
atthi |
* aft him |
atthini |
atthi |
|
|
Ace. |
atthi |
* atthim |
atthini |
atthi |
|
|
Instr. |
atthind |
atthlbhi |
atthlhi |
||
|
Dat. |
* atthino |
*atthissa |
atthlnatn |
||
|
Abl. |
atthind |
f atthi mhd |
t atthismd |
atthlbhi |
atthlhi |
|
Gen. |
* atthino |
* atthisso |
atthlnam |
||
|
Loc. |
atthini |
fatthimhi |
atthismim |
atthlsu |
Neuters in as and us. Mono (manas).
mano mano mano
Nom. Voc. Ace. Instr. manasd Dat. manaso Abl. manasd Gen. ma7iaso Loc. manasi
' manam
* manam *manasam
* manena *mana88a
* mand
* manassa *mane
'manam
•fmanamhd
The pi. follows entirely the declension in a masc. and neut.
From (hdmo 'strength' instr. thdmasd and gen. thdffiaso, by the side of thdmund and thdniuno respectively ; from tapo * religious austerity ' instr. fapasd and tapena.
The comparative in po and if/t/o is declined like mano.
Nom. sing. m. f. and n. sei/t/o, gen. seyyaso.
Neuters in us. Ayu 'life.*
snrovLAii. Nom. dyu *dytim
Voc. dyu * dyu in
PLT7RAL.
dyuni * dyu
uyuni * dyu
|
COMPAEISON. |
||||
|
SINOULAB. |
PLURAL. |
|||
|
Ace. |
ayu |
* dyum |
dyuni |
*dyii |
|
Instr. |
dyusa |
* ay una |
*dyuhi |
|
|
Dat. |
*dyussa |
* dyuno |
*dyunam |
Xdymam |
|
Abl. |
dyusd |
*dyund |
*dyuhi |
|
|
Gen. |
*dyiissa |
* dyuno |
dyunam |
X ayusam |
|
Loc. |
dyusi |
*dyum |
* dyusu |
41
For the different endings of the ablative sing, to can be substituted. This is added to the weakest form pitito abl. of pita ' father.' bh is interchangeable with h in the suffixes of the abl. and instr. plur.
§ 18. COMPARISON.
The suffixes which are used to denote the comparative and superlative value of an adjective are :
tara iyo and tama ittha e.g. pdpataro or papiyo pdpatamo and pdpittJio It cannot be said that these suffixes denote a comparative and superlative meaning. They have mostly an intensive value. This intensive value is shown when the two suffixes are united and made one
itthatara as in e.g. pdpitthataro. The suffix issika is used promiscuously with tara and tama. There are some words with the suffixes iya and itthay which are attached to other adjectives from a different root, e.g. : vuddho ' old ' jeyyo jettho
pasattho 'excellent' seyyo settho
|
antiko 'near' |
nediyo |
nedittho |
|
hdlho 'strong* |
sddhiyo |
sddhittho |
|
appo 'small' \ yuvd ' young ' ) |
kaniyo |
kaniltho |
|
The themes in vat and mat drop of course this termination |
||
|
before affixing iyo ittho. |
||
|
gunavd ' excellent * |
gujiiyo |
gunittho |
|
satimd ' thoughtful ' |
satiyo |
satitt/io |
|
dhittimd ' courageous ' |
dhitiyo |
dhitittho |
|
rUpacd ' beautiful ' |
rupiyo |
rupittho |
43
PALI GRAMMAR.
II. DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 1) Personal Pronouns.
|
Ist Person. |
|||||
|
tnyovT.AR. |
PLURAL. |
||||
|
Nom. |
aham |
mayam |
amhe |
||
|
Ace. |
mam mamam |
amhe |
amhdkam |
||
|
Instr. |
mayd |
amhehi |
|||
|
Dat. |
mat/ham mama |
mamam |
amham |
amhdkam asmd- |
|
|
amham |
kam |
||||
|
Abl. |
mayd |
amhehi |
asmd |
||
|
Gen. |
mama mayham amham |
mamam |
amham kam |
arnhdl |
cam asmd- |
|
Loc. |
mayi |
amhesu |
asmdsu |
||
|
Enclitic forms are : |
|||||
|
me for the instr. dat. and |
gen. sing. |
||||
|
no for the aee. dat. and gen. plur. |
|||||
|
2nd Person. |
|||||
|
SINGULAR. |
PLURAL. |
||||
|
Nom. |
tvam tuvam |
tarn |
tumhe |
||
|
Ace. |
tvam tuvam |
tarn |
tavam tumhe |
tumhdkam |
|
|
Instr. |
tvdya tayd |
tumhehi |
|||
|
Dat. |
tuyham iava |
tumham |
tavam tumham |
tumhdkam |
|
|
Abl. |
tvayd tayd |
id |
tumhehi |
||
|
Gen. |
tuyham tava |
tumham |
tavam tumham |
tumhdkam |
|
|
Loe. |
tvayi tayi |
tumhesu |
Enclitic forms are :
te for the instr. dat. and gen. sing., and vo for the aee. dat. and gen. plur.
Pronoun of the 3ru Person.
|
SIKOULAB. |
|
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
|
Nom. 80 sa tarn (tad) |
8d |
|
Aee. tarn tarn (tad) |
tarn |
|
Instr. tena |
idya |
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 43
|
BWOVLABl. |
||||
|
Masc. |
. and Neut. |
Tern. |
||
|
Dat. tassa assa |
tdya |
tassd |
tassayd tissd |
|
|
tissayd assd |
||||
|
Abl. tasmd tamhd asmd amhd |
tdya |
|||
|
Gen. tassa |
I assa |
tdtja |
tassd |
fassayd tissd |
|
tissayd assd |
||||
|
Loc. tasmim tamhi asmim |
tdyam tassam tissam assam |
|||
|
PLURAL, |
||||
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
|||
|
Nom. |
te tdni |
td |
tdyo |
|
|
Ace. |
te tdni |
td |
tdyo |
|
|
Instr. |
tehi |
tdhi |
||
|
Dat. |
iesam tesdnam |
tdsam |
tdsdnam |
|
|
Abl. |
tehi |
tdhi |
||
|
Gen. |
tesam tesdnam |
tdsam |
tdsdnam |
|
|
Loc. |
tesu |
tdsu |
In all the oblique cases of the sing, masc. and fem., and in all cases of the neuter sing, and plur. and of the masc. and fem. plur., forms beginning with n can be substituted.
It is sometimes added pleonastically to the pronouns ahain and tvam, as are also all the demonstrative pronouns. It stands also and must be translated so sometimes for the definite article.
Many of the oblique cases are used adverbially, especially tasmd and fena.
The oblique cases of attd, dtitmd can be used reflexively in place of the three personal pronouns.
attano dsane yeva attdnain dassesi 'showed himself too in his own seat.' rakkhitum sakam attdnam * to save his own life.*
2) Demonstrative Pronouns.
1) Eso esa efam (efad) 'this' declined like so sd sam.
2) ayam * this ' used adjectively and substantively.
8INOULAB.
Masc. and Neat. Fem.
Nom. ayam idam imam ayam
Ace. imam idam imam
44
PALI ORAMMAB.
|
8IM0VLAB. |
||||
|
Masc. and Neat |
Fem, |
|||
|
Instr. |
atiena imind |
amind |
imdt/a |
|
|
Dat. |
assa imassa |
assd assdya imissd imissd- |
||
|
ya imdya |
||||
|
Abl. |
asmd imasmd |
imamhd |
imdya |
|
|
Gen. |
assa imassa |
like dat. |
||
|
Loc. |
asmim imasmim imamhi |
assam imissam imdydm |
||
|
PLURAL. |
||||
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
|||
|
Nom. |
ime imdni |
imd |
imdyo |
|
|
Ace. |
ime imdni |
imd |
imdyo |
|
|
Instr. |
ehi imehi |
imdhi |
imdhhi |
|
|
Dat. |
esam esdnam imeaam imesdnam imdmm |
imdsdnam |
||
|
Abl. |
ehi emehi |
imdhi |
||
|
Gen. |
esam esdnam imesam imesdnam imdsam |
imdsdnam |
||
|
Loc. |
esu imesu Masc. and Neut. |
Amu. 8INGULAE. |
imdsu Fem. |
|
|
Nom. asu adum |
asu |
|||
|
Ace. |
amum adum |
amum |
||
|
Instr. amund |
amuyd |
|||
|
Dat. |
amussa adussa |
amtissd |
amuyd |
|
|
AbL |
amusmd amumhd |
amuyd |
||
|
Gen, |
, amussd adussd |
amussd |
amuyd |
|
|
Loc. |
amumhi amusmim |
amussam |
amuyam |
|
|
PLURAL. |
||||
|
Masc. and Fem. |
Neut. |
|||
|
Nom. amii |
amiujo |
amu amuni |
||
|
Ace. amU |
amuyo |
amu amuni |
||
|
Instr. |
amabhi |
amuhi |
||
|
Dat. |
amusam |
amusdnam |
||
|
Abl. |
amubhi |
amuhi |
||
|
- |
Gen. |
amijsam |
amusdnam |
|
|
Loc. |
amusu |
A defective pronominal stem is ena. It occurs in the ace. of all numbers enam, and the instr. sing. : masc. enena, and fem. enayd.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
45
3) Relative Pronoun.
|
SINOVLAB. |
|||
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
||
|
Nora, yo |
yrtw (yrtrf) |
yd |
|
|
Ace. yam |
yam |
yam |
|
|
Instr. yena |
ydya |
||
|
Dat. ya%m |
yassd |
ydya |
|
|
Abl. yasma |
yamha |
ydya |
|
|
Gen. yassa |
yassd |
ydya |
|
|
Loc. yasmim |
yamhi PLURAL. |
yassam |
ydyam |
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
||
|
Nom. ye |
ydni |
yd ydyo |
|
|
Ace. ye |
ydni |
yd ydyo |
1 |
|
Instr. yehi |
ydhi |
||
|
Dat. y^sam |
ydsani |
||
|
Abl. yehi |
ydhi |
||
|
Gen. yesam |
ydsam |
||
|
Loc. yes«< |
ydsii |
»0, ayam and eso, along with the personal pronouns, are sometimes used in conjunction with yo for greater emphasis.
In adverbial use we find the ace. sing. neut. yam, the instr. yena, the abl. yasmd, and the loc. yasmiin.
4) Interrogative Pronoun.
Masc. ko, neut. kitn, fem. kd, is declined like yo.
In the dat. and gen. masc. and neut. sing, kissa by the side of kassa, and in the loc. kismim kimhi by the side of kasmim kamhi. The gen. sing. n. kissa, instr. kena and kasmd, are used adverbially.
6) Indefinite Pronouns.
In affixing ci (for cid) api and cana to the interrogative pronoun, the indefinites are formed.
entocLAR. Masc. and Neut. Fem.
Nom. koci ki/ici ' k&ci.
Ace. kanci
46
|
PA |
LI GRAMMAR |
|
8IM0ULAR. ' |
|
|
Masc. and Neut. |
|
|
Instr. kenaci |
|
|
Dat. kassaci |
|
|
Abl. kasmaci |
|
|
Gen. kassaci |
|
|
Loc. kasmici |
kismici |
FLUKAL.
Masc. and Fern. Neut.
keci kanici
sayam ' self, oneself,' and tumo corresponding to Skr. tmana, are used as emphatic pronouns with all cases.
§ 19. PRONOMINAL DERIVATIVES.
From pronominal stems derivatives are formed, which have the character of pronominal adjectives. Thus :
madlyo 'mine,' mamako 'mine,' -y/mad ; amhadlyo 'our,* \/amhad; and in combination with diso and di, interchangeable with the form riso, standing for Skr. dr9, we find mddiso ' like me,' etadiso ' like that,' Idiso and idi ' like this,' kidiso and kldi ' like what ? '
From the stems :
ta ka ya are formed the adjectives tati kati yati, with the meaning of, respectively, *80 many,' ' how many,' and * as many.'
From
ya ka, with the suflBxes tara tama, we find yataro yatamo ' which,' and kataro katamo ' what, which?' and from i : itaro * other, difierent.'
A great many derivatives of pronouns are used adverbially. They will be noticed hereafter.
A number of adjectives are inflected according to the pronominal declension.
Such words are, e.g.
anno ahhataro ahhatamo * certain ' ; kataro kafamo * which * ; yataro yatamo * which ? * ; itaro * other * ; tittaro uttamo
NUMERALS. 47
'higher'; adharo 'inferior'; uhhayo 'both*; aparo paro 'other'; dakkhino 'right*; piibbo 'former'; visso 'all*; and sabbo * all, every.'
Some few of these words form their cases also according to the nominal declension.
§ 20. NUMERALS.
Cakdinals.
1 eko ekd ekam
2 dve duve ubho (for all 3 genders)
3 tayo tisso tint
4 cattdro {caturo) catasso cattdri 6 panca
6 cha {chat)
7 satta
8 attha
9 nava
10 dam
11 ekarasa ekddasa
12 bdrasa dvddasa
13 tedasa terasa telasa
14 catvddasa cuddasa coddasa
15 pancadasa pannarasa pannarasa
16 solasa sorasa
17 sattadasa satlarasa
18 atthddasa atthdrasa
19 ckunavlsati ekunavisam
20 risad visam
21 ekatlsati ekavUam
22 dvdvlsati bdvisafi
23 tevlmti
24 catuvisati
25 pancavUati
26 chabblsati
27 sattablaati sattavisati
28 atthavlsam
48 PALI GRAMMAR.
Cardinal*.
29 ehunatimmm ehunatimsati
30 timaa timsati
31 ekatimsa
32 dvattimm
40 catfdlisam cattdrlsam
tdlisam talisa
50 pannasa pannasam pannasa
60 safthi
70 sattati
80 aslti
90 navuti
100 sfl^«;,»
200 bdmtam dvdsatam
1,000 sahassam
10,000 dasasnhassam nahiitam
100,000 satasahassam lakkham
1,000,000 dasamfasahassam
100,000,000 Icoti
From koti upwards eacli succeeding numeral is ten million times the preceding one. After the combination with koti, pakoti kotippakoti and nahutam ninna/nitam akkhohini and bindu, the succeeding numerals are neuters in am. The last numeral given is asankhej/f/am=10,000,000^^.
In combination with una 'deficient, less,' the eka is in some instances omitted, as unasattamtam * 699.'
addhiko 'exceeding, surpassing,' is used sometimes to denote the higher number, e.g. : saftddhikavlsa '27,' i.e. 7 exceeding 20 ; atthdramdhikam dvisatam *218.'
The following forms of numerals ought to be noticed. 26 pannavlsati paTicavisati
44 cuitdllsam cattallsam
66 chappannasa 84 ctd/dsiti caturdsVi
Fractionals are :
addfio nddho *J*; ditjaddho diraddho, *1J'; addhateyyo addhatiyo * 2^ ; addhuddho ' 3^.'
NUMERALS. 49
Other combinations with addho are frequent, e.g. dasaddha' sata ' 500 ' ; addhatelasasata * 1250.' catutthamso ' \.'
For the other fractionals the ordinals are used. To form the multiplicatives khattum is used : ckakkhattum
* once,' solasakkhattum * 16 times.'
To form adverbs from numerals the suffixes dhd and sa are used :
ekadha * in one way ' ; ekasa 'one by one.*
Adjectives are formed with the suffixes tvV/AOj^fwno and ahgiko:
atthavidho * eightfold ' ; navaviddho ' ninefold ' ; sattagum
* sevenfold ' ; atthangiko ' eightfold ' ; pancahgiko * fivefold.*
Declension of the Cardinals. eka.
|
Masc. |
and Neut. |
Fem. |
|
|
Nom. |
eko |
ekam |
eka |
|
Voc. |
eka |
eka |
eke |
|
Ace. |
ekam |
ekam |
ekam |
|
Instr. |
ekena |
ekdya |
|
|
Dat. |
ekassa |
ekissa |
|
|
Abl. |
ekasmd |
ekamhd |
ekdya |
|
Gen. |
ekassa |
ekma |
|
|
Loc. |
ekasmim |
ekamhi |
ekissam |
ekdyam
The plur. eke * some,' follows the analogy of sahha.
uhho (For all three genders.) Nom. Ace. Yoc. uhho Inst. Abl. uhhohi uhhehi
Dat. Gen. uhhinnam
Loc. ubhoau ubhesu
uhho is in form a dual corresponding to Skr. ubhau. The declension is very irregular.
dve, dttve. Nom. Yoc. Ace. dve duve
Instr. Abl. dcthi dvlbhi
Dat. Gen. dvinnam duvinnam
Loc. dviau
|
60 |
PALI GRAMMAR. |
|||
|
Masc. and Neut. |
^1. |
Fem. |
||
|
Nona. |
tayo |
tint |
tkso |
|
|
Ace. |
iayo |
tlni |
iisso |
|
|
Instr. |
Abl. |
tihi |
tihhi |
tihi tihhi |
|
Dat. Gen. |
tiniiam tinnannam |
iissannam tissam |
||
|
Loc. |
fWi |
tissu catur. |
tisu tissu |
|
|
Masc. and Neut. |
Fem. |
|||
|
Nom. Voc. |
Ace. |
cattdro |
caturo cattdri |
catasso |
|
Instr. Abl. |
catuhhhi catuhi catubhi |
catuhhhi catuhhi |
||
|
Dat. Gen. |
eatunnam |
catassannam |
||
|
Loc. |
eatusu |
eatusu panca, cha. |
eatusu eatusu |
|
|
Masc. Fem. |
Neat. Masc. Fem. Neut. |
|||
|
Nom |
L. |
paTica |
cha |
|
|
Instr. Abl. |
pancahi |
chahi |
||
|
Gen. |
Dat. |
pancannam |
channam |
|
|
Loc. |
pahcasu |
chasu |
All numerals ending in a are declined in like manner.
The numerals in i are declined like the fem. in i.
loke ekasatthiyd arahantesu j'dtesu * when there were 61 arhats in the world ' ; satthim arahatim oka * made sixty converts ' ; lendni atthasatthiyo * 68 cells.*
The gen. and dat. of risam, timsa, panndsa are given respectively as visdya, timsdya, pahndsdya.
satam and the higher numerals are declined like neuters in am. In conjunction with nouns the following constructions are frequent : —
1) With a noun in the gen. plur. : satam muldnam ' a hundred roots ' ; acchardnam sahassam ' 1000 nymphs.*
2) As last part of a compound : gdthdsatam ' a hundred stanzas.*
3) With a noun in the sing, in corap. : chachattdlisasatam vassam atikhamma ' after the lapse of 146 years.'
4) As first part of a compound the whole in the plural : sahassajatild * 1000 jatilas.'
m
THE ORDINALS. 51
THE ORDINALS.
The ordinals are formed from the cardinals by means of suffixes. They are declined like adjectives. The fem. ends, with exception of the first four numerals which form their stems in a difierent way, in I, the neuter in am.
For the ordinal of one, pathamo, pathamd, pathamam is used.
From dva and ti we have dutiyo fem. dutiyd^ neut. dutiyam ; tatiyo fem. tatiyd, neut. tatiyam
The cardinals for *4,' '5,' * 6,' '7' form the ordinals by adding iha : catuttho, pancafho, chattho, sattho.
For * 4 ' a form turlyo with the fem. turiyd occurs.
Besides the form in tha the suffix ma is added to form the ordinals, ' 5,' * 6,' * 7,' and onwards up to *99,* e.g.pancamo *5th'; dasamo ' 10i\i' ', so/asawo * 16th'; ekunavlsatimo '\Qi\x''y ekarlsatimo *2l8t'; timsatimo * 30th * ; satthimo *60th.*
Besides these longer forms from 10 upwards, we find an ordinal made from the cardinal by the suffix a : —
pancadaso * 15th ' ; vlso ' 20th ' ; ekavlso ' 2l8t ' ; ievlso ' 23rd ' ; ekunatimso ' 29th ' ; thmo * 30th ' ; cattdhso ' 40th * ; pamiaw ' 50th ' ; sattho * 60th * ; sattato * 70th ' ; aslto ' 80th ' ; navido * 90th.'
The ordinal for 100 is satamo, and with the fuller superlative suffix sataiamo, just as for 1000 sahassamo and sahassatamo.
The fem. of some of the ordinals is used to designate the day of the month, e.g. : — paTicaml * the fifth day of the half month.* ekddasi * the eleventh day of the half month.* pa/icadasl * the fifteenth day of the half month.*
§ 21. THE VERB.
The native grammarians divide the verbs according to the manner in which the present and the tenses and modes which belong to the present system, viz. imperfect, potential and imperative, are formed into seven classes. These are called from the verb which serves as prototype for the whole class :
62 PALI GRAMMAR.
1) hhavddiy i.e. * hhu and the other verbs/ or * having hhu at the beginning.'
2) rudhddi.
3) diiadi.
4) svcidL
5) kiyadi.
6) tanadi.
7) curaiddi.
First class : It consists of the following divisions :
1) The root ending in i or ti is gunated, and a added : ^bhu bhava.
2) To the root ending in a consonant an a is added, ^•9- ^/pac-\-a-=.paca 'to cook*; further, y/tiid *to gnaw'; y/nud * to remove ' ; yjlikh ' to write ' ; \/phus ' to touch.'
3) To the root ending in a vowel, the personal endings are added without intervening vowel, e.g. \Jyd * to go.*
The second class comprises those verbs in which a nasal is inserted before the final consonant of the root. The terminations are added with an intermediate a as in the first class : y/riidh, rundhati * to restrain.*
The third class adds ya to the root. The phonetic rules regarding y are applied : y/div^ dibbati * to play.'
The fourth class adds nu nd una to the root : stmoti pdpundti.
The fifth class adds tid to the root which ends in a vowel : kindti * to buy ' ; dhundti * to shake.'
The sixth class adds o or m to the root. The root generally ends in a nasal : tanoti, karoti.
The seventh class adds aya eiio the gunated root: corayati
Every verb is supposed to have two voices with separate endings : the parasaapadam or transitive, and attanopadam or intransitive. The attanopadam is very restricted in its use, and it is therefore difficult to give the attanopadarn for every verb.
The passive verbs are formed through adding ya to the root and affixing the ending of the attanopadam, or though less frequently of the parassapadam to this base.
The tenses of the Pali verb are :
m^mmm
THE VERB. 53
Special tense
1) Present {vattdmdnd), and derived from it two modes:
Optative (sattami) ; Imperative {pancamt) ; and the Participle Present aa verbal adjective.
2) Imperfect {htyattanl). General tenses
1) Perfect (jparohkhd).
2) Aorid {ajjatanl).
3) Future (bhavtssantl).
4) Conditional (kdldtipatti) .
The general tenses often take the basis of the special tenses, and vice versd.
A verb can appear in different classes without, however, changing its meaning, e.g. titthati and thdti * to stand ' ; daddti, deti and dajjati * to give ' ; vadati, vadeti, vajjati and vajjeti * to speak.'
Other roots appear in different classes with a differentiation of meaning, such as, e.g. : '^/vid, vidati ' to know ' ; vindati * to find, to get ' ; and vijjati * to be, to exist.'
1) It is needless to advert to the fact that the classes have been made up to a great extent to bring the conjugation of Pali in a closer connection with that of Sanskrit.
2) The tenses of the Aorist and Imperfect are simply tenses of the past, and it is therefore not advisable to take the Imperfect separately from the Aorist. It is quite true that originally there existed a difference in the meaning between Aorist and Imperfect ; but in the Pali texts, as they lie before us, no such difference can be traced. "We shall therefore consider the Imperfect simply as a tense of the past not dependent on the Present system.
3) The Perfect tense is of rare occurrence.
|
I. The Present System. |
|
|
The endings are the following |
: |
|
PRESENT PARASSAPADAM. |
phessnt attawopadam. |
|
1) mi 1) ma |
1) e 1) mhe |
|
2) si 2) tha |
2) se 2) vhe |
|
3) ti 3) anti |
3) te 3) ante are |
64 PALI GRAMMAR.
niPBRATlTE rAEASSAPADAM. IMPERATITB ATTANOPADAM.
1) mi 1) ma 1) e 1) dmase
2) — hi 2) tha 2) asu 2) vho
3) iu 3) anfu 3) <a;w 3) antam
OPTATIVE PAUA8SAPADAM. OPTATIVE ATTANOPADAM.
1) e eyydmi 1) eyydma 1) eyyam 1) eyydmhe
2) e eyydsi 2) eyydtha 2) e^Ao 2) eyyavho
3) c cyyrt 3) eyywn 3) e^Aa 3) erawj
"We best divide the verbs into the following classes :
1) Verbs which affix the endings given above without
intervening rowel.
2) Reduplicating class.
3) Nasal class.
4) a- class.
5) ya- class.
I. The Root Class of Sanskrit grammar. Through the contraction of aya into e, of ava into o, many verbs follow now the analogy of this class. These are either primitive verbs such as j'eti for j'ayati, or derivatives such dpddeti for dpddayati. Most of the verbs have forms in other classes. A distinction between strong and weak forms takes place only occasionally.
We give as paradigms :
\/i ^Jya
Sing, emi Plu. ema Sing, ydmi Plu. ydma
„ esi „ etha „ yd^i „ ydtha
„ eti „ enti, yanti „ ydti „ yanti
Like emi, semi * to lie down.' The third person attanopa- dani occurs as
Sing, sete Plur. sente
Verbs following the analogy of ydti are, vdti ' to blow ' ; pdti * to protect * ; bhdti ' to shine.'
Besides the forms, according to the reduplicating class, o( y/dd 'to give ' and thd * to stand/ we have deti fhati, which follow the analogy of ydti.
In the same way a contracted form of verbs in aya, ava follows this class, e.g. :
PRESENT TENSE. 66
koti, a contracted form of b/tavati, \/bhu * to exist,' which shows the following forms :
Sing, homi Plur. homa „ host „ hotha
„ hoti „ honti
y/bru 'to speak' exhibits besides the form braviiif a con- tracted form bruti.
Sing, brumi Plur. brUma „ bmsi „ brutha
„ bruti „ bravanti
The ATTANOPADAM is
Sing, brave Plur. br&mhe „ JrMse „ br-Avhe
„ JrS^e „ bravante
The most important verb of this division is ^/as * to be.* Sing, asmi amhi Plur. asma amha „ asi ahi „ attha
„ atthi „ santi
Single forms following the first class are, e.g. : III. p. sing, vatti V vac * to speak,' at the side of vacati and vadati.
III. p. sing, hantiy yjhan, ' to strike.'
III. p. pi. duhanfi, y/duh ' to milk.*
III. p. pi. lihanti, y/lih *to lick.*
III. p. sing. att. hanute, y/hnu * to conceal oneself.*
II. Reduplicating Class.
The present form is formed by prefixing a reduplication to the root. The rules of reduplication are :
1) The consonant of the reduplicating syllable is always the first consonant of the root.
2) A non-aspirate is substituted in reduplication for an aspirate.
3) A palatal is substituted for a guttural or //.^
* The substitution of the palatals for the gutturals shows that the vowel of the reduplication syllabic was uiuformly an #, as in Greek.
66 PALI GRAMMAR.
4) A long vowel is shortened in the reduplicated syllable. Examples of reduplication are ; dadiifi, yjda * to give.* dadhdti, dahdti y/dhd * to put.' titthdU, y/thd * to stand.' jahdii, ^/hd * to leave.' jiihoti, y/hu * to sacrifice.*
pibati, or pivati ^pd * to drink/ cpr. Lat. hihere. The conjugation is as follows : y/dd Sing, dadami Plur. damma „ daddsi „ dattha
„ daddti „ dadanti
In analogy with the first pers. plu. a new singular was created, viz. : dammi, dasi, dati. Besides these forms we have :
dajjati according to the ya class. This formation is probably due to the optative. The form deti was noticed above.
Of the attanopadam only a few forms can be quoted, viz. : I. sing, dade and I. plur. daddmase. y/thd Sing, titthdmi Plur. titthdma „ titthasi „ tkdtha titthatha
„ titthati „ titthanti
III. The Nasal Class : In it we comprise the verbs of the fourth, fifth and sixth classes of the native grammarians. They form their present stem by adding in the fourth and sixth class no if the root ends in a vowel, o if in n, or as in the case of karoti in r. These verbs add arbitrarily also nd, the class-sign of the fifth class. The few verbs belonging to that class always retain the class-sign na.
As paradigms may serve :
y/su ' to hear.' Sing, aiinomi, sundmi Plur. mnoma, simdma
„ suTiosi, sunasi sundst „ aunotha, sunatha
„ sunoti, smiati „ siinanti
PRESENT TENSE. 67
In the same way y/tan 'to stretcli' is conjugated, of which the attanopadam occurs as :
Sing, tanve Plur. tanumhe
„ tanme „ tanuvhe
„ tanute „ tanvante
y/ht ' to buy ' has only the forms in a kindmi. The most important verb belonging to this class is ^kar * to make.'
Sing, karomi kummi Plur. karoma
„ karosi „ karotha
„ karoti „ karonti
The aUanopadam shows the following forms ; Sing, kuhhe
Plur.
|
kuhhase |
kuruse |
|
kuhhate |
kurute |
|
kubbdmhe |
kurumhe |
|
kubbdvhe |
ktiruvhe |
|
kubbante |
kurunte |
kubbati
rV". The a Class : The most numerous class of verbs is that which, while gunating the root ending in i or u to ay or av respectively, adds the personal endings with intervening a. Closely connected with this class in Pali are those verbs which add to a consonantal stem a before the endings. Lastly, we have to count among this class those verbs which strengthen the root by a nasal, and add the personal endings with a or less frequently /.
The first two divisions belong to the first class of the native grammarians, the last division forms the second class.
As paradigms we take :
^bhu * to be, to exist.*
|
Sing, bhavdmi |
Plur. |
bhavdma |
|
„ bhavasi |
it |
bhavatha |
|
„ bhavati |
>f |
bhavanti |
|
The aUanopadam is |
||
|
Sing, bhave |
Plur. |
bhavdmhe |
|
„ hhavase |
» |
bhatache |
|
„ bhavate |
t> |
bhavante |
68 PALI ORAMMAE.
A consonantal stem is y/tud *to push/ which is conjugated exactly like bhavatO
y/rudh * to restrain ' has the following forms : Sing, rundhdmi and rundhlmi „ rundhaai „ rundhisi „ rundhati „ rundhlti Plur. rundhdma „ rimdhlma „ rundhatha „ rundhltha „ rundhanti „ rundhinti A few verbs form their present tense by adding ccha to the root, e.g. y/gam * to go,' gacchdmi.
There is, however, also a form gamati *he goes* and ghammati. This latter form can be substituted for all the forms of the verb. Cpr. further hravlti.
The ya Class: The present tense of this class adds ya to the root. These form the third class of the native grammarians. All the phonetic rules regarding y are applied, e.g. :
\/div -\- ya =■ dihhati
y/siv -\- ya ■=■ sihhati
y/yudh -\- ya =. yujjhati
§ 22. MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE.
1) Imperative : It is formed by adding the endings given on page 54 to the present stem. The second pers. sing. par. sometimes show the mere stems without the characteristic ending. As paradigms may serve :
y/i * to go.'
I. sing, emi I. plur. etna
II. „ ehi II. „ etha
III. ,, etu III. ,, entu
1 The difference between these two conjugations can only be traced in Sanskrit, where the accent is varying.
MODES OF THE PRESENT TENSE. 59
•s/as * to be.* I. sing, asmi I. plur. asma
II. „ ahi II. „ attha
III. „ atthu III. „ 8antu
\/da ' to give.* An imperative can be formed from all the stems in use, e.g. :
II. sing, dehi daddhi dajja II. plur. detha daddtha The attanopadam has the following forms :
I. sing, dade I. plur. daddmase
II. „ dadassu II. „ dadavho
III. „ dadatam III. „ dadantam
y/kr ' to make.' II. sing, kuru karohi II. plur. karotha
III. „ karotu kurufu III. „ karontu kuhhantu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, kuhhe I. plur. kubbdmase
II. „ kurussu II. „ kuruvho
III. „ kurutam III. „ kubbantam
^Jbhu.
II. sing, bhava bhavdhi II. plur. bhavatha III. „ bhavatu III. „ bhavantu
ATTANOPADAM.
II. sing, bhavassu II. plur. bhavavho
III. „ bhavatam III. „ bhavantam
y/gam * to go.* The Imperative is formed also from all the stems in use, ^.^7. :
II. sing, gaccha, gacchdhi, ghamma, ghammahi
2) Optative : It is formed by adding the endings given on page 54. The endings showed originally only forms commencing with ya. A combination, however, took place in most cases with the final vowel of the stem. These forms could again be contracted into e. As paradigms may serve :
y/bhu. I. sing, heyydmi, bhaveyya I. plur. heyydma huveyya, bhave
|
60 |
PALI GRAMMAR. |
|||
|
II. |
sing. |
hei/i/dsi |
II. plur. heyydtha |
|
|
III. |
»> |
hei/i/a |
III. „ heyyum ATTANOPADAM. |
|
|
I. |
sing. |
bhave, hhaveyydmi I. plur. hhaveyydmhe |
||
|
II. |
w |
hhavetho |
II. „ bhaveyyacho |
|
|
III. |
» |
bhavetha |
III. „ bhaveram. y/as. |
|
|
I. |
sing. |
assam |
I. plur. assdma |
|
|
II. |
» |
assa |
II. „ assatha |
|
|
III. |
)} |
assa, siyd |
III. „ asBu siyum |
|
|
Vkr. |
||||
|
I. |
kare, |
kareyya, |
kubbe, kubbeijya, kayird, |
kayirdmi |
|
II. |
n |
kareyyasi, |
„ kubbeyyasi, „ |
kayirdsi |
|
III. |
» |
kareyya. |
„ kubbeyya, „ |
kayird |
|
I. |
kareyydma |
[, kubbeyydma, |
kayirdma |
|
|
II. |
kareyydtha, kubbetha, |
kayirdtha |
||
|
III. |
kareyyam, |
kubbeyam, y/dd. |
kayirum |
|
|
Shows the forms |
||||
|
dajj'd, cladeyya, dajjeyya, deyya. |
||||
|
VJna. |
||||
|
jdniya, janha^ jdneyya. |
||||
|
^gam. |
||||
|
gacche, gaccheyya. |
§ 23. GENERAL TENSES. .The Perfect System.
The formation of the Perfect is essentially alike in all verbs. The characteristics of the formation are : 1) a stem made by reduplication of the root and endings, unlike those of the present and the other tenses. The rules for redupli- cation are the same as those given for the second conjugation, e.g. : yj gnm-=.jagdma.
The perfect in published texts is of rare occurrence.
GENERAL TENSES. 61
The endings are :
FOR THB PARA8SAPADAM. FOB THE ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. mha I. sing, i mhe
II. „ e II. „ ttha II. „ ttho vho III. „ a III. „ w III. „ ttha re
Boots ending in consonants insert an i between stem and consonantal endings. As paradigms may serve :
y/bhu. I. sing, bahhuva I. plur. babhuvimha
11. „ babhuve II. „ babhuvittha
III. „ babhuca III. „ babhuvu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, babhuvi 1. plur. babhuvimhe
II. „ babhuvittho II. „ babhuvivho
III. ,, babhuvittha III. „ babhuvire
|
^/pac. PABASSAFADAM. |
|||
|
I. |
sing, papaca |
I. |
plur, papacimha |
|
II. |
„ papace |
II. |
„ papacittha |
|
III. |
„ papaca |
III. ATTANOPADAM. |
„ papacu |
I. sing, papaci I. plur. papacimhe
II. „ papacittho II. „ papacicho
III. „ papacittha III. „ papacire
y/ah 'to speak' is only used in the III. per. sing, and plur. of the perfect.
III. sing, aha III. plur. dhamsu and dhu
§ 24. AORIST AND IMPERFECT.^
The aorist and imperfect are, as stated above (page 53), blended into one form, partaking of the character of both. The native grammarians are at great pains to give a paradigm
> Cpr. H. 01denb«rg, Kohn's Zeitachrift, xxt. 319.
62 TALI GRAMMAR.
for both forms, which, however, turns out futile. Moreover, no difference can be made in the syntactic use of the two tenses.
The paradigm of the native grammarians is for the hlyattanl (imperfect) :
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. amhd
II. ,, 0 II. „ attha
III. „ a III. „ 6
PAUA88AFADAU.
I. sing, im I. plur, mhase
II. „ se 11. „ rham
III. „ ttha III. „ tthum For the aj/atani (aorist) :
ATTANOPADAK.
I. sing, im I. plur. imhd
II. „ 0 II. „ tttha
III. „ i III. „ tm inisu
PARA88APADAM.
I. sing, a I. plur. imhe
II. „ ise II. „ ivham
III. „ a III. „ u
"We can distinguish altogether three different formations in Piili. The augment a is in prose generally put before the verb. In verse it is omitted according to the exigencies of the metre. With the negative particle md the aorist is used as an imperative.
First Formation.
PA&AS8APADAM.
I. sing, am I. plur. amha
II. „ a, 0 II. „ attha
III. „ d III. „ urn
ATTANOPADAX.
I. sing. — I. plur. dmhase
II. „ ase II. „ acham
III. „ attha III. „ atthum
The nasal in the first pcrs. sing. plur. is often omitted.
AORIST AND IMPERFECT. 63
Only verbs in consonants form their preterite according to this formation. Its use is very limited. This formation can be considered as an imperfect if it is used with the present stem.
Second Formation.
isum
|
PA&A88APADAH. |
|||||
|
I. |
sing. |
im |
I. |
plur. |
imha |
|
IL |
» |
i |
II. |
)> |
ittha |
|
III. |
» |
i |
III. ATTAKOPADAM, |
» |
tnisu |
|
I. |
sing. |
— |
I. |
plur. |
tmhe |
|
II. |
>> |
ise |
II. |
» |
ivham |
|
III. |
)) |
— |
III. |
i> |
— |
This form is regularly used for all stems ending in con- sonants. For the first pers. sing, we find in verse some- times the endings kam and issam according to the analogy of Sanskrit.
Third Formation.
The third form of the aorist is an 5 aorist. The forms are :
PARA8SAPADAM.
I. sing, siin simha II. „ si sittha
III. „ si sum
This formation is used for the verbs ending in vowels. Some verbs ending in consonants follow this analogy, and then, of course, all phonetic change takes place. Causatives follow the analogy of this aorist after contracting aya into e.
Besides these some forms occur which date back to a formation anterior to the fixing of Ptili.
Many verbs appear in all the three formations. The following paradigms will illustrate the different formations :
y/bhu. I. sing, ahhavam I. plur. abhatamhA
II. ,, abhavo II. „ abhacattha
G4
|
[ |
TALI GRAMMAR. |
||||||
|
III. |
sing. |
arJAflim |
III. |
plur. |
ahhavu |
||
|
I. |
» |
a /ill vain |
I. |
)> |
ahuvamhd |
||
|
11. |
>> |
ahuvo |
II. |
i) |
ahuvattha |
||
|
III. |
» |
ahiica |
III. |
>> |
— |
||
|
I. |
>> |
ahosim |
I. |
» |
— |
||
|
II. |
» |
ahosi |
II. |
>> |
— |
||
|
III. |
>» |
ahosi |
III. |
>> |
ahesum |
||
|
I. |
)) |
ahhavim |
|||||
|
I. |
» |
— |
I. |
» |
ahumhd |
||
|
III. |
>> |
aim ahu before |
|||||
|
vowels ahud |
r |
III. |
» |
ahum |
|||
|
^dd |
. |
||||||
|
I. |
sing. |
adadam, |
etc. |
||||
|
I. |
» |
add, etc. |
III. |
plur. |
adum |
||
|
I. |
» |
addsim |
I. |
>> |
adadmha |
||
|
II. |
)> |
addsi |
II. |
J) |
adasittha |
||
|
III. |
»> |
addsi |
Vkr |
III. |
» |
addsim adamsu |
|
|
I. |
sing. |
akaram^ |
etc. |
||||
|
I. |
w |
akdsim aJidsi, |
etc. |
III. |
plur. |
akdsum |
|
|
I. |
» |
akd |
{ |
II. III. |
akattha okanisu |
||
|
I. |
>» |
akarim, < |
3tc. |
y/as |
III. |
>> |
akarum akarimsu |
|
I. |
sing. |
dsim |
I. |
plur. |
dsimha |
||
|
II. |
» |
dsi |
II. |
>> |
dsittha |
||
|
III. |
» |
dsi |
III. |
» |
dsiim dsimsu |
||
|
y/gam. |
|||||||
|
I. |
sing. |
agam |
I. |
plur. |
agnmha |
||
|
II. |
>> |
aga |
II. |
>) |
aguttha |
||
|
III. |
>> |
agd |
III. |
}) |
agum |
||
|
I. |
>> |
agamd |
agamim |
||||
|
II. |
>> |
agami |
|||||
|
III. |
>> |
agnmi |
|||||
|
I. |
>> |
agacchi |
|||||
|
I. |
» |
aganchim |
( |
I. |
f> |
aganchimhd |
AORIST AND IMPERFECT.
65
II. sing. agaTichi agancho II. plur. agailchittha III. „ agaTichi III. „ agailchimm
II. and III. sing, agacchiai
y/vac.
|
I. |
sing. |
avacd |
II. |
per. plur. avacuttha |
|
I. |
>> |
arocam |
11. |
„ avocaiha |
|
III. |
>> |
avoca |
III. . y/lahh. |
plur. avociim |
|
I. |
sing. |
alattham |
I. |
sing, alahhim |
|
II. |
>> |
alattha |
II. |
„ alahhi |
|
III. |
)) |
alattha |
III. |
,, alahhi |
After contracting aya into e, the aorist of the causatives is also formed according to the third formation : —
I. sing, acoresim II. „ acoresi III.
acoresi
I. plur. acoresimha
II. „ acoresittha
III.
acoremm
In roots ending in consonants s influences the last letter as usual, e.g. : adakkhi from passati ' to see,' but also apassi ; akkocchi from kosati ' to revile,' but also akkosi.
Of forms in issatn or isam, I. pers. sing, second formation, we notice sandhdvissam, paccavekkhisam, gacchisam, vandissaniy etc.
For the atianopadam the paradigm is the following :
|
I. |
sing. |
|
I. |
plur. |
abhavdmhase |
|
II. |
)y |
abhavase |
II. |
ahhavham |
|
|
III. |
>> |
ahhavattha |
III. |
ahhavatthum |
|
|
I. |
it |
— |
I. |
abhavimhe |
|
|
II. |
>» |
ahhavise |
11. |
abhavivham |
|
|
III. |
» |
abhavittha |
III. |
— |
The attanopadam is of rare occurrence, and only a few forms can be given :
II. pers. sing, atimannittho I. pers. plur. akardmhase
66
PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 25. FUTUEE.
The tense sign is ss, which is added to the root directly, or by the auxiliary vowel i. The endings are :
POB THB FARA88APADAM.
|
I. |
sing. |
88dmi |
I. plur. |
ssdma |
|
II. |
» |
ssasi |
11. „ |
ssatha |
|
HI. |
» |
88ati |
III. „ FOR THE ATTANOPADAM. |
ssanti |
|
I. |
sing. |
ssam |
I. plur. |
ssdmhe |
|
II. |
» |
ssasse |
II. „ |
asavhe |
|
III. |
»> |
ssate |
in. „ |
ssante (ssare) |
The form to which these endings are added is mostly the strengthened. They can, however, also be added to the special base.
PARAS8APADAM.
|
I. |
sing. |
hhavissdmi |
I. |
plur. |
bhauasdma |
|
II. |
» |
bhavissasi |
II. |
)i |
bharissatha |
|
III. |
» |
hhavissati |
III. ATTAKOPADAM. |
. >> |
bhavissanti |
|
I. |
sing. |
bhamssam |
I. |
plur. |
bharissdmh |
|
II. |
>» |
bbavissasse |
II. |
>i |
bhavissavhe |
|
III. |
t) |
bhavissate |
III. |
)) |
bhavissante |
{bhtt' vissare) The 88 being added without intermediate vowel affects of course the preceding consonant : dakkhati to passati *to see' ; sakkhite to aakkoti ' to be able.'
A misunderstanding of these forms gave rise to the forma- tions dakkhissati and sakkhissati, with a double future sign.
Cpr. further lacchati to labhati *to take*; checchati to chindati * to cut ; ' bhejjati to bhindati ' to break.'
Forms with auxiliary vowel are also in use, e.g. : labhiasati. From the special tense we have futures like gacchiasati to gacchati, but also gamissati; juho88ati, juhissati to juhoti. karoti has besides the future karissati, a contracted form : I. sing, kdhdmi I. plur. kdhdma
II. „ kdhasi kahisi II. „ kdhatha
III. ,, kdhati kdhiti III. ,, kahanti kahinti
CONDITIONAL. 67
In the same way eti * to go ' has, besides the future essatiy ehiti.
The contracted form hoti from hhavati shows the following forms :
I. sing, hemiy hehdmi, hohdmi^ hessami, hehtssdmi, hohissami. II. „ hest, hehisi, hohisi, hessasi, hehissasi, hohissasi. III. „ heti, hetiti, hoiifi, hessati, hehissati, hohissati.
I. plur. hema, hehdma^ hohdma^ hessdma^ hehissdma, hO' hissdma. II. „ hetha, hehittha, hohittha^ hessatha, hehissafha, hohissatha. III. „ henti, hehinti, hohinti, hessanti, hehissanti, hohissanti. From y/su * to hear ' future att. sussam, ^dd dassati and att. dassam,
§ 26. CONDITIONAL.
Prom the future stem is made an augment preterite by prefixing the augment a and adding the secondary endings :
PARASSAPADAM.
I. sing, ssam I. plur. ssdmhd
II. „ 8se {ssa) II. „ ssatha
III. „ ssd (ssa) III. „ ssamsu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, ssam I. plur. ssdmhase
II. „ ssase II. „ ssavhe
III. „ ssatha III. „ ssitmu
The endings are added with or without intervening /. The paradigm is :
PARASSAPADAM.
I. sing, abhavissam I. plur. ahhavissdtnhd
II. „ abhavissa °88e II. „ abhavissatha
III. „ abhavma °88d III. „ abhavissamsu
ATTANOPADAM.
I. sing, abhavissam I. plur. abhavissdmhase
II. „ abhavissase II. „ abhavmavhe
III. „ abhavissatha III. „ abhavmiiMU
68 PALI GRAMMAR.
§ 27. DERIVATIVE CONJUGATION.
The derivative conjugation may be divided under five headings :
I. Passive: It is formed through adding ya to the weakest form. The endings are those of the altanopadam^ but also those of the parassapadam occur, y affects a preceding con- sonant in the usual way. In a few instances iya is added instead of ya, and the endings of the passives are added to the present active.
Cpr. e.g. : iicchate vuccati from y/vac * to speak ' ; vussati vasiyati from \/va8 *to dwell.' kayyati karlyati kariyyati kayirati are given as passive to karoti. dlyati from y/dd * to give*; thlyate from \/thd * to stand'; gamynte, gamiyaii gacclnyate ^J gam * to go ' ; gheppati and gayhati to ganhati ' to take.'
II. The Intensive or Frequentative is formed by reduplication. Its conjugation is in accordance with the second conjugational class, the reduplication, however, is peculiar.
The reduplicating syllable is composed of a single con- sonant with a heavy vowel : Idlappaii ' to lament ' ; ddddallati * to blaze.*
The reduplicating syllable has a final consonant taken from the end of the root. This consonant is a nasal which substitutes any other consonant ; cankamati jahgamati cahcalati.
Not many instances of the intensive are met with.
III. The Desiderative : The desiderative stem is formed from the simple root by the addition of a reduplication and by an appended sa. This sa affects of course the preceding consonants. Some roots form an abbreviated stem by a con- traction of reduplication and root together in one syllable. Examples are, huhhukkati, yhhiij', pivdsati, y/pd\ vlmamsati for mimams ; jigimsati, \/hr ; dicchati, y/dd.
IV. The Causative : From every root can be formed a causative ; this is done by affixing aya to the strengthened
P^LRTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS. 69
root. Tlie native grammarians range these verbs under the seventh class.
This aya can optionally be contracted into e. Besides this formation, another is in use : apaya contracted into ape is added to the root. A diflferentiation of meaning is sometimes to be traced.
If contracted into e, the conjugation follows of course the first conjugational class; the forms in aya and apaya are conjugated like bhavati.
As causative of y/gam * to go ' are given gamayati, gameti gacchdpetiy gacchapayati ; yjhan * to kill ' has haneti, ghdteti.
V. Denominatives : From every noun may be formed a denominative. The sufiixes employed are : aya, aya, lya. e.g. : ciceitdyati ' to splash ' ; piittlyati ' to treat as a son.'
§ 28. PARTICIPLES, INFINITIVES, GERUNDS.
1) The Participle Present is formed by the suffixes at and anta, which are added to the present stem, e.g.: gacckanto gaccham (see above, page 38). In the same way these suffixes are added to the future stem, to form 2) Participle Future.
In the same way the suffixes mdna and dna are used for the Present Participle Attanopada.
3) Of the Perfect Participle in vams only a few doubtful traces are left, tndu and viddasu for vidvams.
4) The Past Participle Passive is formed by the suffixes ta and na, which are added directly to the root or through an intervening vowel i. Of course all phonetic changes take place : —
kato ' made ' ; gato ' gone ' ; icchito * wished * ; phuttho ' touched * ; laddho * taken ' ; vutto ' spoken * ; vapifo and vufto ' shaven ' ; dinuo * given.*
5) From the Past Participle Passive is formed a secondary derivative with the meaning of a Past Active Participle by adding the suffixes rat, rant, e.g. :
hutavd hutavanlo * having sacrificed * ; manditard, mandita- vanto * having adorned * ; hhtittard ' having eat^n.*
II. Gerundives : The suffixes by which gerundives are
70 PALI GRAMMAR.
regularly and ordinarily formed are : ya tavya (tabba tayya) aniya. They are joined with or without intervening vowel i. e.g. : bhabbo for bhavyo; karanlyo kdriyo kayyo kayiro kattabbo * that ought to bo done * ; ddtayyo ddtabbo ddtabyo * that ought to be given.*
III. Gerunds : The gerund is formed by the suffixes tvd ya tvdna and tuna. They take arbitrarily the vowel i between root and ending. Sometimes the suffixes ya and tvd are united into one.
Remarkable forms are :
datfhu and disvd * having seen.' anuvicca „ anuviditvd * having known.' dhacca „ dhanitrd ' having thrown.*
pappuyya „ pdpayitcd * having obtained.' vineyya „ vinayitvd * having laid aside.' nicchcyya * having ascertained.' Cpr. further : passitvdna and passituna * having seen.'
atmtvd and atikkamitvd 'having approached.* datvd, ddya, daditvd * having given.* katvdna, kdiuna * having made.* gayha, ganhiya, ganhitvd ' having taken.*
IV. Infinitives : They are formed by the suffixes turn tave, and rarely tuye. The infinitive can be formed from the special base, or from the root ; in both cases an i is arbitrarily inserted :
e.g. gantum * to go * ; laddhiim * to take * ; vaditum * to speak * ; sunitum and aotave * to hear ' ; vippahatave * to give up * ; ganetuye * to count.'
§ 29. INDECLINABLES.
I. Adverbs.
ADVERBS FORMED BY SUFFIXES.
Classes of adverbs are formed by the addition of adverbial suffixes not only to pronominal roots or stems, but also to noun and adjective stems.
INDECLINABLES. 71
Most of these sufl&xes belong to a time anterior to the fixing of the Piili, as a comparison with Sanskrit and the cognate languages will show.
1) ^ standing for an original tas. It gives to the word to which it is added mostly an ablative sense, but sometimes also a local. It may be added to pronouns, prepositions and nouns. In the last case it is regarded as the regular substitute for the termination of the ablative (see page 41).
Examples are from pronominal stems : ato ' hence ' ; i(o
* here ' ; tato * from that place * ; t/ato ' from what ' ; etc.
2) From prepositions : abhito * near ' ; parato * further.*
3) From noun and adjective stems: aggato 'before*; dalikhinato ' on the south ' ; sahbato * from every side * ; pitthito * from the back ' ; pitito * on the father's side.'
II. Adverbs of a local sense are formed by an original tra. This tra is either preserved or assimilated to ita or ttha (page 16). It is added to pronominal roots and nouns. Examples are :
1) atra, attha ' here ' ; tatra and tatiha * there ' ; kutra and kuttha ' where,' 2) annatra and annatlha ' elsewhere ' ; ubha- yattha, ubhayatta ' in both places.'
dha and assimilated ha also form adverbs with a local sense. The forms are used promiscuously: t'ha and idha 'here.'
Interchangeable with this last suffix are : ham and him also forming local adverbs ; kuhirn, ktiham, kaham * where ' ; taham, tahwi * there ' ; yahini * where.'
III. Adverbs of manner are formed by means of the suffix thd mostly from pronominal roots : tathd * so ' ; yatha
* as ' ; but also from adjectives, e.g. sabbatha * in every way ' ; annathd ' in another way.*
By means of the suffix ti or Hi. This adverb is very extensively used in cases of indirect narrative, or of enumeration, or of quoting the words and thoughts of others.
By means of the suffix m or ira ' like as.' By the side of iva also viya and va. The former seems a metathesis of iva ; eva and yera, heca * just, even ' ; evam related to em ' thus ' ; kiva ' how ? '
IV. Adverbs of time are formed by means of the suflix dd : —
72 PALI GRAMMAR.
hadd ' when ? * ; ya</d * whenever * ; sadd and sabbadd ' always.*
Related to da seems di in padi * if.'
2. By means of the compound suffix : ddni, ddnim for ddnlm. iddni, iddnim * now ' ; taddni, taddnim * then.*
3. By means of the suffix rahi (Skr. rhi) : etarahi, and seldom etarhi ' now * ; tarahi ' then.*
V. By means of the suffix dhd are formed adverbs, especially from numerals, signifying * fold, times.'
Cpr. ekadhd, etc. ' in one way ' ; bahudhd * in many ways * ; sabbadhd ' everywhere.* Sometimes we find the suffix d/ii used with the same sense : sabbadhi \see page 49).
VI. Adverbs of quantity, or measure, or manner, are formed by means of the suffix so, Skr. 9as. e.g. : bahuso ' greatly ' ; paTicaso ' by fives * ; akkharaso * letter by letter ' ; atthaao * according to the sense.'
VII. Case Forms used as Adverbs.
A large number of adverbs have cas.e-suffixes, from stems which are or are not otherwise in use.
1) The Accusative : i/am with the meaning of * that, as, became * ; tarn (tad) ' there, thither * ; kiin * why ' ; idam ' here.'
Compounded with id we have cid=.ca-\-id: ce 'even,* and then after false analogy noce * if not ' instead of tie.
Noun and adjective stems so used are : —
ndma * by name * ; raho ' secretly ' ; rattam * at night * ; saccam * in truth * ; niccam * always ' ; ciram * long ' ; bhlyo ' again.'
As accusatives of nouns and adjectives we must also con- sider several adverbs of obscure connection which go back like most of the preceding in their formation to a period anterior to Pali.
e.g. : ittn/ii ' silently * ; sdyam * in the evening * ; aram * speedily ' ; alam ' enough ' ; mitho and mithu ' mutually * ; sammd ' fully * ; ac^jju ' instantly * ; isam * a little.'
2) The Instrumental : Most of the pronominal adjective and noun-stems noticed under ace. occur in adverbial use : —
INDECLINABLES. 73
yena 'because, for which*; dakkhinena 'on the south'; cirena * after a long time ' ; diva ' by day * ; amd * with.*
3) The Dative : It is less extensively used in an adverbial sense, e.g. : cirdya * for a long time * ; sukhdya * for the benefit * ; hitdya ' for the benefit.'
4) The Ablative : Most of the pronominal stems are used adverbially, e.g. : yasmd ' because ' ; kasmd ' why ? ' ; durd, drd * far off ' ; heithd * under, below * ; paccbd ' behind.'
The original of the ablative d is of necessity lost in Pali.
5) The Genitive : Its use is very limited, e.g. : kissa ' why ? ' ; cirassa * long * ; hetu and heto ' on account of.'
6) The Locative : Forms adverbially used are, e.g. : hhuvi * on the earth ' ; dre, dure * after.'
II. Prepositions.
Under the name of upasagga (prepositions) the native grammarians comprise a number of twenty words, which modify the meaning of the verb or substantive to which they are added.
Put in alphabetical order they are as follows :
•^ati 'over, beyond.'
t adhi * above, over, superior to.'
•\anu 'after, under, less than.'
•^apa 'away, from.'
ajn ' near, close by.'
abhi ' to, unto, against.'
aca 'away, down, oft.' t d * until, as far as.'
t* ud * upwards, above.' t«j5rt ' below, less.'
du 'hardly.'
nir * downwards.'
ni {nir) ' outward.'
pa 'forward, onward.' "^pati or pati ' towards.'
pard ' away, aside, back.*
pari ' around, about.'
74 I*ALI GRAMMAR.
ri * apart, asunder.' 8am * with, together.* 8ti *well.* To these words must bo added a few others, which are equally combined with verbs and nouns, but are of a more limited use, such as : fanto antara 'within.* t<f« 'manifestly, close.' t tiro * across, beyond.'
pdtu * manifestly.' These are mainly used in composition with the verbs a«, hhuy kr.
All of the above-mentioned particles and adverbs marked f are used as prepositions, and govern nouns. To these must be added a few words, which are used like modern prepositions and adverbs and only comparatively seldom in combination with verbs and nouns, e.g. : adho * below.*
uddham ubbham * upwards.* tiriyam 'across.* pacchd 'behind.* pararn 'beyond, after.* piird ' before.' bahi ' outwards.' rite 'except.* vind * without.* saha, samam, saddhim ' with.*
§ 30. COMPOUNDS.
1) Stems which admit of inflection are, as in other languages, combined to form compounds, which are treated as if simple in respect to inflection and construction.
COMPOUNDS. 75
2) As regards compounds, seldom more than two or three stems are combined in the older language; but, as in Sanskrit, the later the language is, the more compounds, and cumbrous compounds prevail.
3) It is of course difficult to determine which compounds Piili has formed itself, and which it has in common with other Indian languages. A sort of criterion is, if we find words compounded according to rules which are no more in abeyance in Pali ; but even that does not prove con- clusively that a compound belongs as commonwealth to the Indian languages.
e.g. : sappuriso Skr. satpurusha * a good man ' ; pullihgam Skr. pumlinga * manhood,' for which in later Pali we find pumalingam.
4) These compounds may be divided into three principal classes :
I. Copulative or Aggregative Compounds (dvandm).
The members are coordinate; in uncom pounded condition they would be joined with ca ' and.' Examples are very numerous.
The whole has the gender and declension of its last member, and is in number a plural, e.g. : elaka-miga-sukara- pakkhtno.
The compound, without regard to the number denoted or the gender of its constituents, becomes a singular collective. The gender is mostly neuter.
e.g. : hiriottappam = hiri + ottappam ndmarupam = ndmam + rupam ddUddsa^i = ddsi + ddso ahoratto, ahoratti, ahoraftam kusalakusalamy dhammddhammo, but also as a plural dhammddhammd. Puma * a male ' has two bases in composition : puma and pum : of the former we have itthipumam * male and female * ; of the latter pumitthi 'masculine and feminine.'
Nouns, adjectives and particles are not infrequently
76 PALI GRAMMAR.
repeated to give an intensive or distributive repetitional meaning, e.g. :
divase divase ' day after day * ; gdmagdmam * village after village ' ; anhamahnam * mutually ' ; punapunam * again and again/
II. Determinative Compounds (fappurisa).
There are two divisions ;
1) Dependent compounds=the tappurisa proper, in which the prior member is a substantive word standing to the other in the relation of a case dependent on it.
2) Descriptive corQpo\md8=^kammadfidraj/a, in which the prior member is an adjective, or another word having the value of an adjective qualifying a noun.
I. Dependent Compounds.
They can of course be used either substantively or adjectivel3% The case relation may be of any kind.
hrahmaloko ' Brahma world ' ; padodakam ' water for the feet * ; accharasambhavo ' descent from a nymph ' ; saccavadi ' truthful ' ; dhammadharo ' versed in the law ' ; sarandgama- nam * going for refuge * ; veddgu * versed in the law ' ; jaccandho * born blind * ; apahbajitasadiso * like one who has given up the world ' ; tadko ' like him ' ; mddiso ' like me * ; thdlipakko * cooked in a pot.'
The order of the members which form such compounds may be inversed : addhamdso and mdsaddho ' half a month * ; pitdmaho * a grandfather.*
JRqjan, sakhd (sak/ri), if employed as last members of a compound, exhibit all the forms known from the declension. As first member of a compound rq/an has the base rq/d ; the only form allowed in the nom. case as last member is rq/d : rqjabhayam ' fear from a king ' ; Kosalarujd ' king of Kosala.'
Sometimes stems not in use as simple words are employed as first members. This looks as if a declined stem has been used; but the dependency is not always such as to favour such an explanation, e.g. : manasikdro ' attention.'
COMPOUNDS. 77
II. Descriptive Compounds {kammadharaya).
It is of course sometimes difficult to say whether the com- pound is tappurusa or kammadharaya.
mahanto 'great' takes in composition the weak forms mahd and mahat, santo * being, good, true,' the weak form sat.
Examples are : nihippalam * blue lotus ' ; sahbaseto * all white'; j9?"yflr;wraf^o 'speaking kindly'; rajassald 'amenstruous woman*; sappuriso 'a good man'; saddhammo 'good doctrine'; mahapphalo ' very fruitful ' ; mahdpumo * great virtue ' ; mahesi ' great sage ' ; hetuppabhavo 'proceeding from a cause'; kacchurakhasd ' scab.'
The adverbial words which are most frequently and commonly used as prior members of compounds are : or, an, ana * the negative particle ' ; sm ' well ' ; dus * badly * ; sa 'with.' e.g.: asankhato 'the unconditioned'; anano 'free from debt ' ; duppuro ' difficult to fill ' ; sucinno ' well done ' ; saseno ' with an army * ; salajjo ' ashamed.'
ku as former part of many compounds designates inferiority. It takes the forms : kicd, kad, ku, e.g. : kunnadl * an in- significant river ' ; kadannam ' bad food ' ; kuditthi ' wrong view/
Closely related to the preceding class are III. the Numeral Compounds {digu). The whole is made a neuter singular.
A sample of this sort of compound is digii, 'itself worth two cows ' ; further tidandam ' three staves ' ; ticlvaram ' three robes * ; tlham ' three days.*
IV. Adverbial Compounds (abyaylbhdm).
They are also closely related to the Determinative com- pounds. They are formed in joining prepositions and adverbs to a noun, and are then used as abstracts, collectives, and simply adverbially : yathdnicim ' according to one's pleasure ' ; but yathdrucito * as liked, pleasant ' ; yathdmato ' as if dead ' ; sampahdro ' wounding ' ; aampq/amam ' consciousness * ; apacdro * approach.*
78 PALI GRAMMAR.
V. All the preceding compounds may be used adjectively, and are then called : Bahuhbihi, e.g. : rltarago * free from passion * ; but puruso vltardgo ' a man free from passion, an arhat * ; paTicacakkhu ' the five sorts of vision * ; but as an epithet of the Buddha, pancacakkhit * man possessing the five sorts of vision ' ; anupubbam * regular succession * ; but anupubbo * regular, successive* ; anupubbo nirodho 'successive destruction.*
In a few cases compounds are fotTned from words not usually put together, e.g. of adverbs.
vitatho 'false, unreal '=n+^rt^Aa; yathdtatho 'real, true*:= f/athd+tafhd. e.g. of a phrase : itihdHO * tradition*; itivuttam or itivuttakam ' name of a book, a legend ' ; ahamahamikam * conceit of Qw^evioriiy * =.aham-\- aham.
All these compounds were formed before Pali became a literary dialect.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
II. CHRESTOMATHY.
THE PARITTAM, BEING EXTRACTS FROM THE SUTTA PITAKAM.
NAMO TASSA :BHAGAyATO AEAHATO SAMMA SAMBUDDHASSA.
Buddham saranam gaccliiTmi. Dhammani saranam gacchami. Saiigham saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami. Dutiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchiimi. Tatiyam pi Buddham saranam gacchami. Tatiyam pi Dhammam saranam gacchami. Tatiyam pi Sangham saranam gacchami.
SARANAGAMAXAM.
1) Paniitipata veramani sikkhjipadam.
2) Adinnadana veramani sikkhiipadain.
3) Abrahmacariya veramani sikkhapadam.
4) Musavada veramani sikkhapadam.
5) Sura-meraya-majja-pamudatthana veramani sikkha- padam.
6) Vikalabhojana veramani sikkhapadam.
7) Nacca-glta-vadita-visukadassana veramani sikkhiipadam.
8) Mala-gandha-vilepana-dharana-mandana-vibhnsanattha- na veramani sikkhapadam.
6
82 8AMANERAPANHA. DVATTIM8AKABA.
9) UccHsayana-mahiisayana veramanl sikkhapadam.
10) Jiitarupa-rajata-patiggahanii veramani sikkhapadam.
DASASIKKHAPADANI.
* Eka niima kirn ? ' " Sabbe satta iiharatthitika."
* Dve niima kim ? ' " Namanca riipaiica." ' Tini nama kira ? ' " Tisso vedana."
* Cattari niima kira ? ' " Cattari ariyasaccani."
* Pafica niima kim ? ' " Pane' upiidiinakkhandhii."
* Cha nama kira ? ' " Cha ajjhattikiini ayatanani.** 'Satta niima kim ? * " Satta bojjhahgii."
* Attha nama kira ? ' " Ariyo atthahgiko maggo."
* Nava niima kim ? * " Nava sattiiviisii."
' Dasa nama kim ? ' " Dasah' angehi samannagato araMti vuccati ti."
SAMANERAPANHAM.
Atthi imasmim kiiye : kesa, lomii, nakhii, danta, taco, mamsam, nahiiru, atthI, atthiminjii, vakkam, hadayam, yakanara, kilomakam, pihakam, papphiisain, antam, antagu- nam, udariyam, karlsam, pittam, seraham, pubbo, lohitam, sedo, raedo, assu, vasii, khelo, einghiinikii, lasika, muttam, matthake matthaluhgan ti.
DVATTIMSAKAEAM.
Patisankhii yoniso cTvarara patiseviimi yiivad eva sitassa patighiitiiya unhassa patighiitiiya damsa-makasa-viit&tapa- sirimsapa-samphassiinara patighatiiya yavad eva hiri-kopina paticchadanattham. i| 1 1|
Patisankhii yoniso pindapiitara patiseviimi n'eva daviiya na madaya na mandaniiya na vibhiisaniiya, yiivadeva imassa kayassa thitiyii yiipanaya vihims(iparatiyii brahmacariylL- nuggahaya : iti puriinailca vedanam patisaiikhami navanca
PACCAVEKKHANA. DASADHAMMASUTTA 83
vedanam na uppadessJimi, yairU. ca me bhavissati anavajjata ca phasuvihiiro c&ti. ||2||
Patisankhji yoniso senasanam patisevaml yiivadeva sitassa patighataya unhassa patighiitiiya darasaraakasavatatapasirira- sapasamphassanain patighataya yavadeva utuparissiiya vino- danam patisallanaramattham. ||3||
Patisaukhji yoniso gilanapaccaya-bhesajjaparikkharam pa- tisevatni yavadeva uppannanam veyyabadhikariara vedana- nam patighataya abyapajjhaparamataysLti. ||4||
PACCAVEKKHANA.
Evam me sutam : Ekaip saraayaip Bhagava Siivatthiyam viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa arame. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi : * bhikkhavo ' ti 'bhadante' ti. Te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca :
"Dasa ime, bhikkhave, dhamma pabbajitena abhinham pacca vekkh itabba.
Katame dasa ?
1) Vevanuiyamhi ajjhupagato ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca vekkhitabbam.
2) Parapatibaddha me jivika ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca- vekkhitabbam.
3) Aiino me akappo karaniyo ti pabbajitena abhinham pacca vekkhitabbam .
4) Kacci nu kho me attasllato na upavadatiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
5) Kacci nu kho mam anuvicca vinnil sabrahmacari sllato na upavadantiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
6) Sabbehi me piyehi manapehi njinabhavo vinabhavo ti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
7) Kamraassa komhi kamma-dayado kamma-yoni kamma- bandhu kamma-patisarano, yam kamraam karissami kalyiinam va papakarn va tassa day ado bhavissamiti pabbajitena abhin- ham paccavekkhitabbam.
8) Eatham bhutassa me rattindiva vitipatantiti pabbaji- tena abhinham paccavekkhitabbam.
84 MAHAMANGALASUTTA.
■ 9) Kacci nu kho 'ham sunnagiire abhiramiimiti pabbajU tena abhinhara paccavekkhitubbara.
lOj Atthi nu kho rae uttariraanussadhammii alaraan'ya- nanadassanaviseso adhigato so *hara pacchime kiile sabbrah- raacarl puttho na manku bhavissiiiuiti pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitubbara.
Ime kho bhikkhave dasa dhammu pabbajitena abhinham paccavekkhitabba ti.
Idam avoca Bhagavii : attamanii te bhikkhu Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandun ti.
DASADHAMMASITTTA.
Evam me sutani : Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa arame. Atha kho afinatara devata abhikkantiiyii rattiya abhikkantavanna kevalakappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten' upasankami upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhivadetvii ekamantam atthasi. Ekaraantam ^hita kho sa devata Bhaga- vantam gathaya ajjhabhasi :
" Bahu deva manussa ca mangalani acintayum Akankharaana sotthanam : bruhi mahgalara utta- mam." || 1 1|
* Asevana ca balanam, panditiinafica sevana,
Puja ca pujanlyanam : etam mangalam uttamara.' ||2||
* Patirupa desaviiso ca pubbe ca katapunfiata
Atta sammapanidhi ca : etam mangalam uttamam.' || 3 1|
* Bahusaccafica sipparica vinayo ca susikkhito, Subhasita ca yii vaca : etam mangalain uttamam.' || 4 1|
* Matapitu upatthiinara putta-diirassa sangaho Anakula ca kammantii: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||5||
* Diinanca dhammacariya ca fiatakiinanca sangaho Anavajjani kammani: etam mangalam uttamam.* ||6||
* Arati virati papa majjapiina ca saftftamo
Appamado ca dhammesu: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||7||
RATANASUTTA. ^ 85
* Garavo ca niviito ca santutthi ca katafifiufa
Kiileua dliarama-savanam: etam mangaluni uttamam.* || 8||
* KhantI ca sovacassata saraanananca dassanara
Kalena dhamma-sukacchu: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||9 1|
* Tapo ca brahmacariya ca ari3'a8accana' dassanam Nibbana-sacchikiriya ca: etam mangalam uttamam.' ||10||
* Phutthassa lokadharamehi cittara yassa na karapati Asokam virajam khemam: etam mangalam uttamam.' || 11 1|
* Etadisani katviina sabbattha-m-aparajita
Sabbatha sotthim gacchanti: tesam mangalam utamam ti.' II 12 II
MAHAMANGALASUTTAM.
Yanidha bhutani samagatani bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe sabb' evabliiitii suraana bhavantu atho pi sakkacca sunantu bhasitam. || 1 1|
Tasmahi bhuta nisiimetha sabbe mettam karotha manusiya pajaya diva ca ratto ca haranti ye balim tasmahi ne rakkhattha appamatta. ||2||
Yam kiiici vittam idha va hurara va saggesu va yain ratanam panltam na no samam atthi Tathiigatena idaTn pi buddhe ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 3 1|
Khayam viriigam amatam panltam Yad ajjhagii Sakyamuni samiihito na tena dhammena sam' atthi kifici. idam pi dhamme ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. 11 4 11
86 BATANASUTTA.
Yam buddhasettho parivannuyi sucim samudhim anantarikail Aatn uhu samadhinu tena samo na vijjati idam pi dhamme ratanara panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 5 1|
Ye puggalu attha satam pasattha cattari etani yugani honti te dakkhineyya Sugatassa siivaka etesu dinnjini mahapphalani. idarn pi sanghe ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi botu. || 6 1|
Ye suppayuttji manasii dalhena nikkcTraino Gotama-siisanamhi te pattipattii amatam vigayha laddhji raudha nibbutim bbunjamauii idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 7 1|
Yath' indakhllo pathavira site siyii catubbhi viitebhi asampakampiyo tathApamara sappurisara vadami yo ariyasaccani avecca passati idam pi sanghe ratanaip panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||8 i|
Ye ariya-saccani vibhavayanti gam'bhlra-pannena sudesitani kincapi te honti bhusapparaatta na te bhavam atthamam jidiyanti idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 9 1|
Sahav* assa dassana-sampadiiya tay* assu dhammii jahitii bhavanti sakkilyaditthi vicikicchitanca sThibbatam va pi yad atthi kifici catuh' apayehi ca vippamutto
RATANASUTTA. $7
cha cabhitthjlniini abhabbo katum idam pi saiighe ratanain panltam. etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 10 |j
Kiiicapi so kararaam karoti pilpakam kciyena vacii uda cetasii va abhabbo so tassa paticchiidaya abhabbata ditthapadassa vutto idam pi sanghe ratanain panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 11 1|
Vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge gimhana-mase pathamasmim gimhe tathupamam dhammavaram adesayl nibbanagarairn pararaam hitiiya idam pi buddhe ratanain panitani etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 12 1|
Varo varaiifiu varado varaharo anuttaro dhammavaram adesayl idam pi buddhe ratanam panltam etena saccena suvatthi hotu. ||13||
Khinara puranam navam n'atthi sambhavam
virattacitta ayatike bhavasmim
te khina-bija avirulhicchanda
nibbanti dhTra yathaj'am padlpo
idam pi sanghe ratanam panltam
etena saccena suvatthi hotu. || 14 1|
Yiinidha bhutani samagatani bhummiini va yani va antalikkhe Tathiigatam deva-manussa-pujitam Buddhara namassiiraa suvatthi hotu. || 15 1|
Yanidha bhutani samagatani bhummani va yani va antalikkhe Tathagatam deva-manussa-pujitara dhammam namassama suvatthi hotu. l|16l|
88 KARANlYAMETTASUTTA.
Yitiiidha bhutani saroilgatuni bhummJini vii yuni va antalikkho Tathiigatain de vumanussa-puj itam sangbam namassuma suvattbi hotu. ||17|
RATANA8UTTAM.
Karanlyara attbakusalena
yan tain santara pad am abbisamecca
Sakko uju ca siiju ca
siivaco c'assa mudu anatimual. || 1 1|
Santussako ca subbaro ca appakicco ca sallabukavutti santindriyo ca nipako ca appagabbbo ca kulesu ananugiddbo. ||2|
Na ca kbuddara samiicare kiilci yena vinnii pare upavadeyyum sukbino vii kbemino bontu sabbe satta bbavantu sukbitattu. ||4||
Ye keci panabbut* attbi tasii vii tbiivarii vii anavasesii digbii vii ye mabantii vii majjbimii rassakii anuku tbillii. ||4||
Dittbii vii ye va adittbii
ye ca diire vasanti avidiire
bbiltii vii sambbavesi vii
sabbe sattii bbavantu sukkbitattii. || 5 1|
Na paro param nikubbetba n&timafinetba kattbaci nam kinci byarosanii patigba-sannii n&tlfiamannasa dukkbam iccbeyya. ||6||
Miitii yatbii niyam puttam iiyusii ekaputtam anurakkbe
KIIANDHAPARITTA. 89
evam pi sabbabhutesu
manasam bhiivaye aparimanam. || 7 1|
Mettafica sabbalokasmira manasam bhavaye aparimanam uddham adho ca tiriyanca asambiidhara averara asapattam. ||8||
Tittham carara nisinno va
sayiino va yavat' assa vigatamiddho
etam satim adhittheyya
brahmam etam viharam idha-m-ahu. ||9||
Dittbiiica anupagamma
sllavii dassanena sampanno
kamesu vineyya gedham
nahi jatu gabbhaseyyam punar etiti. || 10 1|
karanIyamettasuttam.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavji Savatthiyam vlharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana samayena Savatthiyam auiiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho kalankato hoti. Atha kho sarabahula bhikkhu yena Bha- gava ten' upasaiikamirasu upasankamitvu Bhagavantara abhivadetvii ekamantam nisldimsu ekamantaiu nisinna kho te bhikkhu Bhagavantam etad avocum :
* Idha bhante, Savatthiyam aufiataro bhikkhu ahina dattho kalankato ti.'
"Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari ahiiajakuhTni mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so bhikkhave bhikkhu cattari ahirajakuhTni mettena cittena phareyya : na hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ahina dattho kiilara kareyya."
Katamani cattari ahirajakuUmi ? Virupakkham ahiraja- kulain, Eriipatham ahirajakulam Chabyaputtara ahiraja- kulam Kanhjigotaraakam ahirajakulam.
Na ha nuna so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu imani cattari ahiraja- kuliini mettena cittena phari. Sace hi so, bhikkhave, bhikkhu
90 METTASUTTA.
imitni cattilri ahiiajukulani mcttena cittena pharcyya, na hi 80 bhikkhave bhikkhu ahinii dattho kiilam kareyya.
Anujiinami, bhikkhave, inailni cattiiri ahimjakulani mettena cittena pharitum : attaguttiya attarakkbiiya attaparittayati.
Idam avoca Bhagava. Idam vatva Sugato athdparaai etad avoca satthii :
Viriipakkhehi me mettara, mettam Eriipathehi me Chabyiiputtehi me mettam, mettam Kanhagotamakehi
ca. mil
Apadakehi me mettara, mettam dvipiidakehi me catuppadehi me mettam mettam bahuppadehi me. ||2||
Ma mam apudako himsi, ma mam himsi dvipadako
ma mam cattuppado himsi ma mam himsi bahuppado. || 3 1|
Sabbe satta sabbe panii sabbe bhuta ca kevala
sabbe bhadrani passantu, ma kinci papam agama ||4||
Appamiino buddho, appamjino dhammo, appamano sangho ; pamanavantani sirimsapani ahivicchika satapadi unnana- bhisarabu musika.
Kata me rakkhii, kata me paritta, patikkamantu bhQtani, so 'ham namo Bhagavato namo sattannam sammasambuddha- nam.
KHANDHAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagava Savatthiyam viharati Jetavane Anathapindikassa ariirae. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhii amantesi: "bhikkhave" ti, "bhadante" ti. Te bhikkhii Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca : "Mettaya, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya, iisevitaya, bhiivitaya, bahullkatiiya, yanikataya, vatthukataya, anutthitiiya pari- citaya susamaraddhiiya ekadasdnisarasa patikankhii.
Katame ekadasa ?
1) Sukham supati.
2) sukham patibujjhuti.
8) na pitpakam supinam passati.
METTANISAMSAM. 91
4) manussanam piyo hoti. 6) amanussilnam piyo hoti.
6) devata rakkhanti.
7) nassa aggi va visara vii sattham va kamati.
8) tuvatam cittara saraadhlyati.
9) mukhavanno vippasldati.
10) asammulho kalara karoti.
11) uttarim appativijjhanto brahmalokupago hot! ti. Mettaj'a, bhikkhave, cetovimuttiya asevittiya bhavitaya
baliullkata3'a yanikataya vatthukatiiya anutthitaya paricitaya susamaraddhaya : ime ekadasanisarasa patikahkhii ti.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato bhasitam abliinandunti.
METTASUTTAM.
Pahuta-bhakkho bbavati vippavuttho saka ghara bahu nam upajlvaati yo mittanam na dubhati. || 1 1|
Yam yam janapadam yati nigiime rajadhaniyo sabbattha piijito hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||2|j
Nissa cora pasahanti natimanfieti khattiyo sabbe amitte tarati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||3||
Akkuddho sagharam eti sabhaya patinandito natlnam uttamo hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||4||
Sakkatva sakkato hoti garu hoti sagaravo Tanna-kitti-bhato hoti yo mittanam na dubhati. || 5 1|
Pujako labhate piijara vandako pativandanara yasokittinca pappoti yo mittanam na dubhati. ||6||
Aggi yatha pajjalati devata va virocati
siriya ajahito hoti yo mittaaam na dubhati. ||7H
Gavo tassa pajiiyanti khette vuttara viruhati puttanam phalam asnati yo mittanam na dubhati. ||8||
92 MORAPARITTA.
Darlto pabbatiito vil rukkhiito patito naro
cuto patittham labhati yo inittiiuam na dubhati. ||9||
Virulharanlasantiinam nigrodham iva raiiluto amitta nappasahanti yo raittiinam na dubhatiti. ||10||
METTANISAMSAM.
Udet* ayain cakkhumii ekariijii
ha^rissa-vanno pathavippabhiiso,
tani tam namassarni harissavannam pat.havippabhiisam,
tay' ajja guttii viharemu divasam. || 1 1|
Ye briihraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae
te me namo te ca mam piilayantu,
Nam' atthu buddhilnam, nam' atthu bodhiyii !
namo vimuttanam, namo vimuttiyii ! || 2 ||
Imam so parittam katvii, moro carati esanu.
Apet* ayam cakkhuma ekaraja
harissavanno pathavippabhiiso,
tam tam namassarni harissavannam pathavippabhiisam
tay' ajja guttii viharemu rattirn. || 3||
Ye brahraanii vedagu sabbadhamrae
te me namo te ca mam piiUiyantu,
Nam' atthu buddhiinam, nam' atthu bodhiyii!
namo vimuttiinara, namo vimuttiyii ! \\4 |)
Imam so parittam katvii, moro viisara akappayiti. MORAPARITTA M.
Evam ne sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Siivatthiyara viharati, Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana samayena Candiraii devaputto Riihuhii asurindena gahlto hoti. Atha kho Candimii devaputto Bhagavantam anussara- mano tiiyam vehlyara imam giithain abhiisi :
CANDArARITTA. 03
* Namo te Buddha-v!r* atthu I vippamutto 'si sabbadhi sambiidha-patipanno 'smi tassa rae saranam bhavati.' || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii Candimara devaputtam arabbha Eiihum asurindam gathaya ajjhabbasi.
" Tatbugatam arabantam Candima saranam gato Rabu ! Candam pamuncassu Buddbu lokanukampakati." ||2||
Atba kbo Rabu asurindo Candimam devaputtam muncitvii taramanarupo yena Yepacitti asurindo ten' upasaukami upasankamitva samviggo lomabattbajato ekamantam attbasi ekamantara tbitara kbo Kabum asurindam Vepacitti asurindo giitbaya ajjbabbiisi :
** Kin nu santaramiino 'va Eahu ! Candam pamuncasi samviggarupo agamraa kin nu bbito 'va tittbasitl." ||3||
* Sattadba me pbale muddba jivanto na sukbam labbe. Buddbagiitbabbiglto 'mbi
no ce munceyya Candiman ti. ||4l|
CANDAPARITTA ..
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bbagava Siivattbiyain vibarati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame. Tena kbo pana samayena Suriyo devaputto Rabunti asurindena gablto boti.
Atba kbo Suriyo devaputto Bbagavantam anussaramauo tayam velayam imam gatbam abbasi :
' Narao te buddba vir* atlbu ! vippamutto 'si sabbadbi sambadbapatipanno 'smi tassa me saranam bbav&ti.' II 1 II
94 SURIYAPARITTA.
Atha kho Bhagava Suriyam devaputtam iirabbha Rahum asurindam guthiiya ajjhabhusi:
" Tathiigatam arahantam Suriyo saranam gato Rahu ! Suriyam pamuncassu Buddha lokinukampakati." ||2||
" Yo andhakiire tamasi pabharikaro
verocano mandall uggatejo
ma Riihu gill caram antalikkbe
pajam mama Rahu pamufica Suriyan ti." ||3||
Atha kho Riihu asurindo Suriyam devaputtam — pe —
* Sattadhii me phale muddha jivanto na sukham labhe Buddhagiithabhigito 'mhi : no ce muficeyya Suriyan ti.' ||4||
SURIYAPARITTAM.
Evam me sutam. Ekam eamayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhii jiraantesi "bhikkhavo" ti, "bhadante" ti. te bhikkhu Bhagavato paccassosum. Bhagava etad avoca : || 1 II
" Bhutapubbam, bhikkhave, devasura-sangiirao samu- pabbniho ahosi. Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sakko devanam indo deve Tiivatimse iimantesi :
" Sace, mjiristi, deviinam sangamagatanam uppajjeyya bha- yam vji chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim samaye dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Mamara hi vo dhajaggam uUokayatam yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam va lomahamso vii so pahlyassati. ||2||
No ce me dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha, atha kho Pajiipatissa devariljassa dhajaggam uUokeyyiitha. Pajiipatissa hi fo deva- riijassa dhajaggam ullokayatara ; yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyissati. || 3 1|
DHAJAOGA PARITTA. 95
No ce Pujjipatissa devariijassa dhajaggain uUokeyyutha, atha Varunassa devariijassa dhajaggam uUokeyyutha. Varuuassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bhavissati bhayara vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii so pahlyissati. ||4||
No ce Varunassa devariijassa dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha, atha Isiiuassa devarajassa dhajaggam ullokeyyiitha. Isa- nassa hi vo devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatara yam bha- vissati bhayam va chambhitattam va lomahamso va so pahlyissati. ||5||
Tam kho pana bhikkhave Sakkassa vii devanam indassa dhajaggam . uUokayatam : Pajiipatissa vii deviinara riijassa dhajaggam uUokayatam : Varunassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam uUokayatam : Isiiuassa vii devariijassa dhajaggam uUoka- yatam : yam bhavissati bhayam va chambhitattam vii loma- hamso vii so pahlyetha pi no pahlyetha. II 6 1|
Tam kissa hetu ?
"Sakko, bhikkhave, deviinam indo avitariigo avitadoso avitamoho bhirucchambhi uttriisi phaliiyiti." [| 7 jj
Ahafica kho bhikkhave evam vadami : " Sace tumhakam, bhikkhave, arauiiagatiinam va rukkhamulagatanam vii suuna- giiragatiinam vii uppajjeyya bhayam vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso vii mam eva tasmim samaye anussareyyiitha :
Iti pi so Bhagava araham samma-sambuddho vijja-carana- sampanno sugato lokavidu anuttaro purisadamma-sarathi sattha devamanussanam buddho Bhagavii ti. ||8||
Mamam hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bhayam vii chambhitattam va lomahamso pahlyissati.
No ce mam anussareyyiitha atha dhammani anussareyyatha : Sviikkhiito Bhagavatii dhammo sanditthiko akiiliko ehipassiko opanayiko paccattam veditabbo vinnuhiti. Dhammam hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bha3'am va chambhi- tattam vii lomahamso va so pahlyissati. ||9||
No ce dhammam anussareyyiitha atha sangham anussa- reyyiitha. Supatipanno Bhagavato savakasangho, ujupati- panno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, uiiyapatipanno Bhagavato siivakasahgho, siimlcipatipanno Bhagavato siivakasangho ; yadidam cattiiri purisayugiiui attha purisapuggalii esa sava-
96 DHAJAGGA TARITTA.
kasangho : iihuneyyo pjihuneyyo dakkhineyyo anjalikaranlyo anuttaram punna-khettam lokass&ti.
Sangham hi vo bhikkhave anussaratam yam bhavissati bhayani vii chambhitattam vii lomahamso va so pahl- yissati. ||10||
Tarn kissa hetu ?
TathcTgato hi, bhikkhave, araham samraasambuddho vltariigo vitadoso vltamoho abhlru acchatnbhi anutrasi ophahlyiti. ||11||
Idam avoca Bhagavii idam vatvana Sugato athiparam etad avoca sattha :
"Aranfie rukkha miilevii sunfiagarevji bhikkhavo anussaretha sambuddham bhayaiu tumhiikam no si^'ii." || 1 1|
" No ce Buddham sareyyatha lokajettham narasabhara : atha dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikain sudesitam." i|2||
*' No ce Dhammam sareyyatha niyyanikam sudesitam atha sangham sareyyatha punfiakkhettam anuttaram." j| 3 1|
" Evam Buddham sarantanam dhammam sanghanca bhikkhavo bhayatn va chambhitattam vii lomahamso na hessa-
titi>||4ii
DHAJAGGA PARITTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Riijagahe viharati Veluvane Kalandakaniviipe. Tena kho pana sama- yena ayasma Mahiikassapo pipphaliguhayam viharati, abadhiko dukkhito balhagihlno. Atha kho Bhagavii silyan- hasaraayam patisaUiinii vutthito, yen' iiyasmii Mahiikassapo ten' upasahkami upasahkamitva pailuatte iisane nisTdi. Nisajja kho Bhagavii iiyasmantam Makiikassapam etad avoca :
" Kacci te Kassapa khamanlyam, kacci yapanlyam, kacci dukkhiivedanii patikkamanti no abhikkamanti. Patikkamo 'fiiinam pariniiya ti no abhikkamo " ti.
MAnAKASSArABOJJHANGA. 97
*Na me, bhante, khamanlyam na yapanlyam balhii me dukkhitvedanii abhikkamanti no patikkamanti. Abhikkamo 'siinam pafinayati no patikkarao ti.
" Satt' ime, Kassapa, boj jhangii may:! saramJid-akkhJitiT bhii- vitii bahullkata abhinnjiya sambodhaya nibbaniiya samvattanti.
1) Satisambojjharigo kho, Kassapa, maya saramad-akkhato bhjlvito baliullkato abhinnaya sambodhaya nibbiinaya samvattati.
2) Dhammavicayasambojjhango — pe — nibbiinaya sam- vattati.
3) Viriyasambojjharigo — pe — nibbaniiya samvattati.
4) Pitisarabojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
5) Passaddhisambojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
6) Samiidhisambojjhango — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati.
7) TJpekhasambojjharigo — pe — nibbiiniiya samvattati. Ime kho Kassapa satta boj jhangii maya sammiidakkhiita
bhavita bahulikata abhiiiuaya sambodhiiya nibbiiniiya sam- vattanti ti.
* Taggha, Bhagava, bojjhangii, taggha, Sugata, bojjhariga ti.'
Idam avoca Bhagavii : — attamano iiyasmii Mahiikassapo Bhagavato bhiisitam abhinandi.
Yutthahi cayasmii Mahiikassapo tamhii iibiidha tatha pablno c&yasmato Mahiikassapassa so abiidho ahositi.
MAHAKASSAPATTHERABOJJHANGAM.
The Mahdmoggalldnaithera hojjhahgam and the Mahd- eundatthera hojjhahgam agree with the preceding sutta in all but the name.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagava Siivatthiyam viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Tena kho pana samayena iiyasmii Girimiinando iibiidhiko hoti dukkhito biilhagihlno. Atha kho iiyasmii Anando yena Bhagavii ten* upasamkami upasamkamitvii Bhagavantam abhiviidetvti ekamantam nisldi ekamantam nisinno kho iiyasma Anando Bhagavantam etad avoca :
98 GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
Ayasma, bhante, Girimjinando abjidhiko dukkhito bajhagi- lano. Sjidhu bhante Bhagava ; yen* ayasma Girimanando ten' upasaiikaraatu anukamparn upjiday&ti.
Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno upasankamitvii dasa sanfia bhaseyyasi. Thiinara kho pan' etam vijjati yam Girimiinandassa bhikkbuno dasa sanna sutvii so abildho thiiaaso patippassambheyya.
Katame dasa sannii ?
" Aniccasafina, anattasanna, asubhasannii, adinavasanna, pahanasanila, viragasannii, nirodhasanfiii, sabbaloke anabhi- rati sanna, sabbasahkhiiresu aniccasanna, anapanasati."
Katama ca Ananda aniccasaiii'ia ?
" Idh' Ananda bhikkhu, arafinagato va rukkhamulagato va sunnagjiragato vii iti patisancikkhati : —
Rfipam aniccara, vedanii anicca, sanna anicca, sahkharii anicca, vinnanam aniccan ti. Iti imesu paiicas' upiida- nakkhandhesu aniccanupassi viharati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda aniccasanna. || 1 1|
Katama ca Ananda anattasanna ?
Idh' Ananda — pe — patisancikkhati : —
Cakkhum anatta, rupam anatta, sotara anatta, jivha anatta, rasa anatta, kayo anatta, photthabba anatta, mano anatta, dhamraii anattii ti.
Iti ime cbasu ajjhattika-bahiresu iiyatanesu anattanupassi viharati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda anattasanna. ||2||
Katama ca Ananda asubhasannji? Idh* Ananda bhikkhu imam eva kiiyam uddham pjidatalii, adho kesamatthakii taca- pariyantam puram nanappakiirassa asucino paccavekkhati.
Atthi imasmim kjlye : kesa — pe — matthalungan ti. (See page 82).
Iti imasmim kaye asubh&nupassl viharati. Ayam vuccat* Ananda asubhasanna. i| 3 1|
Katama ca Ananda adlnavasafiria ? Idh' Ananda — pe — patisancikkhati.
GIRIMANANDASUTTA. 99
Bahu dukkho kho ayam kiiyo, bahu udlnavo iti imasmim kaje vividha iibadhji uppajjanti seyyathidain : —
Cakkhurogo, sotarogo, ghiinarogo, jivhiirogo, kiiyarogo, sisarogo, kannarogo, mukharogo, dantarogo, kuso, siiso, piniiso, daho, jaro, kucchirogo, mucchu, pakkhandika, sulo, visQcikii, kuttham, gando, kiliiso, soso, apam;iro, daddu, kandu, kacchura-khasii, vitacchika, lohitara, pittam, madhu- meho, amsa, pilaka, bhagandala, pitta-samutthana-abadha, semha-samutthana-abadha, vata-samutthana-abadha, sanni- patikii-abadhii, utu-viparinamaja-abadha, visama-pariharajii- abiidha, opaka-abadha, kammavipilka-abadha, sitam, unbam, jigbaccha, pipasa, uccaro, passiivo.
Iti imasmim kiiye adinavanupassi vibarati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda, adlaavasauua. || 4 1|
Katama ca Ananda pabanasanna ? Idb' Ananda bbikkbu uppannam kama-vitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati, viuodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam byapildavitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati vinodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam vihimsavitakkam nadbivaseti pajabati vino- deti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Uppannam uppanne papake akusale dbamme nidbiviiseti pajabati vinodeti byantikaroti anabbavam gameti.
Ayam vuccat* Ananda pabanasaniia. ||5||
Katama c' Ananda viragasanua ?
Idb' Ananda bbikku — pe — patisancikkbati.
Etam. santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbara- samatbo sabbClpadbi patinissago tanbakkbayo virago nibba- ^an tL
Ayam vuccat* Ananda viragasanna. ||6||
Katama ca Ananda nirodbasanna ? Idb* Ananda bbikkbu — pe — patisancikkbati : Etam santam etam panltam yadidam sabbasankbiirasamatbo 8abb(^padbi patinissaggo tanbakkbayo nirodbo nibbanan ti. Ayam vuccat' Ananda nirodbasanila. |j 7 1|
100 GIRIMANANDASUTTA.
Katamii c' Ananda sabbaloke anabhiratisafinii ?
Idh* Ananda bhikkhu ye loke upayupiidana cetaso adhitthan&bhinivesdnusayil te pajahanto viramati na upadi- yanto. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabba loke anabhirati sauna, 1| 8 1|
Katama c' Ananda sabbasankharesu aniccasafifia ?
Idh' Ananda bhikkhu sabbasankharesu atthiyati harayati jigucchati. Ayam vuccat' Ananda sabbasankharesu anicca- sauua. II 9 II
Katatnii c' Ananda anjipiinasati ?
Idh' Ananda bhikkhu arafinagato vu rukkhamiilagato va sunnagiiragato \a. nlsldati pallankam abhujitva ujum kayam panidhaya pariraukkham satim upatthapetva so sate va assasati sate passasati:
Digham va assasanto digham assasamiti pajiiniiti.
Digham vji passanto digham passasiimiti pajanati.
Rassam va assasanto rassam assasamiti pajanati. Rassam va passasanto rassain passasiimiti pajanati.
Sabbakayam patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati. Sabbakayam patisamvedl passasissainiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam kayasankharam assasissiimiti sikkhati. Passambhayam kayasankharam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Piti-patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati. Piti-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Sukha- patisamvedl assasissiimiti sikkhati. Sukha-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Citta-sahkhiira-patisamvedi assasissiimiti sikkhati. Gitta-sahkhiira-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Passambhayam cittasahkhiiram assasissiimiti sikkhati. Passambhayam cittasankhiiram passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Citta-patisaravedl assasissamiti sikkhati. Oitta-patisamvedl passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Abhippamodayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati. Abhippamodayam cittam passasissiimiti sikkhati.
ATANATIYASUTTA. 101
Samjidayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati. Saniadayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
Vimocayam cittam assasissiimiti sikkhati. Viraocayam cittam passasissamiti sikkhati.
AniccanupassT assasissiimiti sikkhati. AniccanupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.
ViriiganupassI assasissiimiti sikkhati. ViriiganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati.
Nirodhanupassi assasissiimiti sikkhati. NirodhanupassI passasissamiti sikkhati.
PatinissagganupassT assasissamiti sikkhati. PatinissagganupassI passasissiimiti sikkhati. —
Ayam vuccat' Ananda aniipiiniisati. ||10|j
Sace kho tvam Ananda Girimiinandassa bhikkhum imii dasa saiiuii sutva so abadho thanaso patippassambheyyati.
Atha kho ayasma Anando Bhagavato santike imii dasa sarina uggahetvii : yen' ayasmii Girimanando ten' upasankami upasankamitvii ayasmato Girimanandassa ima dasa sauna abhiisi.
Atha kho iiyasmato Girimiinadassa imii dasa sanfiii sutva so abiidho thanaso patippassambhi.
Vutthahi cayasraii Girimanando tamhii iibiidhii tatha pahino ca panayasmato Girimanandassa so iibiidho ahositi. GIRIMANANDASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Riijagahe viharati Gijjhakiite pabbate. Atha kho cattiiro mahiiriijii mahatiyii ca Yakkha-seniiya mahatiyii ca Gandhabba-seniiya mahatiya ca Kumbhanda-seniiya mahatiyii ca Niiga-seniiya catuddisam rakkham thapetvii catuddisam gumbarn thapetvii catuddisam avaranam thapetvii abhikkantiiya rattiyii abhik-
102 ATANATIYASUTTA.
kautavannii kevalakappam Gijjhakutam obhasetva : yena Bhagava ten' upasankamimsu : upasankamitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekamantam nisldimsu. fj 1 1|
Te pi kho Yakkha app' ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce yena Bhagavata saddhim sammodimsu saramodanlyara katham saranlyam vltisaretva ekamantam nisldimsu; app' ekacce yena Bhagava ten' anjalim panametva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce niima gottam savetva ekamantam nisldimsu ; app' ekacce tunhlbhuta eka- mantam nisldimsu. ||2||
Ekamantam nisinno kho Vessavanno maharaja Bhaga- vantam etad avoca : —
Santi hi, bhante, ujarji Yakkhji Bhagavato appasanna: santi hi, bhante, uliinT Yakkha Bhagavato pasannii : santi hi, bhante, majjhima Yakkha appasanna : santi hi, bhante, majjhima Yakkha pasanna: santi hi, bhante, nica Yakkhji Bhagavato appasanna: santi hi, bhante, nIca Yakkha Bha- gavato pasanna. ||3||
Yebhuyyena kho pana bhante Yakkha appasanna yeva Bhagavato tam kissa hetu ?
"Bhagava hi, bhante, piinatipata veramaniya dhamraam deseti ; adinntidana veramaniya dhammam deseti ; kamesu micchacara veramaniya dhammam deseti ; musavada vera- maniya dhamraam deseti ; suramerayamajja-pamadatthanii veramaniya dhammam deseti." || 4 1|
"Yebhuyyena kho pana, bhante, Yakkha appativirata yeva panatipiitii, appativirata adinnudanii, appativirata kamesu micchaciira, appativirata musavjidii, appativirata sura- merayamajjapamadatthana, tesam tam hoti appiyam amana- pam."||5||^
"Santi hi bhante Bhagavato savakii arafiue vanapanthani panthani seniisanjini patisevanti appasaddani appanigghosani vijanavatani manussa-rahaseyyakani patisallana-siiruppani :
Tattha santi uliira Yakkha niviisino, ye imasmim Bhagavato pavacane appasanna. Tesam pasiidaya ugganhjitu, bhante, Bhagava Atanatiyam rakkham bhikkhunarn, bhikkhunlnam, upasakanam upjisikanam guttiyii rakkhjiya avihirasaya phasuviharay^ti." Adhivasesi Bhagava tunhlbhavena. Atha
ATANATIYASUTTA. 103
kho Yessavano raahjirajii Bhagavato adhiviisanara viditva tayam veliiyam imam Atiinatiyam rakkham abhasi : ||6||
Yipassissa nam' atthu cakkhumantassa sirlmato ! Sikkhissa pi nam' atthu sabba-bhutanukampino ! ||1||
Yessabhussa nam' atthu nahjitakassa tapassino !
Nam' atthu Kakusandhassa Milra-sena-pamaddino ! ||2||
Koniigamanassa nam* atthu brahmanassa vuslmato ! Kassapassa nam' atthu vippamuttassa sabbadhe ! || 3 1|
Anglrasassa nam' atthu Sakyaputtassa sirlmato !
Yo imam dhammam adesesi sabba-dukkha pan udunam! ||4||
Ye capi nibbuta loke yathabhutara vipassisum
Te jana apisuna ca mahanta vitasarada
Hitam devamanussanam yam naraassanti Gotamam
Yijjiicarana-sampannam mahantam vltasaradam. i|5||
Yato uggacchati suriyo adicco mandali mahai, Yassa c'uggacchamanassa samvarl pi nirujjhati, Yassa c'uggate suriye divaso ti pavuccati. ||6||
Rahado pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako Evara tarn tattha jiinanti samuddo saritodako Ito sa purimii disa iti nam acikkhati jano. ||7||
Yam disara abhipaleti mahjiraja yassasi so Gandhabbiinam adhipiiti Dhatarattho iti namaso E-amati naccagltehi Gandhabbehi purakkhato. || 8 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam Asltim dasa eko ca Indanama mahabbala. || 9 1|
Te ca pi Buddham disviina Buddham iidiccabandhunara Durato va naraassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||10||
Namo te puris&janfia ! namo te puris' uttama ! Kusalena samekkhesi amanussil pi tam vandanti ! Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasma evara vademase. II 1111
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinara vandjima Gotamam, Yijjacaranasampannara Buddham vandiima Gotamam! ||12j|
Yena Pefa pavuccanti pisunii pitthiraamsika Fanatipiitino ludda cora nekatika jana. II 13 1|
104' AT4NATIYASUTTA.
Ito sii dukkhinJI disa. iti nam iicikkhati jano Yam disam abhipilleti inaliiiraja yasasslso KurabhandJinam adhipati Virulho iti niima so Ramati naccagltehi Kurabhandehi pur' akkhuto. II 14 1|
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutain Asltim dasa eko ca Indanamit mahabbala || 15 |j
Te ca pi Buddhara disvana Buddhara iidicca baiidhunam Durato va namassanti mahantam vltasaradam. ||16||
Namo te purisajanna ! namo te puris' uttama ! Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti ! Sutain n' etam abhinhaso tasma evam vandemase. || 17 1|
Jinam vandatha Gotamam, jinam vandama Gotamam, Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandama Gotamam ! II 18 1
Yatha c' uggacchati suriyo adicco mandall maha Yassa c' uggaccbamanassa divaso pi nirujjhati Yassa coggate suriye samvariti pavuccati Kahado pi tattha gambhiro samuddo saritodako Evam tarn tattha jananti samuddo saritodako. || 19 1|
Ito sa pacchimji disii iti nam iicikkhati jano Yam disam abhipiileti mahjinlja yasassi so Nagiinam ca adhipati Viriipakkho iti niimaso Kamati naccagltehi Nagehi pur^kkhato. \\20\\
Puttii pi tassa bahavo eka nama ti me sutam Asltim dasa eko ca Indauilma mahabbala. I|21||
Te c&pi Buddham disvana Buddham adiccabandhunam Diirato va namassanti mahantam vitasilradam. || 22 1|
Namo te purisajanna, namo te puris* uttama Kusalena samekkhasi amanussii pi tarn vandanti Sutam n'etam abhinhaso tasmii evam vandemase ! II23II
Jinam vandatha Gotamam ! jinam vandiima Gotamam Vijjiicaranasampannam Buddham vandiima Gotamam ! Yena Uttara-kururammii Mahilmeril Sudassano Manussii tattha jiiyanti amamii apariggahii. ||24||
ATANATIYASUTTA. 105
IsTa te bljarn pavapanti na pi nlyanti nangala Akattha-pakimam siilim paribhunjanti manussa. I|25||
Akanam athusam suddham sugandham tandulapphalam Tundlklre pacitvana tato bhunjanti bhojanam. I|26||
Gavim ekakhuram katvii anuyanti diso disam Pasum ekakhuram katva anuyanti diso disam Itthi va vahanam katva anuyanti diso disam Purisavahanam katva anuyanti diso disam Kumarlvahanam katva anuyanti disa disam Kumaravahanam katva anuyanti diso disam. II 27 II
Te yane abhiruhitva sabbadisa anupariyanti pacara tassa
rajino Hatthi-yiinam assa-ytinam dibba-yanam upattbitam Pasada sivika c' eva maharajassa yassasi so Tassa ca nagarH ahu antalikkhe sumapita Atanata Kusinata Parakusinata Natapuriya Parakusita-
niitS. II 28 II
Uttarena Kuplvanto Janogbam aparena ca Navanavatiyo Ambara-ambaravatiyo Alakamanda nama rajadhanl. ||29|i
Kuverassa kho pana, marisa, mabarajassa Yisana nama
rajadhanl Tasma Kuvero maharaja Yessavano ti pavuccati. |j30||
Paccessanto pakasenti Tatola Tattala Tatotala Ojasi Tejasi Tatojasi Saroriija Arittho Nemi Rahado pi tattha DharanI niima yato megha pavassanti Vassa yato patayanti sabbapi tattha Bhagalavati nama Yattha Yakkha payirupasanti. ||31 1|
Tattha niccaphahT rukkha namii dijaganayuta Mayura-koucabhi ruda-kokiladlhi vaggubhi Jivara-jlvaka sadd' ettha, atho otthava-cittaka Kukutthaka kullrakii vane pokkharasataka. || 32 1|
Sukasalika-sadd' ettha, dandamanavakiini ca Sobhati sabbakalam sa Kuvera-nalini sada. 113311
106 ATANATIYASUTTA.
Ito sa uttam disa iti nam acikkhati jano, Yam disam abhipaleti mahiiraja yasassi so Yakkhiinam adhipati Kuvero iti niimaso Kamati nacca-gltehi Yakkhehi pur' akkhato. 1134 II
Putta pi tassa bahavo eka niima ti me sutam Asltim dasa eko ca Inda nama mahabbula. ||35||
Te capi Buddham disvana Buddham ildicca bandhunam Durato va namassanti mahantam vitasaradam. ||36||
Namo te puris' ajafiua, namo te puris' uttama
Kusalena saraekkhasi amanussa pi tarn vandanti
Sutam n* etam abhinhaso : tasma evam yandemase ! || 37 1
Jinam vandatba Gotamam ! Jinam vandama Gotamam ! Vijjacarana-sampannam Buddhain vandama Gotamam!
Ayaln klio sii, marisa, Atanatiya rakkha, bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnam upasakanam upasikanam guttiya, rakkhaya, avihirasaya, phiisu viharjiya ti. II 7 II
Yassa kassaci, marisa, bhikkhussa va bhikkhuniya va Tipjisakassa va upasikiiya v& : ayam Atanatiya rakkha sugga- bita bhavissati samatta pariyaputii tance amanusso Yakkho va Yakkhinl va Yakkhapotako va Yakkhapotika va Yakkha- mahamatto va Yakkhaparisajjo va Yakkhapacaro va II 8 II
Gandhabbo va GandhabbI vil — pe — II 9 II
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl va — pe — IIIOU
Nago vii Naglnl va — pe — II 11 II paduttheicitto gacchantam va anugaccheyya thitam va upatittheyya, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upanipajjeyya. II 12 II
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya giimesu va nigamesu va sakkarara va garukaram va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Alakamandaya raja- dhaniya vatthum va vasam va.
Nam eso, marisa, amanusso labheyya Yakkhanam samitim gantum. II 1311
Api 88U nam, marisa, amanussa anavayham pi nam kareyyum avivayham. Api ssu nam, marisa^ amanussa attahi
ATANATiyASUTTA. 107
pi paripunnahi paribhasiihi paribhaseyyura. Api ssu nam, miirisa, amanussa rittum pi pattam sise nikkujjeyyum Api ssu nam, marisa, amanussa sattadha pi assa muddham phiileyyum. ||14||
Santi hi, marisa, amanussa, candii, rudda, rabhasa, te n' eva maharajanara adiyanti ; na maharajanam purisakanam adi- yanti ; na maharajanam purisakanarn purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa, amanussa maharajanam avaruddha nama vuccanti, seyyathiipi marisa, ||15||
"raiino Magadhassa vijite cora : te n' eva ranno Magadhassa adiyanti ; na railiio Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti ; na raiino Magadhassa purisakanam adiyanti. Te kho te, marisa, mahacora pi ranno Magadhassa avaruddha nama vuccanti. Evam eva kho, marisa, santi hi amanussa canda, rudda, rabhasa : te n' eva maharajanam adiyanti ; na maharajanam, purisakanam adiyanti, na maharajanam purisakanam adi- yanti. Te kho 'te, marisa, amanussa avaruddha nama vuccanti. ||16||
Yo hi koci, marisa, amanusso Takkho va TakkhinI — pe-||17||
Gandhabbo va Gandhabbi — pe — || 18 1|
Kumbhando va Kumbhandl — pe — ||19||
Nago va Naglnl va — pe — || 20 1| padutthacitto bhikkhum va bhikkhunim va upasakam va upasikanam va gacchantam va anugaccheyya, thitam va upatittheyj'a, nisinnam va upanisldeyya, nipannam va upani- pajjeyya, imesam Yakkhanam Mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam mahasenapatlnam upajjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravi- tabbam: ||21||
Ayam Yakkho ganhati, ayam Yakkho avisati, ayam Yakkho hetheti, ayam Yakkho himsati, ayam Yakkho vihimsati, ayam Yakkho na muficatiti. || 22 1|
Katamesara Yakkhanam Mahayakkhanam sena-patinam, maha-seua-patlnam ?
Indo Somo Varuno ca Bharadvajo Pajjipati Cando Karaascttho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca Panado Opamauuo ca Devasuto ca Matali
108 ATAXATIYASUTTA.
Cittaseno ca Oandhabbo Nalarujii Janesabho Siitsigiro Ilemavato Punnako Karatiyo Gulo Sivako Mucalindo ca Vessaraitto Yugandharo Gopjilo Suppagedho ca Ilirl NettI ca Mandiyo Pancalacando Alavako Pajjuno Sumano Sumukho Dadhimukho Mani Miiaicaro Digho Atho Serissako saha. II 23 II
Imesam YakkhJinam mahiiyakkhanam senapatlnam mahii- senapatlnam ujjhapetabbam vikkanditabbam viravitabbara Ayam Yakkho ganhiiti — pe — na rauncatiti. ||24||
Ayam kho sii, marisa, AtiinJitiyii rakkhii bhikkhunara bhikkhunlnain upasakanam upasikiinara guttiya rakkhaya avihimstiya phiisuviharayjiti. II 25 II
Handa ca' diini mayam marisa gaccbiima bahukicca mayam bahukaranlyati. ||26||
Yassa diini tumhe maharjijjino killara maririathElti. II27II
Atha kho cattaro mahiirajaao utthayslsana, Bhagavantam abhivadetva padakkhinam katva tatth' ev' antaradha- yimsu. I|28||
Te pi kho Yakkha utthjiyasanji app ekacce Bhagavantam abhivadetva padakkhinam katvii tatth' ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App* ekacce Bhagavata saddhira sammodimsu sammodani- yam katham sariinlyara vltisiiretvii tath ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App' ekacce yena Bhagava, ten' aftjalim panametvii tatth' ev' antaradhiiyimsu.
App' ekacce nilma gottain siivetvii tatth* ev' antaradhayiinsu.
App' ekacce tunhlbhOta tatth' ev' antaradhayimsQti. 1129 j|
" TJgganhJItha, bhikkhave, AtanJitiyam rakkham ! Pariya- punatha, bhikkhave Atiinatiyam rakkham ! Dharetha, bhi- kkhave, Atanatiyam rakkhain ! Atthasamhitiiya, bhikkhave, Atanatiya rakkha bhikkhunam bhikkhunlnain upasakanam upasikiinam guttiya rakkhaya avihimsaya phasu vilijirjiyati.
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandun ti. II 30 II
ATANATIYASUTTAM.
DHAMMACAKKA. 109
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam saraayara Bhagavii Baranasiyam viharati Isipatane Migadaye. Tatra kho Bhagava panca- vaggiye bhikkhu iimantese: || 1 1|
"Dve 'me, bhikkhave, anta pabbajitena na sevitabbiii. Katarae dve?
*Yo c^yam kjimesu kiimasukhallikanuyogo hino gammo pothujjaniko anariyo anatthasamhito ; yocayam atta-kilama- th&nuyogodukkhoanariyoanatthasamhito; — etekhobhikkhave ubho ante anupagamma majjhima patipadii Tathagatena abhisarabuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi- fiuiiya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati.' ||2 1|
Katamii ca sa bhikkhave majjhima patipada Tathagatena abhisambuddha cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhi- nniiya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati ?
" Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo, seyyathidam : Sam- maditthi, saramasankappo, sammaviica, sammiikammanto, Bammiiajlvo sammiivayamo, sammilsati, sammiisamadhi. ||3||
Ayam kho sii, bhikkhave, majjhima patipada Tathagatena abhisambuddhji cakkhukarani nanakarani upasamaya abhifi- naya sambodhaya nibbanaya samvattati. ||3||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhara ariyasaccam : jati pi dukkhii, jara pi dukkha, vyadhi pi dukkha, maranam pi dukkham, appiyehi sampayogo dukkho, piyehi vippayogo dukkho, yam pi icchara na labhati tam pi dukkham — sankhittena pane' upiidanakkhandha dukkha. ||4||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhasamudayam ariya- saccam: yjiyam tanhaponobbhavikii nandi-riiga-sahagata tatra tatrabhinandini, seyyathidam : Kamatanha,bhavatanha, vibha- vatanha. ||5||
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam, yo tassa yeva tanhaya asesa-viriiga-nirodho cago patinissago mutti analayo. ||t>||
110 DHAMMACAKKA.
Idam kho pana, bhikkhave, dukkhanirodhagilminl pati- pada ariyasaccam.
Ayam eva ariyo atthangiko maggo : seyyathidam samraa- ditthi — pe — sammiisaraadhi. || 7 II
Idam dukkhara ariyasaccan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhamraesu cakkhura udapiidi, ilii- nam udapiidi, pafinu udapadi, vijjii udapadi, aloko udapadi. i|8||
Tam kho pan' idam dukkham ariyasaccam parifiiieyan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu — pe — parinnutan ti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhum udapiidi, niinam udapiidi, panfla udapiidi, vijja udapiidi, aloko udapiidi. ||9||
Idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam ti me, bhikkhave,
— pe — aloko udapiidi. ||10||
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhasamudayara ariyasaccam pahiitabban ti me bhikkhave — pe — pahlnan ti me bhi- kkhave — pe — iiloko udapiidi. ||11||
Idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam ti me bhikkhave
— pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 12 1|
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhanirodham ariyasaccam sacchi- katabban ti me bhikkhave, — la — sacchikatan ti me, bhi- kkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 13 1|
Idam dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii ariyasaccan ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. || 14 1|
Tam kho pan' idam dukkhanirodhagiimini patipadii ariyasaccan bhavetabban ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — bhiivitan ti me, bhikkhave, — pe — iiloko udapiidi. ||15||
Yiiva klvafica me, bhikkhave, iraesu catusu ariyasaccesu evam ti-parivattara dviidasii-kiiram yathiibhutam niinadassa- nam na suvisuddham ahosi : n'eva tavaham bhikkhave sadevake loke samiirake sabrahmake, sassamanabriihmaniyii pajiiya sadevamanussiiya anuttaram sammiisambodhim abhi- sambuddho paccafifiilsim. ||16||
Yato ca kho me, bhikkhave, imesu catusu ariyasaccesu evam tiparivattara dviidasiikiiram yathiibhiitara fiiinadassanam suvisuddham ahosi, athaham, bhikkhave, sadevake loke sama- rake sabrahmake sassamanabrahmanlyii pajiiya sadevama-
DHAMMACAKKA. HI
nussiiya anuttaram sammusambodhim abhisambuddbo ti paccannasim. 111711
Nanauca pana me dassanam adapadi : * Akuppa me ceto-vimutti, ayam antimu jati, n'atthi dani punabbhavo ti/ II 18 II
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana pancavaggiya bhikkbu Bhagavato bhasitam abhinandanti. || 19 1|
Imasmim ca pana veyyakaranasmim bbanfiamane ayasraato Kondannassa virajam vltaraalam dhammacakkhum udapildi : * Yam kinci samudaya-dhammam sabbam tarn nirodha- dhamraanti.' ||20||
Pavattite ca pana Bhagavata dhammacakke Bbumma deva saddam anussavesum : * Evam Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isi- patane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam, appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va Marena va Brahmuna va kenaci lokasmin ti.' I|21||
Bhummanam devanam saddam sutva Catumaharajika deva saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||22 1|
Catumaharajikanam devanam saddam sutva, Tavatimsa deva saddam anussavesum — pe — . ||23||
Yam a deva — pe — . ||24||
TusitJi devji — pe— . ||25|j
Nimmanarati deva — pe — . ||26||
Paranimmitavasavattino deva — pe — . ||27||
Brahmaparisajja deva — pe — . ||28||
Brahmapurohita deva — pe — . ||29|j
Mahiibrahraa deva — pe — . || 30 1|
Parittabha deva — pe — . || 31 |j
Appamanabha deva — pe — . ||32li
Abhassara deva — pe — . || 33 1|
Parittasubha deva — pe — . ||34||
Appamanasubha deva — pe — . || 35 li
Subhakinnii deva — pe — . I|36||
Vehapphala deva — pe — . || 37 II
Asannasatta deva — pe — . || 38 1|
Avihti deva — pe — . || 39 1|
Attappa deva — pe — . ||40|(
Sudaasa deva — pe — . ||41 1|
112 MAIIASAMAYASUTTA.
SudassT devil — pe — . ||42|| Akanitthii deva — pe — . ||43||
Evam Bhagavata Biiranasiyam Isipatane Migadiiye anutta- ram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena vii brjihraanena vji devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vii kenaci vii lokasmin ti. || 44 1|
Iti ha tena khanena tena layena tena rauhuttena yiiva Brahmalokii saddo abbhuggafichi, ayanca kho dasasahassi- lokadhiitu sahkampi, sarapakarapi, sampavedhi ; appainiino ca uliiro obhiiso loke piiturahosi atikkamma deviinam devanu- bbiivan ti. ||45||
Atha kho Bhagavii udiinam udiinesi : "Anniisi vata bho Kondafino, afifiiisi vata bho Kondanno ti." ||46||
Iti hi' dara iiyasmato Kondanfiassa Aiiniitakondarifio tv eva namam ahosi. ||47i|
DHAMMACAKKAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu- sarighena saddhira paficamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyeua sanni- patita honti, Bhagavantam dassaniiya bhikkhusanghanca. || 1 1|
Atha kho catunnam Suddh&viisa-kiiyikauam devanam etad ahosi : —
" Ayarn kho Bhagavii Sakkesu viharati Kapilavatthusmim mahiivane mahatii bhikkhu-sanghena saddhim paficamattehi bhikkhusatehi sabbeh' eva arahantehi, dasahi ca lokadhiitiihi devatii yebhuyyena sannipatitii honti, Bhagavantam dassa- naya bhikkhu-sanghafica. Yan niina mayam pi yena Bha- gavii ten' upasasankameyyiima, upasankamitvii Bhagavato santike paccekam giitham bhiiseyyiimati." || 2 1|
Atha kho tii devata seyyathiipi niima balavii puriso
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 113
samminjitam va baham pasareyya pasaritara va baham samminjeyya evam evam kho Suddhslvasesu devesu antara- hita Bhagavato purato paturahamsu. ||3||
Atha kho ta devatii Bhagavantam abhivadetvji ekam- antam attharasu : ekamantam thitii kho eka devatii Bhaga- vato santike imam gatham abhasi :
" Mahasaraayo pavanasmim deva-kaya samagata ! AgatamhcT imam dhammasamayam dakkhitaye aparajitasanghan" ti. || 1 1|
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham abhasi :
" Tatra bhikkhavo samadahamsu cittam attano ujukam akamsu Sarathi va nettiini gahetva
indriyani rakkhanti pandita " ti. ||2||
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam gatham abhasi :
" Chetva khilam chetva paligham indakhllam uhaccam aneja Te caranti suddha vimala cakkhumata sudanta susunag^" ti. ||3||
Atha kho apara devata Bhagavato santike imam giitham abhasi :
" Ye keci buddhara saranam gatase na te gamissanti apayam Pahaya manusam deham devakayam paripuressanti " ti. || 4 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi :
" Yebhuyyena, bhikkhave, dasasu lokadhjitusu devata sannipatita Tathagatam dassanaya bhikkhu sahghanca. Ye pi te, bhikkhave, ahesum atitain addhanam arahanto samma- sambuddha, tesara pi Bhagavantiinam ete paramii yeva devata sannipatita ahesum, seyyatha pi mayham etarahi. Ye pi to, bhikkhave, bhavissanti aniigatara addhanam arahanto samma- sambuddha, tesam pi Bhagavantanam ete parama yeva
8
114 MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
devata sannipatita bbavissanti, seyyatha pi mayham eta- rahi." II 5 II
" AcikkhissJimi, bhikkhave devakJiyJinara niimani, kitta- ylssami, bhikkhave, devakayjinam niimani, desissiitni, bhi- kkhave, dcvakayjinam niimani. Tarn suniitha, sildhukam manasikarotha bhiisissjimiti. ||6||
" Evara bhante ! " ti. Te bhikkhn Bhagavato paccasso- sum. BhagavcT etad avoca: ||7||
** Silokam anukassiimi, yathii bhummii tad assita Ye sitii girfgabbharam pahitattti samahitii Puthu sihii va salllnii lomaharasabhisambhuno Odiita manasti saddhil vippassanara aniivila Bhiyo pauca-sate iiatvii vane Kiipilavatthave. Ill ||
Tato iimantayi satthii siivake siisane rate : Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijaniitha bhikkhave ? Te ea atappam akarum sutvii Buddhassa siisanam Tesam piitur ahu nanam amanussilna dassanam. ||2||
App' eke satam addakkhum sahassam atha sattati Satam eke sahassiinain araanussiinam addarasu App eke 'nantam adakkhum disii sabba phutii ahu Tafica sabbam abhinfiiiya pavakkhitviina cakkhumii Tato amantayi satthii siivake siisane rate : Devakiiyii abhikkantii te vijiiniitha bhikkhave ? Ye vo 'ham kittayissiimi giriihi anupubbaso. || 3 1|
Sattasahassii Yakkhii ea bhummii Kiipilavatthavii Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamiinii abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va- nam. ||4||
Cha sahassii Hemavatii Yakkhii niinatta-vannino Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamiinii abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va- naro. 1)5 1|
Satagirii ti-sahassil Yakkhii — pe — . ||6||
Ice ete solasa sahassa Yakkhii — pe — . ||7||
Vessamittil paflca satii Yakkhii — po — . || 8 II
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. Hg
Kumbhiro Riijagahiko Vepullassa nivesanam, Bhiyo nam satasahassam Yakkliunara payirupasati, Kumbhiro Rajagahiko so p' iiga samitim vanara. ||9||
Puriraaiica disam riijii Dhatarattho tam pasiisati Gandhabbiinarn adhipati mahariijii yasassi so. Puttii pi tassa bahavo indanama mahabbala Iddhimanto jutimanto vannavanto yasassino Modamana abhikkamum bhikkhunam samitim va- nam. moil
Dakkhinanca disam raja Virulho tam pasiisati Kumbhandanam adhipati maharaja yasassi so Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 11 II
Pacchimanca disam raja VirOpakkho tam pasiisati Niigiinauca adhipati mahiiriijii yasassi so. Putta pi tassa — pe — . II 12 1|
Uttarafica disam riija Kuvero tam pasiisati Yakkhanain adhipati mahariija yasassi so Putta pi tassa — pe — . || 13 il
Purimam disam Dhatarattho, dakkhinena Virulhako Pacchimena Virupakkho, Kuvero uttaram disam Cattaro te maharaja samantii caturo disa Daddallamana attharasu vane Kiipilavatthave. I|14||
Tesam mayiivino dasii agu vancanika sathii Maya Kutendu Vetendu Vitucca Yitucco saha Candano Kamasettho ca Kinnughandu Nighandu ca Paniido Opamanrio ca devasuto ca Miitali Citta-Seno ca Gandhabbo Nalaraja Janesabho Agum Pancasikho ceva Timbaru Suriyavaccasa Ete c' aiine ca riijiino Gandhabbii saha riijubhi ModamiiDa abhikkiimum bhikkhunam samitim va- nam. II15II
Ath^gu Niibhasii Naga Yesala saha Tacchaka Kambalassatara iigu Payiigii saha niitibhi, Yilmunii Dharattha ca iigu Niigii yasassino Eriivano Mahauilgo so p' iigu samitim vanam. II 16 j|
116 MAHASAMAYASUTTA.
Ye nagaraje sahasa haranti
dibba dvijii pakkhi visuddhacakkhu
vehasaya te vana-majjlia-pattii
Citta Supanna iti tesam naraam
abhayam tadii Nagarajanam asi
Supannato khemara akasi Buddho
Sanhiihi viicJihi upavhayanta
NagcT Supanna saranam againsu Buddham. ||171l
Jita vajira-hatthena samuddara asiira sita. Bhataro Vasavas* ete iddhimanto yasassino. Kiilakanja mahahimsa asura Danaveghasa Vepacitti Sucitti ca Paharado Namuci saha Satafica Baliputtanam sabbe verocanamaka Sannayhitva balim senam Rahubhaddam upagaraum Samayo dani, bhadante, bhikkhunam samitim va- nam. ||18|(
Apo ca deva Pathavl Tejo Yayo tad agamum Varuna Varuna deva Somo ca Yasasii saha Mettakaruna-kayika agu deva yasassino Das' ete dasadhakayii sabbe nanatta-vannino Idhiraanto — pe — samitim vanam II 19 II
Venhu ca deva Sahall ca Asama ca duve Yama Candass* upanissii deva candam agu purakkhatvii Suriyass* upanissa deva suriyam agu purakkhatva Nakkhattani purakkhatva ilgu mandavalahaka Vasunam Yasavo settho Sakko p' iigu Purindado Das' ete dasadbakaya sabbe nanatta-vannino Iddhimanto — pe — samitim vanam. II 20 II
Ath' iigu Sahabhu deva jalam aggi sikhii-r-iva Aritthaka ca Roja ca Umraa-puppha-nibhiisino ; Yaruna saha Dhammii ca Accutii ca Anejaka Suleyya Pucirii agu, iigu Yasavanesino Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 21 II
Samanii Mahasamanii Miinusainanusuttama Khiddapadusika agu, iigu Manupadusikii
MAHASAMAYASUTTA. 117
Ath&gu Harayo devii ye ca Lohitavasino
Piiragii Mahiiparagii iigu deva yasassino
Das *ete dasadhii kiiyii — pe — saraitim vanam. || 22 II
Sukhii Karumha Arunii agu Yeghanasa saha Odatagayhii Pamokkha agu deva Vicakkhana Sadiimatta Haragaja Missaka ca yasassino Thanayara agu Pajjunno yo disa abhivassati : Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 23 II
Khemlyii Tusita Yiiraa Katthakii ca yasassino Larabitakii Liimasettha Joti nama ca Asava Nimmanaratino agu ath' agu Paranimmita Das' ete dasadha kaya — pe — samitim vanam. II 24 II
Satth' ete deva-nikaya sabbe nanatta-vannino Nama-dvayena aganchum ye c' aniie sadisa saha :
* Pamutthajjitim akhllara oghatinnam anasavam Dakkhem' oghataram Nagam candam va asitatigam.' II 25 II
Subrahma Paramatto ca putta iddhimato saha
Sanam kumaro Tisso ca so p' agu samitim vanam. II 26 II
Sahassa Brahmalokanam Mahabrahma bhititthati Upapanno jutimanto bhismakayo yasassl so. II 27 II
Das' ettha issara agu pacceka-vasavattino ; Tesaiica majjhato agu Harito parivarito. II 28 II
Te ca sabbe abhikkante sa-Inda-deve sa-brahmake Marasena abhikkami : Passa kanhassa mandiyam. || 29 1|
* Ettha ganhatha bandhatha ragena bandham atthu ve Samanta parivaretha ma vo muficittha koci nam.' || 30 1|
Iti tattha mahaseno kanhasenam apesayi Panina talam ahacca saram katvana bheravam Yatha pavussako megho thanayanto savijjuko Tada so paccudavatti sankuddho asayam vasl. I|31||
Tauca sabbam abhinnaya pavakkhitvana cakkhumu Tato amantayi sattha siivake siisane rate : Marasena abhikkantu te vijanatha bhikkhavo P
118 ALAVAKASUMTA.
Te ca atappam akalrum sutvii Buddhassa sasanam. Yitariigeh' apakkamum na sam lomam pi iujayum. || 32 1|
Sabbe vijita sarigamii-bhay&bhita yasassino Modanti saha bhutehi suvaku te jane sutati. i|33||
MAHASAMAYASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDHASSA.
Evam me sutara : Ekam saraayam Bhagava Alaviyam viharati Alavakassa Yakkhassa bhavane. Atha kho Alavako Yakkho yena Bhagava ten' upasahkami upasankamitva Bha- ga van tarn etad avoca :
" Nikkhama samanH " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samani " ti.
" * Sadh&vuso ' " ti. Bhagavii pavisi.
Dutiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca : *' Nikkhama samana " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkliami.
" Pavisa samana " ti.
" 'Sadhavuso * " ti. Bhagava pavisi.
Tatiyam pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca: " Nikkhama samana " ti.
" * Sadhavuso ' " ti. Bhagava nikkhami.
" Pavisa samanaL " ti.
" ' Sadhavuso * ** ti. Bhagava pavisi.
Catutthara pi kho Alavako yakkho Bhagavantam etad avoca : " Nikkhama samana " ti.
" 'Na kho pan&ham avuso nikkhamissiimi. Yan te karanl- yam tarn karohi * " ti.
"Paiihara tam samana pucchissami. Sace me na bya- karissasi, cittam va te khipissami, hadayain va te phalessami, padesu va gahetva param Gangaya khipissami ti."
AI.AVAKASUTTA. 119
" 'Na khviiham tain, avuso, passilmi sadevake loke, sama- rake, sabrahmake, sassaraana bruhmaniya pajiiya sadevama- nussjiya, yo me cittam vii khipeyya, hadayara vii phaleyya, padesu vii gahetvji pjiram Gangiiya khipeyya. Api ca tvam avuso puccha yadu kankhasi ' " ti.
"Xim sMha vittam purisassa settham? kimsu sucinno sukham avahati ? Kimsu have siidhutaram rasaaam ? katham jivim jivitam ahu setthan ? " ti. || 1 1|
" * Saddh' idha vittam purisassa settham, dhammo sucinno sukham avahati, Saecam have sadhutaram rasanam, parina jIvim jivitam ahu setthan'" ti. ||2||
" Kathamsu tarati ogham ? kathain tarati annavam ? Kathamsu dukkham acceti ? kathamsu parisujjha- titi?"||3||
" * Saddhaya tarati ogham, appamadena annavam,
Viriyena dukkham acceti, pafinaya parisujjhati. ' " ||4||
" Kathamsu labhate patinam ? kathamsu vindate dhanam? Kathamsu kittim pappoti? katham mittani gantheti ? Asma loka param lokam katham pecca na socati ? " || 5 1|
" ' Saddahauo arahatam dhammam nibbanapattiya Sussusam labhate parliiam appamatto vicakkhano. Patirupakarl dhurava vutthata vindate dhanam Saccena kittim pappoti dadam mittani ganthati, Asmii loka param lokain evam pecca na socati. Yass' ete caturo dhammil saddhassa gharamesino Saecam dhammo dhiti cago sa ve pecca na socati. Ingha anne pucchassu puthu samanabriihmane Yadi sacca dama caga khanty&bhiyyo' dha vijjati. ' " ||6|I
" Katham nu dani puccheyyam puthu samanabriihmane Sv4ham ajja pajanami so attho saraparayiko. Atthaya vata mo Buddho viisayalavim itgato
120 PARABHAVASUTTA.
Yo* ham ajja pajanami yattha dinnam roahapphalam So aham vicarissami giirailgamam purapurara Naraassaraano sambuddham dhammassa ca sudham- matan" ti. II7II
ALAVAKASUTTAM.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagavii Savatthiyara viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa ariime. Atha kho ailfia- tara devata abhikkantaya rattiya abhikkantavannii kevala- kappam Jetavanam obhiisetva, yena Bhagava ten* upa- sankami upasahkaraitva Bhagavantam abhiviidetvii ekaman- tani atthasi, ekamantara thita kho sa devata Bhagavantam gathaya ajjhabhasi.
** Parabhavantam purisam mayam pucchiima Gotaraarn Bhagavantam putthum iigamma kim parabhavato mukham?" ||i||
** * Suvijiino bhavam hoti, suvijano parjlbhavo
Dhammakamo bhavam hoti, dhammadessi parabha-
vo.'"||2||
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : pathamo so pariibhavo Dutiyam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu-
kham?"||3||
" * Asant* assa piyji honti, sante na kurute piyam
asantam dhammam roceti tam parabhavato mu- kham.'" II 4 II *
"Iti h' etam vijjinaraa : dutiyo so pariibhavo tatiyam Bhagava bruhi: kim parabhavato mukham?" || 5 1|
" * Niddasill sahJisTli anutthatii ca yo naro
alaso kodhapannjito, tam parabhavato mukham.' " ||6||
" Iti h' etam vijaniiraa : tatiyo so pariibhavo catuttham Bhagavii bruhi : kim pariibhavato mu- kham?" 1I7||
rARABHAVASUTTA. 121
" * Yo miltaram vii pitaram va jinnakaip gata-yobbanam pahusanto na bharati, tarn pariibhavato mukham.*" ||8||
" Iti h* etam vijaniiraa : catuttho so parabhavo paucamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- kham?" |!9||
" ' Yo brahraanam va samanam va annam va pi vanibba- kam rausavadena vaBceti, tam parabhavato raukham.' " || 10 1|
" Iti h' etam vijanama : paiicamo so parabhavo chattham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- "kham?" 1|11|| " * PahQvitto puriso sa-hiranno sa-bhojano
eko bhufijati sadhuni, tam parabhavato mukhara.' " ||12||
** Iti h' etam vijanama : chattho so parabhavo sattamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- kham?"||13||
" * Jatitthaddho, dhanatthaddho, gottatthaddho ca yo naro tam iiatim atimafineti, tam parabhavato mukham.' " I|14||
" Iti h' etam vijanama : sattamo so parabhavo Attham Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mukham ? " ||15I|
" ' Itthidhutto, suradhutto, akkhadhutto ca yo naro
laddham laddhara vinaseti, tam parabhavato mu- kham.'" ||16*l|
" Iti h' etam vijanama : atthamo so parabhavo navamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- kham?" || 17 1|
* " Sehi darehi santuttho vesiya upadissati
dissati paradaresu, tam parabhavato mukham.*" ||18||
" Iti h' etam vijanamo : navamo so parabhavo dasamam Bhagava bruhi : kim parabhavato mu- kham?" || 19 1|
** * Atlta-yobbano poso aneti timbarutthanim
tassa issa na supati, tam parabhavato mukham.'" ||20||
122 VASALASUTTA.
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : dasamo so parabhavo ekiidasamam Bhagavu briihi : kim parjibhavato mu- kham?"||21||
" * Itthl-sondim vikiranim purisara vJi pi tadisam
issariyasmim thiipeti tarn pariibhavato mukham.' " ||22||
" Iti h' etam vijaniima : ekiidasamo so parabhavo dvadasamarn Bhagava briihi: kirn pariibhavato mu- kham ?" |l 23 1|
'* ' Appabhogo raahiitanho khattiye jiiyate kule
so 'dha rajjam patthayati : tam pariibhavato mu- kham.'" || 24 1|
*' * Ete pariibhave loke pandito samavekkhiya
ariyo dassana-sarapatto salokam bhajate sivau'" ti. ||25||
PARABHAVASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AUAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evarn me sutam : Ekara samayara Bhagava Siivatthiyam viharati Jetavane Aniithapindikassa iiriime. Atha kko Bhagava pubbanha samayara nivasetvii pattaclvaram iidiij'a Siivatthiyam pindiiya piivisi. Tena kho pand saraayena Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesane aggi pajjalito hoti iihuti paggahitii. || 1 1|
Atha kho Bhagavii Siivatthiyam sapadiinam pindiiya cara- mano, yena Aggika-Bhiiradviijassa briihmanassa nivesanam, ten' uppasankami. ||2|| Addasii kho Aggika-Bhiiradviijo briihmano Bhagavantam dilrato agacchantara disviiua Bha- gavantam etad avoca :
" Tatr' eva mundaka, tatr' eva samanaka, tatr' eva vasalaka titthiThi ti." || 3 1|
Evam vutte Bhagava Aggika-Bhiiradviijam briihraanam etad avoca :
VASALASUTTA. 123
" * Junilsi pana tvam briihmana, vasalam va vasala-karane va dhamrae ti.' " ||4||
"Na khvaham, bho Gotaraa, janjimi vasalam va vasala- karane vii dhamme ti. Sadhu me bhavam Gotamo tatha dhammara desetu : yathaham janeyyam vasalam va vasala- karane va dhamme ti."
" * Tena hi, brahraana, sunahi siidhukam manasikarohi bhasissami ti.' " || 5 (I
"Evam bho" ti kho Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmauo Bha- gavato paccassosi. Bhagava etad avoca : || 6 11
Xodhano upanahl ca papamakkhi ca yo naro vipannaditthi mayavl, tarn jafina vasalo iti. II 1 II
Ekajam va dijam va pi yo 'dha panani himsati. yassa pane daya n'atthi, tarn jaiifia vasalo iti. ||2||
Yo hanti parirundhati giimani nigamani ca niggahako samannato, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||3||
Game va yadi varanfie yam paresam mamayitam theyya adinnam adiyati, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||4||
Yo have inara adiiya vuccamano palayati
na hi te inam atthiti, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||5||
Yo ve kincikkha-kamyata panthasmim vajatam janam hantva kincikkham adeti, tarn janiia vasalo iti. ||6||
Yo attahetu parahetu dhanahetu ca yo naro sakkhiputtho musabruti, tarn jaiina vasalo iti. ||7||
Yo natinam sakhanam va daresu patidissati sahasa sampiyena va, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||8||
Yo mataram vii pitaram va jinnakam gatayobbanam pahusanto na bharati, tarn janna vasalo iti. ||9 1|
Yo mataram va pitaram va bhiitaram va bhaginim sassum hanti roseti va, tam janna vasalo iti. || 10 1|
Yo attham pucchito santo anattham anusiisati. paticchantena manteti, tam janna vasalo iti. || 1111
124 VASALASUTTA.
Yo katvii piipalcam karamam * mji mam jafifiil ' ti icchati 80 paticchaiina-kammaiito, tarn junnii vasalo iti. ||12||
Yo ve parakulam gantva bhutvana sucibhojanam agatam na patlpujeti, tam jafifia vasalo iti. ||13||
Yo briibraanam vii samanain va anuam va pi vanibbakara musavadena vanceti, tarn jafifia vasalo iti. ||14||
Yo brahmanam va samanam va bbattakale upattbite roseti vaca na ca deti, tam janfia vasalo iti. ||15||
Asatam yo 'dba pabriiti mobena paliguntbite kincikkbam nijigimsano, tam janna vasalo iti. ||16||
Yo c'attanarn samukkamse parafica avajanati nibino sena manena, tain janna vasalo iti. || 17 1|
Rosako kadariyo ca papiccho maccbarl satbo abiriko anottapl, tain janfia vasalo iti. ||18(|
Yo buddbam paribhiisati atba va tassa savakam paribbajam gabattham. va, tam janna vasalo iti. ||19||
Yo ve anaraba santo, arabam patijiiniiti coro sabrabraake loke esa kbo vasaladbamo ! ete kbo vasala vutta may a vo ye pakasitii. || 20 1|
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca boti brabmano kammana vasalo boti, kammana boti brabmano. ||21||
Tadamina pi jantitba yatba me 'dam nidassanam : " CandJilaputto Sopiiko Miitango iti vissuto. ||22[| So yasam paramam patto Miitango yam sudullabbam agancbum tass'upatthanamkbattiya brahmanjibabu. H23|| So devayjinam iiruyha virajam so mabiipatbam kamaragam virajetva brabmalokupago iibu. ||24|| Na nam jiiti nivjiresi brabraalokQpapattiya, ajjbiiyakiikule jiita brahmanii mantabandbuno : || 25 1| Te ca papcsu kammesu abhinbain upadissare dittb 'eva dbamrae garayhii sampariiye ca duggatim na te jati nivareti duggacca garabaya va: " ||26||
kasIbharadvajasutta. 126
Na jacca vasalo hoti, na jacca hoti brahmano kammana vasalo hoti, kammana hoti brahmano. ||27||
Evam vutte Aggika-Bharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantain etad avoca :
" * Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam bho Gotama ! nikkujjitain va ukkujjeyya, paticchannarn va vivareyya, inu}hassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhinantiti : evam eva bhota Gotamanena aneka pariyayena dhamrao pakasito. Es^hain Bhagavantam Gotamam saranam gacchami dham- manca bhikkhusahghaiica ! Upasakam mam bhavam Gotamo dharetu, ajjatagge panupetam saranam gatan ti ' " ! || 7 li
VASALASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO AEAHATO SAMMA SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Magadhesu viharati Dakkhiniigirismiin Ekanalayam brahmanagiime. || 1 1| Tena kho pana samayena Kasibharadviijassa brahmanassa paiicamattani nangala-satiini payuttani honti vappakiile. ||2|| Atha kho Bhagava pubbanhasaraayam nivasetva patta-clva- ram adaya yena Kaslbhilradvajassa brahmanassa kammanto, ten' upasafikami. || 3 1| Tena kho pana samayena Kasibha- radviijassa brahmanassa parivesana vattati. ||4|| Atha kho Bhagava yena parivesanii ten' upasankami upasankamitva ekamantam atthasi. addasa kho Kasibharadvajo brahmano Bhagavantam etad avoca :
"Aham kho, samana, kasami ca vaparai ca, kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjami. Tvam pi samana kasassu ca vapassu kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjassu ti."
" * Aham pi kho, briihmana, kasiimi ca vapami ca kasitvii ca vapitva ca bhunjiimi ti.' "
" Na kho pana mayam passiima bhoto Gotamassa yugara vii nangalam vii phiilam va piicanam vu balivaddam vii."
126 kasTbharadvajasutta.
Atha ca pana bhavam Gotamo evain aha : —
" * Aham pi kho brahmana kasaini ca vapiitni ca kasitva
ca vapitva ca bhunjiiiniti.' "
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo briihraano Bhagavantam gathaya
ajjhabhiisi: \\b\\
" Kassako patijanasi na ca passama te kasim kasino pucchito bruhi, yatha janemu te kasim." || 1 1|
" * Saddha bijam, tapo vutthi, panfia me yuga-nangalara hirim Tsii, mano yottam, sati me phiilapaeanam. ||2|| Kiiyagutto vacTgutto iihare udare yato saccam karomi tiddtinam soraccam me pamocanam. ||3|| Viriyara me dhura-dhorayham yogakkhemadhivahanam gacchati ativattanam yattha gantvii na socati. ||4|| Evam esa kasi katthii sa hoti amatapphala etam kasim kasitvana sabbadukkba pamuccatiti.' " ||5||
Atha kho Kaslbharadviijo briihmano mahatiya kamsiipatiya payasam vaddhetva Bhagavato upanamesi :
" Bhunjatu bhavam Gatamo payasam ! Kassako bhavam, yamhi bhavam Gotamo amatapphalam kiisim kiisatiti." i| 6 1|
" * Gathabhigltam me abhojaneyyam sampassatam brahmana n' esa dhammo gathabhigltam panudanti buddhii dhamme sati, brahmana, vutti-r-esa.' " ||6||
" * Aiinena ca kevalinam mahesim khin&savam kukkuccavupasantara annena piiuena upatthahassu kbettam hi tain punnapekhassa hotiti/ " ||7||
" Atha kassa c&hara bho Gotama imam payitsam dammiti." *' ' Na khvaham tam, brahmana, passiirai sadevake loke samarake sabrahmake sassamanabriihraaniya pajiiya sadeva- manussaya, yassa so payaso bhutto sammii pariniimam gaccheyya, annatra Tathagatassa vii Tathiigatasiivakassa va : tena hi tvam, brahmana, tam payasam appaharite va chaddeti appjinake va udake opilapehiti. || 7 |j
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradvajo brahmano tam payasam appa-
SACCAVIBHANOA. 127
nake udake opililpesi. Atha kho so piiyaso udake pakkhitto ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhiipayati sampadhiipayati : seyya- thapi niima phiilo divasti santatto udake pakkhitto ciccitiiyati ciccitayati sandliupiiyati sampadhiipayati : evam eva so pjiyiiso udake pakkhitto ciccitayati ciccitiiyati sandhupiiyati sampadhiipayati. ||8||
Atha kho Kaslbhiiradviijo briihmano samviggo lomahattha- jiito yena Bhagavii ten' upasankami upasankamitva Bhaga- vato piidesu sirasii nipatitvii Bhagavantam etad avoca :
" Abhikkantam, bho Gotama, abhikkantam, bho Gotama ! seyyathapi bho Gotama nikkujjitam vii ukkujjeyya, pati- channam va vivareyya, miilhassa va maggam acikkheyya, andhakare va telapajjotam dhiireyya cakkhumanto rupani dakkhintiti : Evam eva, bho Gotama, aneka pariyayena dbammo pakiisito. Esaham bhagavantam Gotamam sara- nam gacchiimi dhammaiica bhikkhu-sanghailca. Labheyyarn ahara bhoto Gotamassa santike pabbajjam labheyyarn upa- sampadan ti." || 9 1|
Alattha kho Kaslbharadviijo brahmano Bhagavato santike pabbajjam, alattha upasarapadara. Acirupasampanno kho pan' ayasmii Bhiiradviijo eko viipakattho appamatto atiipl pahitatto viharanto na cirass' eva yass' atthiij'a kulaputta sammad eva agarasma anagiiriyam pabbajanti, tad anutta- ram brahmacariya-pariyosiinam ditth' eva dhamme sayam. abhiiiiia sacchikatva upasarapajja vihiisi.
" Khlnii jati, vusitara brahmacariyam, katam karanlyam, naparam itthattiij'ati," abhiunii anfiataro ca kho pan' ayasmii Bharadviijo arahatara ahositi. ||10||
KASIBHARADVAJASUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutain : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Biininasiyam viharati Isipatane Migadiiye. Tatra kho Bhagavii bhikkhu amantesi: 'bhikkhavo' ti, 'bhadante* ti. Te bhikkhu Bha- gavato paccassosum. Bhagavii etad avoca : II 1 1|
128 SACCAVIBHANGA.
" Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahatii sammitsainbuddhena Buninasiyam Isipatane Migadilye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam saruanena vu bruhmanena vii devena va Miirena va Brahrauna va kenaci va lokasmin ti. Yad idam catunnain ariyasaccanam acikkhata desatil pafifia- patji patthapata vivaranii vibhajanji uttaDakammam.
Katamesam catunnam ?
Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe — .
Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe —
Dukkhanirodhagaiuinlpatipada ariyasaccassa acikkhata — pe— .11211
Tathagatena, bhikkhave, arahata sammasambuddhena Baranasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhamraacakkain pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va Marena va Brahrauna vii kenaci va lokasmim : yad idam imesam catunnam ariyasaccanam acikkhata — pe—. 11311
" Sevetha, bhikkhave, Sariputta-Moggalhme, bhejatha, bhi- kkhave, Sariputta-Moggallane pandita bhikkhu anuggahaka brahmacarinam : seyyathapi bhikkhave, janetti evam Sari- putto: seyyathapi jatassa apiidetiievam Moggallano. Sari- putto, bhikkhave, sotapatti-phale vineti ; Moggallano iitta- matthe vineti ; Sariputto, bhikkhave, pahoti cattiiri ariya- saccjini vittharena acikkhitum desetum paiinapetum vivarituni vibhajitura uttaniikiitun ti.
Idam avoca Bhagavii : idam vatva Sugato utthayasana viharara pavisi. II 4 1|
Tatra kho iiyasma Sariputto acirapakkantassa Bhagavato bhikkhu amantesi :
'Avuso bhikkhavo' ti 'avuso* ti kho. te bhikkhii ayasmato Sariputtassa paccassosum : Ayasraa Sariputto etad avoca :
"Tathagatena, avuso, arahata sammasambuddhena Bara- nasiyam Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammacakkam pavattitam appativattiyam samanena va brahmanena va devena va Marena va BrahmunJi vii kenaci vii lokasmim: yad idam catunnam ariyasacciinaTn iicikkhatii — pe — . II 5 1|
SACCAVIBHANOA. 129
Xatamesam catunnam ? Dukkhassa ariyasaccassa ilcikkhata — pe — Dukkhasamudayassa ariyasaccassa ticikkhata — pe — . Dukkhanirodhassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu — pe — . Bukkhanirodhagaminlpatipadassa ariyasaccassa acikkhatu — pe— .11611
Kataraa ca, avuso, dukkhara ariyasaccam ?
" Jati pi dukkhii, jarii pi dukkha, vyiidhi pi dukkha, mara- nam pi dukkhara, soka-parideva-dukkha-domanass-upayasa dukkha : yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham, san- khittena pane' upadiinakkhandha dukkha.
Katamii ca avuso jiiti ?
Ya tesam tesam sattiinam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jati sanjati okkanti abhinibbatti khandhiinain piitubhavo ayatina- nain patiliibho. — Ayam vuccat' avuso jati. ||1||
Katama ca avuso jara ?
Ya tesam tesam sattanam tamhi tamhi sattanikaye jara, jTranata, khandiccam, paliccam valittacata ayuno samhani indriyanam paripako. — Ayam vuccat' avuso jara. ||2||
Katama ca avuso maranam ?
Ya tesam tesam sattiinam tamha tamha sattanikaye cuti cavanata bhedo antaradhanam maccu maranam kalakiriya khandhiinara bhedo kalebarassa nikkhepo. — Idam vuccat' avuso maranam. ||3||
Katama ca avuso soko ?
Yo kho avuso afiiiatarannatarena byasanena samannaga- tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa soko socanti socanattam antosoko antoparisoko. — Ayam vuccat' avuso soko. ||4||
Katama ca iivuso paridevo ?
Yo kho avuso annatarannatarena byasanena samannaga- tassa annatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa adevo paridevo iidevo paridevo iidevanJi paridevana adevitattam paridevitattara. Ayam vuccat' iivuso paridevo. II 5 1|
Katama ca dukkham?
Yam kho iivuso kayikam dukkham kiiyikam kiiya- samphassajam dukkham asiitam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat' avuso dukkham. |j 6 1|
130 SACCAVIBHANGA.
Katamu ca ^l^also domanossam P
Yam kho avuso cetasikam dukkham cetasikam asiitam ma- nosamphassajam dukkham asutam vedayitam. — Idam vuccat* uvuso domanassam. II 7 II
£atamii ca iivuso upayiiso ?
Yo kho iivuso anfjatarannatarena byasanena saraannugatena aniiatarannatarena dukkhadhammena phutthassa uyiiso upii- yaso ayiisitattam upayasitattam. Ayam vuccat' avuso upa- yaso. II8II '
Katama ca avuso yam p' iccham na labhati tarn pi dukkham ?
Jatidhammanam cTvuso sattanam evam iccha uppajjati : "aho vata mayam na jatidhammii assama, na ca vata no jati agaccheyy&ti : na kho pan' etara icchjiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati, tam pi dukkham.
Jaradhammtinara iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : *'aho vata mayam na jariidhamma assiima, na ca vata no jarii iigaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Byiidhidhammiinara avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : " aho ca vata mayam na byiidhidhammii assiima, na ca vata no byiidhi agaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Maranadhammiinain iivuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : " aho ca vata mayam na maranadhamma assiima, na ca vata no maranarn iigaccheyyati : na kho pan' etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham.
Soka-parideva-dukkhadomanass-upiiyasii dhammiinam avuso sattiinam evam icchii uppajjati : " aho vata raayarn na soka- paridevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisa dhammii assiima, na ca vata no sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupiiyiisii iigaccheyum: na kho pan* etam icchiiya pattabbam." — Idam pi yam p' iccham na labhati tam pi dukkham. ||9||
Katamii c&vuso sankhittena pancupiidiinakkhandhii dukkhii?
Seyyathldara : Riipupiidiinakkhandho, vedanupiidiinakkha- ndho, sanfiupiidiinakkhandho, saiikhiirupiidiinakkhandho, vi- ilnanupiidiinakkhandhii. — Ime vuccat' iivuso sankhittena pailcupadiiQakkhandhii dukkhii. || 10 1|
SACCAVIBHANGA. 131
Idam vuccat* iivuso dukkhara ariyasaccam. ||7I|
Xatama ca avuso dukkhasamudayam ariyasaccam ?
Yayara tanba ponobbhavikanandiraga-sahagata tatra tatri- bbinaadinl : seyyathldam :
Kiimatanba bbavatanba vibbavatanba. — Idara vuccat' avuso dukkbasamudayam ariyasaccam. || 8 1|
Katama ca avuso dukkbanirodbam ariyasaccam ?
Yo tassa yeva tanbaya asesaviraganirodbo ciigo patinissago mutti analayo. — Idam vuccat' avuso dukkbanirodbam ariya- saccam. [|9||
Katama ca avuso dukkbanirodbagaraini patipada ariya- saccam ?
Ayam eva ariyo attbangiko maggo : seyyatbidam : samma- dittbi, sammasankappo, sammavaca, sammakammanto, samma- ajlvo, samma-vayamo, sammasati, sammasamadbi.
Katama ca avuso sammadittbi ?
Yam kbo avuso dukkbe-fianam, dukkbasamudaye-nanam, dukkbanirodbe-nanam, dukkbanirodba-gaminlpatipadaya-na- nam. — ^Ayam vuccat' avuso sammadittbi. || 1 1|
Katama ca avuso sammasankappo ?
Nekkbammasankappo abyilpadasahkappo avibimsasan- kappo. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammasankappo. II 2 II
Katama ca avuso sammavaca ?
Musavjidii veramani pisunavacaya veramani pbarusavacjiya veramani sampbappalapaya veramani. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammavaca. ||3||
Katama ca avuso sammakammanto ?
Panatipjita veramani adinnadanii veramani kiimesu miccbil- cara veramani. — Ayam vuccat' avuso sammakammanto. ||4||
Katama ca avuso samma-ajlvo.
Idb' avuso ariyasavako miccba ajlvam pabaya, samma- ajlvena jivikam kappeti. — Ayam vuccat' avuso samma ajivo. II 5 II
Katama ca avuso samraavayiimo ?
Idb' avuso bbikkbu anuppanniinam papakiinam akusalanam
182 SACCAVIBHANGA.
dhammiinam anuppildiiya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam urabhati cittam pagganhuti padahati.
Uppanniinam papakilnam akusaliinam dhammunam pahii- nuya chandam janeti — pe — padahati.
Anuppannanara kusahTnam dhammunam uppiidiiya chandam janeti — pe — padahati.
Uppannanam kusaliinam dhammanam thitiya asammohiiya bhiyo bhiivuya vepulliiya bhavaniiya paripfiriya chandam janeti vayamati viriyam arabhati cittam padahati. — Ayam vuccat* iivuso sammavayiimo. ||6||
Katama ca avuso sammasati ?
Idh' avuso bhikkhu kiiye kilyanupassi viharati atiipl sampa- jano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Yedana vedananupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjha- domanassam.
Citte citt&nupassi viharati atapl — pe — abhijjhado- manassam.
Dhamme dhammanupassi viharati atapl sampajano satima vineyya loke abhijjhadomanassam.
Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammasati. II 7 1|
Katama ca avuso sammiisamadhi ?
Idh' iivuso bhikkhu vivicc' eva kiimehi vivicca akusalehi, dhammehi savitakkam saviciiram vivekajam pitisukham pathamajjhjinam upasampajja viharati.
Vitakkaviciiranam vupasamii ajjhattam sampasiidanam cetaso ekodibhiivam avitakkam avicJiram samadhijam piti- sukham dutiyajjhanam upasampajja viharati.
Pitiya ca viriigii upekkhako ca viharati sato sampajano sukhanca kiiyena patisamvedeti yan tam ariyii acikkhanti upekkhako satima sukhavihiirl ti tatiyajjhiinara upasampajja viharati.
Sukhassa ca pahiinil dukkhassa ca pahiinji pubbc ca soma- nassa-domanassanara atthagamjl addukkham asukham upe- kkhiisati-parisuddhim catutthajjhanam upasampajja viharati. — ^Ayam vuccat' iivuso sammiisamiidhi. II 8 |j
Idam vuccat' avuso dukkhanirodhagiiminlpatipada ariya- saccam. II 10 11
ARUNAVATISUTTA. 133
Tathiigatena iivuso arahatii sammusarabuddhena Biirunasi- yara Isipatane Migadaye anuttaram dhammaoakkam pavatti- tam appativattiyara samanena vii brahmanena va devena va Marena vii Brahmunii vu kenaci vii lokasmim acikkhata desata pafinapata patthapata vivarana vibhajana uttana- kamman ti. II 11 II
Idam avoca ayasma Sariputto attamanii te bhikkhu ayas- mato Sariputtassa bhasitam abhinandun ti.
SACCAVIBHANGA.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekara samayam Bhagavii Savattbiyam viharati Jetavane Anatbapindikassa arame. Tatra kbo Bhagava bbikkbu amantesi * bhikkbavo ' ti * bbadante * ti. Te bbikkbu Bhagavato paccassosum : Bbagava etad avoca: II 1 1|
" Bbfltapubbam, bbikkbave, raja abosi Arunavii. Rafino kbo pana bbikkbave Arunavato Arunavati nama rajadbani abosi. II 2 II
Ariinavatiyam kbo pana bbikkbave rujadbanlyam Sikbl Bbagava Arabam Sammasambuddbo upanissaya vibasi. II 3 II
Sikhissa kbo pana bbikkbave Bbagavato Arabato Samma- sambuddbassa Abhibbu Sambbavam nama savakayugam abosi aggam bbaddayugam. ||4||
Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bbagava Arabam Samma- sambuddbo Abbibbum bbikkbum amantesi : || 5 1|
" Ayama brabmana yena anfiataro brabmaloko : ten' upa- safikamissama yiiva bbattassa kiilo bbavissati." || 6 1|
Evam bbante ti kbo te bbikkbave Abbibbu bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arabato Sammasambuddhassa pacca- ssosi. 11711
Atba kbo, bbikkbave, Sikbl Bhagavii Arabam Samma- sambuddbo Abhibbu ca bhikkhu scyyathapi nama : balavu
134 ARUNAVATISUTTA.
puriso samraifljitam vu baham pasiireyya pasaritam va baham sammifijeyya. || 8 II
Evam evara Arunavatiya rajadhaniya antarahita tasmim brahmaloke paturahesum.
Atha kho, bhikkhave, Sikhl Bhagava Araham Samma- sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum iimantesi : " Patibhatu brabmana tam brabmuno ca brahma-parisa ca brabmapari- sajjanam ca dhamml kathji ti." ||9||
Evam bhante ti kbo bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammiisambuddhassa patissutvii brahma- nauca brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca dhammiya kathaya sandassesi samiidapesi samuttejesi sampahamsesi. IllOli
Tatra sudara bhikkhave brahma ca brahmaparisa ca brahmaparisajjii ca ujjhayanti khiyanti vipacenti.
Acchariyam vata bho abbhutara vata bho kathauhi nama satthari sammukhlbhute savako dhammam desessatiti. ||11||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl BhagavJi Araham Samma- sambuddho Abhibhum bhikkhum amantesi : —
" Ujjhayanti kho te brahmana brahma ca brahmaparisa ca brahmaparisajjii ca : acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata bho — kathauhi nama satthari sammukhlbhute savako dhammam desessatiti."
Tena hi tvam brahmana bhiyyo so mattaya brahmaiica brahmaparisanca brahmaparisajje ca saravejehiti. || 12 II
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhu bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva dissamiinena pi kayena dhammam desesi adissamiinena pi kayena dhammam desesi : dissamiinena hetthimena upaddha- kayena, adissamiinena uparimena upaddhakiiyena dhammam desesi : dissamiinena pi uparimena upaddhakiiyena, adissa- miinena hetthimena upaddhakiiyena pi dhammam desesi. ||13||
Tatra sudam bhikkhave brahmii ca brahmaparisii ca brahma- piirisajjii ca acchariyabbhuta-citta-jiitii ahesum. Acchariyam vata bho abbhutam vata bho samanassa mahiddhikata mah&- nubhiivatati. ||14||
Atha kho Abhibhil bhikkhQ Sikhira Bhagavantara Ara- hantam Sammasambuddham etad avoca :
ARUNAVATISUTTA. 135
" Abhijanami khv&ham bhante bhikkhusaughassa maj jhe evariipam viicam bhasita, pahomi khvahara avuso brahraaloke thito sahassllokadhatura sarena vinnapetun ti. Etassa brahraa- na kalo yam tvam brahmana brahmaloke thito sahassi-loka- dhatum sarenavinuapeyyasiti. ||15||
Evam bhante ti kho bhikkhave Abhibhii bhikkhu Sikhissa Bhagavato Arahato Sammasambuddhassa patissutva brahma- loke thito ima giithayo abhasi :
Arabhatha, nikkamatha, yufijatha Buddhasiisane Dhunatha maccuno senaiu nalikeram va kufijaro. || 1 1|
Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam karissatlti. ||2||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhl ca Bhagava Araham Samma- sambuddho Abhibhii ca bhikkhu brahmanca brahmaparisaiica brahmaparisajje ca samvejetva seyyathapi nama : balava pu- riso samminjitaip. va baham pasareyya pasaritam va baham sammifijeyya : evam eva tasmim brahmaloke antarahita Arii- navatiya rajadhaniya paturahesum. ||16||
Atha kho bhikkhave Sikhi Bhagava Araham Sammasam- buddho bhikkhu amantesi : —
"Assuttha no tumhe bhikkhave Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti." ||17||
"'Assumha kho mayam bhante Abhibhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa ti.'" I|18||
" Yatha katham pana tumhe bhikkhave assuttha Abhi- bhussa bhikkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanass4 ti." II 19 II
"*Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi- kkhuno brahmaloke thitassa gathayo bhasamanassa :
" Arabhattha, nikkamatha, yunjatha Buddhasasane Dhunatha maccuno senam nalikeram va kufijaro. II 1 1|
" Yo imasmim dhammavinaye appamatto vihassati Pahaya jatisamsaram dukkhassantam korissati tL l|2||
136 DEVADAHASUTTA.
" * Evam kho mayam bhante assumha Abhibhussa bhi- kkhuno bmhmaloko thitassa gathilyo bhasamanassil ti.'" ||20||
"Siidhu, sildhu, bbikkhave, sadbu kho turahe bhikkhave assuttha Abbibhussa bbikkbuno brahmaloke thitassa giithayo bhasamanassa ti. I|21||
Idam avoca Bhagava : attamana te bhikkhu Bhagavato bbasitam abhinandun ti. ||22||
ARUNAVATISUTTAM.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAVATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Evam me sutam : Ekam samayam Bhagava Sakkesu viha- rati Devadahan niima Sakyanam nigamo. Tatra kho Bhagava bhikkhu amantesi : —
"Naham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhiinam chasa phass&yatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi."
"Na ca panaham bhikkhave sabbe sanneva bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu nappamjidena karanlyan ti vadiimi."
"Ye te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu arahanto khlniisava vusitavanto katakaraniya ohitabharii anupattasadatthti parikkhlna bhava- samyojana sammad-aililavimutta : soham bhikkhiinam chasu phassilyatanesu nappamadena karanlyan ti vadiimi. || 1 1|
"Tarn kissa hetu? Katan tesu appamiidena abhabbate pamajjitum. Ye ca kho te, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sekha appattamiinasii anuttarara yogakkheraam patthayamiinii vi- haranti ; nes&hara bhikkhave bhikkhiinam chasu phassiiya- tanesu appamiidena karanlyan ti vadiimi." ||2||
" Tam kIssa hetu ? Santi bhikkhave cakkhuvinneyyil, riipii manoramii pi amanoramii pi. Tyassa phussa cittani na pariyiidiiya titthati cetaso apariyiidiinii araddham hoti viri- yam asalllnam upatthitii sati apamuttha passaddho kiiyo asa- raddho samilhitam cittam ekaggam : imain khv^ham, bhi-
DEVADAHASUTTA. 137
kkhave, appamadassa phalam samphassa-miino tesam bhi- kkhilnam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. || 3 ||
Santi bhikkhave ghanavinfieyya gandha manorama pi amanorama pi. || 4 ||
Santi bhikkhave jivhavinneyya rasa manorama pi amano- rama pi. il 5 II
Santi bhikkhave kayavinneyyii photthabba manorama pi amanorama pi. || 6 ||
Santi bhikhhave manovififieyya dhamma manorama ama- norama pi.
Tyassa phussa cittam na pariyadaya titthati cetaso apariyadtina araddham hoti : viriyam asalllnam upatthita sati apamuttha passaddho kayo asaraddho samahitam cittam ekaggam : imam khvaham bhikkhave appamadaphalam samphassamano tesam bhikkhunam chasu phassayatanesu appamadena karanlyan ti vadami. || 7 1|
Liibha vo bhikkhave suladdhaip vo bhikkhave khano vo patiladdho brahmacariya vasayati.
Dittha mayii bhikkhave cha phassayataniinika nama niraya.
Tatha : yam kinci cakkhunii rupam passati anittharu- pan iieva passati neva itthariipam akantarupau iieva passati no kantarupam amanapariipan neva passati no manaparilpam.
Yam kiuci sotena saddam sunati — pe — .
Yam kiuci gbiinena gandham ghayati — pe — .
Yam kinci jivhaya rasam sayati — pe — .
Yam kiiici kayena photthabbam phusati — pe — .
Yam kiuci manasil dhammara vijanati anittharQpam yeva vijanati, no ittharupam akantarupam yeva vijanati, no kanta- rupam amanapariipam yeva vijanati no maniiparupara. ||8||
Labha vo, bhikkhave, suladdham vo, bhikkhave, khapo vo, bhikkhave, patiladdho brahmacariyavasaya.
Dittha maya, bhikkhave, cha-phassiiyatanika nilma saggit.
Tuttha : yam kinci cakkhuna rupam passati ittharupam
138 DEVADAHA8UTTA.
yeva passati no anittharnpam : kantariipam yeva passati no akantam rilpam : manaparilpam yeva passati no amanapa- rupam. — pe— .
Yam kifici manasu dhammam vijiinati ittharupam yeva vijanati, no anittharupam : kantarupam yeva vijanati, no akantarupam : manaparupam yeva vijanati, no amanapa- rOpam. ||9||
Liibha vo bhikkhave, suladdham vo bhikkhave, khano vo patiladdho brahraacariya vasay&ti.
Ruparamii, bhikkhave, devamanussa riiparatii, rupasamu- dita rupaviparinama-viraganirodha dukkhii bhikkhave devamanussa viharanti.
Saddarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Gandharama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Rasarama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Photthabbiirama, bhikkhave, — pe — .
Dhamraaramii, bhikkhave, devamanussa dhammarata dhammasamudita dhammaviparinama viraganirodha du- kkha, bhikkhave, devamanussa viharanti. I|10||
Tathagato ca kho, bhikkhave, Arahara Sammasambuddho rupanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadafica adinavaoca nissarananca yathabhutam viditva na ruparamo, na ruparato na rupasamudito na rilpaviparijgiama yiriiganirodha sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharati.
Saddanam — pe — .
Gandhanam — pe — .
Kasanam — pe — .
Photthabbanam — pe — .
Dhammanam samudayailca atthagamanca assadauca adlna- vauca nissaranailca yathabhutam viditva : na dhammaramo, na dhammarato, na dhammasamudito, na dhammaviparinama viraganirodho sukho bhikkhave Tathagato viharatiti. ||11||
Idam avoca Bhagavii. Idam vatva ca Sugato : athaparam etad avoca sattha : —
DEVADAHASUTTA. 139
Bupu saddu gandha rasa phassa dhamma ca kevala Ittha kanta manapa ca yava tattha ti vuccanti. il 1 1|
Sadevakassa lokassa ete vo sukhasammata Yattha ce te nirujjhanti tarn tesam dukkham samma- tam. II2II
Sukham tain ditthamariyehi sakkiiyassa nirodhanam Paccanlkam idam hoti sabbalokena passatam. || 3 1|
Yam pare sukhato ahu tad ariya ahu dukkhato Yam pare dukkhato ahu tad ariya sukhato vidu. ||4I|
Passadhammam duvijanam sammulhettha aviddasu Nivutanam tamo hoti andhakaro apassatam. || 5 1|
Satanca vivatam hoti aloko passatam iva
Santike na vijananti maggadhammassa kovida. ||6||
Bhavaraga-paretebhi bhavayoganusaribhi Maradheyyanupannebhi nayamdhammosusambuddho. ||7||
Ko nu aunatram ariyebhi padi sambuddham arahati Yam padam sammadaunaya parinibbanti auasava ti. i| 8 1|
DEVADAHASUTTAM.
PARITTAM NITTHITAM.
A COLLECTION OF KAMMAVACAS.
NAMO TASSA BHAGAYATO ARAHATO SAMMA- SAMBUDDHASSA.
Chap. I.
THE ORDINATION OF A PRIEST.
Pathamam upajjham gahapetabbo, upajjham gahapetva pattacivaram acikkhitabbam :
* Ayan te patto ? ' " Ama bhante."
' Ayam sanghati ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Ayam uttarasaiigo ? ' " Ama bhante."
' Ayam antaravasako ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Gaccha amumhi, okase titthahi ! '
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo dyasmato Tissassa upa- sampadapekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, aham Ndgam auusaseyyam.
Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te paccakalo bhutakalo. Yam jatam, tarn sanghamajjhe pucchante : santam atthiti vattabbam, asantam natthiti vattabbam.
Ma kho vitthiisi ! ma kho manku ahosi !
Evam tam pucchissan ti.
Santi te evarupa abadhii ?
* Kuttham ? ' " Natthi bhante."
* Gando r " Natthi bhante."
* Kilaso ? ' " Natthi bhante." *So8o?' " Natthi bhante."
* Apamiiro ? ' " Natthi bhante."
142 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
* Manusso' si P' " Ama bbante." ' Puriso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Bhujisso* si P * " Ama bhante." ' Anano' si P * " Ama bhante."
' Na' si rajabhato P * " Ama bhante."
* Anuuiiato' si matapituhi ?* " Ama bhante."
* Paripunna-visati- vasso 'si P * " Ama bhante."
* Paripunnan te patta-clvaram P' " Ama bhante."
* Kinnamo 'si P' " Aham bhante Nago nama."
*Ko namo te upajjhayo P' "Upajjhayo me bhante aijasmd Tiasathero nama."
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ndgo di/asmato Tissassa upasampadjipekho. Anusittho so maya.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, Ndgo agaccheyya.
Agacchahiti vattabbo :
Sangham bhante upasampadam yiicami : UUumpatu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upadiiya !
Dutiyam pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum- patu mam bhante sangho, anukampain upadaya !
Tatiyara pi bhante sangham upasampadam yacami : Ullum- patu mam bhante sangho, anukampam upadaya !
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Ndgo dyasmato Tissassa upasampadjipekho. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam aham Ndgam antariiyike dhamme puccheyyam :
Sunasi Ndga ! ayan te saccakalo bhiitakiilo. Yam jatam tarn pucchami : Santam atthiti vattabbam, asantam uatthiti vattabbam.
Santi te evarOpa abadha :
' Kutthain P ' " Natthi bhante."
* Gando P' " Natthi bhante." ' Kilaso P ' " Natthi bhante." 'SosoP' " Natthi bhante."
* Apamaro P ' " Natthi bhante."
* Manusso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Puriso' si P ' " Ama bhante."
* Bhujisso' si P * " Ama bhante.*
* Anano' si P * " Ama bhante."
UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA. 143
* Na* si rajabhato ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Anuilimto' si miitapituhi ? * " Ama bhante."
* Paripunna-vlsati-vasso' si ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Paripunnan te pattacivarara ? ' " Ama bhante."
* Kinnumo' si ? ' " Aham bhante Ndgo nama."
' Ko namo te upajjhayo ? ' " Upaj jhayo me bhante dyasmd Tismtthero nama."
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Ndgo ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho, parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi, pari- punn' assa patta-clvaram Ndgo sangham upasampadam yacati dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Yadi sanghassa pattakallani sangho Ndgam upasampadeyya dyasmatd Tissena upajjhayena.
Esd Natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dham- mehi paripunn' assa pattaclvaram Niigo sangham upasampa- dam yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Niigam. upasampadeti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, 80 tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Dutiyam pi etam attham vadami :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Nago ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari- punn' assa pattacivarara Nago sangham upasampadam yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagani upasampa- deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati, so bhaseyya.
Tatiyam pi etam attham vadami.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam Niigo ayasmato Tissassa upasampadapekho parisuddho antarayikehi dhammehi pari- pun^* assa pattaclvaram Nago sangham upasampadam yacati ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Sangho Nagara upasampa- deti ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena. Yassayasmato khamati Nagassa upasampada ayasmata Tissena upajjhayena, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
144 UPASAMPADA KAMMAVACA.
Upasarapanno sarighena Niigo ayasmatii Tissena upajjhii- yena : khamati saughassa : tasmu tunhi evam etain dhura- yainiti. —
Tiivadeva chiiyji metabbii ; Utupamiinam iicikkhitabbam ; Divasabhjlgo iicikkhitabbo ; Sahgiti ucikkbitabba. —
Cattiiro nissayii ucikkbitabba
Cattari ca akaranlyani acikkhitabbani :
1) " Phidiydlopahhojanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yava- jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalilbho : Sangbabhattam, uddesabbattam, nimantanam, salakabbattam, pakkbikam, uposatbikara, patipadikam." " " Ama bbante ! " "
2) " Pamsiikulaclvaram nissdya 2)abbaJ/d : tattha te yava- jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalilbho : khomam, kappiisi- kam, koseyyam, kambalara, sanara, bhaiigam." " " Ama bhante.""
3) *' Rukkhamulasendsanam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yavajivain ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalabho : viharo addha- yogo, pasiido, hammiyam, guba." " " Ama bbante ! " "
4) " Putimuttabhesajjam nissdya pahhajjd : tattha te yava- jlvam ussabo karanlyo. Atirekalabho : Sappi, navanitam, telam, madbu, phanitam." " " Ama bhante ! " "
1) " Upasampannena hhikkhund methimo dhanimo na patisevi- iabho antamaso tiracchdnagatdya pi. Yo bhikkhu methunam dhammam patisevati assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyya- thiipi niima : Puriso sisacchinno abhabbo tena sarirabandba- nena jivitura, evam eva bhikkhu methunam dhammam pati- sevitva assamano boti asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajivam akaranlyani." " " Ama bhante ! " "
2) " Upasampannena hhikkhund adinnam theyyasahkhdtam na addtahham antamaso tinasaldkam updddya, Yo bhikkhu pjidam vii padarabam vii atirekapjidam va adinnam theyya- sahkhatam adiyati, assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathlipi nama : Pandupaliiso bandhana pamutto abhabbo haritattSya evam eva bhikkhu padam va padarabam va atirekapadam va
TICIVARENA AVIPPAVASA. 145
adinnam theyyasankhutam adiyitva, assamano hoti asakya- puttiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." ** " Ama bhante!""
3) " Upasampannena hhikkhuna sanclcca pdnojlvitcL na voro- petabbo antamaso kHnthakipillikam updddya : Yo bhikkhu sailcicca raanussaviggaham jlvitii voropeti antamaso gabbha- patanam upadiiya assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo, Seyyathapi nama puthu sila dvedha bhinna appatisandhika hoti, evam eva bhikkhu sancicca manussaviggaham jivita voropetva assamano hoti, asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." " "Ama bhante.""
4) " Upasampannena bhikkhund uttari-manussa-dhammo na uUapitabbo antamaso simndgdre abhirdmiti. Yo bhikkhu pa- piccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dham- mam uUapati jhanara va vimokkharn va samadhim va sama- pattim vji maggam va phalara va assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Seyyathapi nama : talo matthaka chinno, abhabbo puna vi- rulhaya evam eva bhikkhu papiccho icchapakato asantam abhutam uttari-manussa-dhammam ullapitva, assamano hoti asakyaputtiyo. Tan te yavajlvam akaranlyam." " " Ama bhante.""
Chap. II.
THE INVESTITURE OF A PRIEST WITH THE THREE ROBES.
Sunatu me bhante sangho. Yo so sanghena ticivarena avippavaso sammato. Yadi sahghassa pattakallara sangho tarn ticivarena avippavasam samuhaneyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho : Yo so sanghena ticivarena avippavaso sammato, sangho tam ticivarena avippavasam samuhanati. Yass4yasmato khamati etassa ticivarena avippa-
10
146 XJPOSATHA KAMMAVACA.
vasassa samugghato, so tunh* assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhasej'ya. Samiihato so sanghena ticlvarena avippaviiso. Kliamati sahghassa tasmii tui'ibl evam etam dbarayamiti.
Chap. III.
THE FIXING OF A BOUNDAUY FOR THE PER- FORMANCE OF THE UPOSATHA.
SunJitu me bhante sangbo ! Yii sa sangbena sima samma- nnitii samiinasamvasa ek' uposatba : yadi sangbassa patta- kallam sangbo tam simam samuhaneyya.
Esd mtti:
Suniltu rae bbante sangbo ! yii sa sangbena sTma sarama- nnita samanasamvasii ek' uposathii, sangbo tam sImam samii- banati. Yassayasmato kbamati etissii simaya samanasamva- sjiya ek' uposatbaya samuggbato so tunb' assa. Yassa na kkbamati, so bbiiseyya. Samubatii sa slmii sangbena samana- saraviisa ek' uposathii. Kbamati sangbassa tasmii tunbl evam etam dhiirayiimiti.
* Purattbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' " Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Purattbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam ? ' " Pasiino bbante!"
' Eso piisiino nimittam ! *
* Dakkhiniij^a disiiya kin nimittara ? * " Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Dukkbiniiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?' "Piisiino bbante!"
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! *
* Paccbimiiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' " Pasiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
* Paccbimiiya anudisiiya kin nimittam ?' "Piisiino bbante !"
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
' Uttariiya disiiya kin nimittara ?' *' Piisiino bbante ! "
* Eso piisiino nimittam ! '
KATHINA KAMMAVACA. 147
'TJttariiya anudisiiya kin nimittam?* " Pasano bhante !'*
* Eso pasano nimittam ! '
SunJitu me bhante sangho ! YuvatJi samanta nimitta kittitii : yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho etehi nimittehi simam sammanneyya samuna-samvasam ek' uposatham.
JEsd mtti :
Suniitu me bhante sangho ! Yavata samanta nimitta kittita sangho etehi nimittehi sImam sammannati samanasamvasam ek' uposatham. Yassayasmato khamati etehi nimittehi sl- raaya sammuti samana-samvasaya ek' uposathjiya, so tunh' assa ! Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya ! Sammata sa sima sanghena etehi nimittehi samanasamviisa ek' uposatha. Kha- mati sanghassa tasma tunhl evam etam dharayamiti.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena sammata sa- manasamvasa ek' uposatha : Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammaneyya tha- petva gamanca gamupacaranca.
End fiatti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ya sa sanghena sIma sammata samanasamvasa ek' uposatha sangho tam sImam ticivarena avippavasam sammannati thapetva gamanca gamupacaraiica.
Yassayasmato khamati etissa simaya ticivarena avippava- saya sammuti thapetva gamanca gamupacarafica, so tunh* assa ! yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya.
Sammata sa sIma sanghena ticivarena avippavasii thapetva gamanca gamupacaranca. Khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. IV.
THE BESTOWMENT OF THE KAJHINA ROBE.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina- dussam uppannain. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam, sangho imam kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno dadoyya kathinam attharitum.
148 KATHINA KAMMAVACA.
JEsd mtiL
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Idam sanghassa kathina- dussam uppannam. Sangho imam kuthinadussam itthanna- massa bhikkhuno deli kuthinam attharitum. Yass&yasmato khamati iraassa kathinadussassa itthannamassa bhikkhuno dilnam kathinam attharitum so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkha- mati 80 bhaseyj'a. Dinnam idam sahghena kathinadussam itthannamassa bhikkhuno kathinam attharitum. Khamati sanghassa, tasma tunhi, evam etam dharayamlti.
Kathinadayakassa vattham atthi sace so tarn ajananto pucchati : " Bhante katham kathinam djitabban ti ? "
Tassa evam acikkhitabbam : " " Tinnam civaranam ailfia- tara-pahonakam suriyuggamana-samaye vattham kathinacl- varam demii ti diitum vattatiti :
" " Attharakena bhikkhuna sace sanghatiya kathinam attharitu kamo hoti, poranika sahghjiti paccuddharitabba : nava sanghati adhitthatabba, "imiiya sanghatiya kathinain attharamiti," vaca bhinditabbii. Tena kathinattharakena bhikkhuna sahgham upasahkamitva ekamsam uttarasangam karitva afijalim paggahetva evam assa vacanlyo :
" Atthatara, bhante, sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi- nattharo, anumodatha ! "
" " Atthatam avuso sanghassa kathinam dhammiko kathi- nattharo anumodama ti ! " "
SunJitu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho kathinam uddhareyya.
Ead hatii :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho kathinam uddharati. Yassayasmato khamati kathi- nassa ubbharo so tunh' assa ! yassa na kkhamati, so bha- seyya. —
Ubbhatam sahghena kathinam ! Khamati sanghassa tasma tunbi evam etam dharayamiti.
THERA-SAMMUTI-NAMASAMMUTTI. 149
Chap. V. THE ELECTION OF A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam thera-sammutim iccharai ! soham, bhante, sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacarai ! Dutiyam pi yacapetva, tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhikkhuna patibalena sarigho iiapetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! ayam itthannatno bhikkha sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati. Yadi san- ghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthan- namam therasammutirn dadeyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu sangham itthannamam therasammutirn yacati, sangho itthan- namassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutirn deti. YasslL- yasmato khamati itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammutiya danam, so tunh' assa. Yassa na kkhamati so bhaseyya. — Dinna sanghena itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthannamam therasammuti : khamati sanghassa tasma tunhi evam etam dharayamiti.
Chap. YI.
THE GIYING OF A NAME TO A PRIEST.
Aham bhante itthannamam namasammutim icehami, soham bhante sangham itthannamam namasammutim yacamiti. Dutiyam pi yacapetva tatiyam pi yacapetva byattena bhi- kkhuna patibalena sangho napetabbo :
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! Ayam itthannamo bhikkhu sangham itthannamam namasammutim j'acati. Yadi sanghassa pattakallam sangho itthannamassa bhikkhuno itthanoamam namasammutim dadeyya.
End natti :
150 VIHARA KAMMAVACA.
Sunatu me bhante sangho ! A^-am itthannamo bbikkhu sangbam itthannamam namasamrautim yacati : sahgbo itthannamassa bhikkbuno ittbanniimam namasammutim deti. Yassfiyaamato khamati ittbannamassa bliikkbuno ittbanna- mam niima sammutiya danam so tunb' asaa ! Yassa na kkba- mati so bhiiseyya.
Dinna sahgbena ittbannamassa bbikkbuno ittbanniimam nilmasammuti : Kbamati sangbassa tasma tui^bi evam etam dbiirayamiti. —
Evam kammavacam katva byattena bbikkbuna patibalena databbo ti.
Chap. VII. THE DEDICATION OF A YIHARA.
Sunatu me bbante sangbo ; Yadi sangbassa pattakallara sahgbo ittbannamam vibaram kappiyabbumim sammanneyya.
Esd natti :
Sunatu me bbante sangbo ! Sangbo ittbannamam viba- ram kappiyabbumim sammannati. Yass&yasmato kbamati ittbannamassa vibarassa kappiya bbumiyii sammuti so tunb* assa : Yassa na kkbamati so bbaseyya. Sammato sahgbena itthannamo vibiiro kappiyabbumi. Kbamati sangbassa tasma tunbi evam etam dbiirayamiti.
HANDBOOK OF PALI.
III. GLOSSARY.
GLOSSARY.
A, aud before vowels AN, a negative particle ; used only in composi- tion.
AMSO, a part, a period of time.
AMSO, AMSAM, shoulder.
a-kattho (adj.), not ploughed.
a-kano, rice freed from the red coat- ing which underlies the husks.
a-kanto (adj.), unpleasant, disagree- able.
tt-kaliko (adj.), without delay (epi- thet of the dhamma), immediate.
a-kuppo (adj.), firm, immoveable.
a-kusalo (adj.), had, evil, sinful.
a-kkuddho (adj.), not violent.
akkha-dhutto, gambler.
akkhata (m.), one who tells.
a-kkhati, to tell.
AKKHO, a die.
AGGAM, point, top, extremity.
AGGI (m.), fire.
AGGO (adj.), first, foremost.
ANGAM, limb ; share, quality, at- tribute.
acceti, to pass beyond, to over- come ; p. p. p. atito, past.
AJJA (adv.), now, to-day.
ajjatagge, henceforward .
AJJHAITAM, individual thought.
ajjhattarh (adv.), relating to the in- dividual. ajjhattiko (adj.), internal, belonging
to the individual. AJJHAYAKO, a preceptor. ANJALI (m.), the hollow of the
joined hands. annataro, one, a certain. ANNA (f.) knowledge. anhatra (adv.), otherwise, with the
exception of. ANNO, other. ATTO, a case, a cause. ATTHA (num.), eight. atthahgiko (adj.), eightfold. atthamo, eighth. ATTHI (n.), bone; caus. atthiyati,
to treat as a bone. ATTHI'^"NJA (f.), marrow. ATTHO, reason. APPHAYOGO (t. t.), large hall. anuko (adj.), very small. ANNAVO, the sea, the ocean. ATI (adv. and prep.), over, beyond,
exceeding, before vowels ace. ati-go (adj.), escaping from. [gant. ati-mannati, to despise, to be arro- ati-mant (adj.), proud. ATIREKALABHO (t. t.), extra
allowance.
151
GLOSSARY.
ATTA (n.), self, mind (for declen- sion, see Grammar).
A'lTHA (adv.), here. [arice.
ATTIIAM (Skr. tuta), disappear-
att/ia-gamo, atthan°, disappearance, annihilation.
a-ttharati, to spread out.
atthdya (adv.), for the good of.
AT'l'HI, to he (for conjugation, see Grammar).
ATTHO, reason, desire ; property.
ATHA, ATHO (adv.), and ; hut.
a-thuso (adj.), free from husk.
a-dlnnaddnaih, taking what is not given.
ADDHANAM, a road ; a long time.
ADHAMO (adj.), lowest.
AD HI (adv. and prep.), above, over; frequently in composition before vowels ajjh.
adhi-titthati, to devote oneself.
adhi-tthanam, resting-place.
ADHI-PATI (m.), lord, chief.
adhi-bhdsati, to address ; aor. ajjha- blidsi.
adhi-vahanath, carrying.
adhi-vdsanam, the assent, [accept.
adhi-vdseti (cans.), to consent, to
a-nano, free from debt.
an-attd (m.), not a self.
an-atto (adj.), without individu- ality, unreal.
an-attha-samhito, profitless.
an-anu-giddho, without greediness.
un-anu-s8uto (adj.), unheard of.
an-anto, without end, innumerable.
ANA-BHAVO, non-existence; ana- bhdvarh gacchatl, to come to nothing, to perish.
an-abhirati, dissatisfaction. an-arahd, not being a saint. an-ariyo, ignoble. anavajjata (f.), blamelessness. anavajjo (adj.), blameless. an-avayho (adj.), not to be given in
marriage. an-avaseso, without remainder. an-avilo, clear from. andkulo, untroubled. andgato, future, coming. [less.
andlayo, free from desire, passion- A-NICCO (adj.) (t. t.), perishable,
not lasting. anittho (adj.), unpleasant. ANU (adv. and prep.), after, later ;
along, again, in consequence. anu-kat/^ati, to recite. anu-kampako, compassionate. anu-kampl, compassionate. anu-jdndti, to permit ; p. p. p. anuh-
nato. ati'Utthdnam, want of energy. anu-tthitati, to make to follow. an-uttaro (adj.), than which none is
higher, the highest. anudisd, (f.), an intermediate point
of the compass. an-up-pagacchati, not to embrace. anu-para-yati, to walk round and
round. anu-passi (adj.), looking at, contem- plating. anu-pubbaso (adv.), in regular order. anuppanno, not arisen. an-uppddo, not arising. anu-ydti, to follow. anu-yogo, being addicted to. anu-rakkhati, to protect.
GL088ART.
156
ANU-8AY0 (t. t.), repentance. anusari (adj.), fullowing;. anu-gdsati, to teach. anu-ssarati, to call in mind. anu-asaveti (cans.), to cause to be
heard, to proclaim. an-ejo (adj.), free from desire. an-ottapi (adj.), fearless of sinning. ANTAM, the intestines, bowels. ANTAGUNAM, mesentery. antamaso, even. ANTARA (adv. and prep.), within,
between, among. antara-dhanam, disappearance. antara-dhayati, to vanish, to hide ;
p. p. p. antarahito, vanished. antardyiko, causing an obstacle. ANTARA- VASAKO (t. t.), under-
garment worn by a Buddhist
priest. ANTALIKKHAM, sky, air. ANTIMO, last, final. ANTO (adv. and prep.), within, in,
inside ; see also antara, ANTO (also neuter), end, limit. ANDHO (adj.), blind. andha-koro, darkness. ANNAM, food. APAMARO, epilepsy. a-pamuttho (adj.), not left behind. a-pardjito, unconquered. a-parimdno (adj.), immense, unde- fined. a-pariydddnarh, not taking up, not
laying hold of. APARO (adj.), other, subsequent;
western. a-pddako, having no feet. APAYO [going away], hell.
APf, PI (part.), also, even.
a-pUuno (adj.), not calumnious.
ap-eti, to go away.
appa-kicco, having few cares.
a-pjHigabbho, not arrogant.
a-ppati-sandiko, that cannot be united.
appa-nigghoso, free from noise.
a-ppa-matto, vigilant, careful.
O'ppamdno (adj.), infinite.
a-ppo'Ttiddo, vigilance, zeal.
appa-saddo, free from noise.
a-ppu-tanno, dissatisfied.
a-ppiyo, not dear, hateful.
APPO (adj.), small, weak ; fre- quently in composition.
abbh-ug-gacchati, to reach. [sire.
A-BY-APADO (t.t.), absence of de-
a-bhabbatd (f.), non-liability.
a-bhabbo (adj.), incapable.
a-bhayam, safety from danger.
ABHI (adv. and prep.), exceeding; in, into.
abhi-kkanto, handsome, beautiful.
abhl-kkanto (p. p. p.), abhikkamati, advanced.
abhi-kkamati, to step forward.
abhi-kkamo, advancing.
abhi-gtto, (p. p. p.), recited.
nbhijdndti, to know ; g^r. abhinnd.
ABHIJJHA (f.), covetousness.
abhi-t'ttthati, to surpass.
ABHITTHANAM (t. t.), crime, d«'adly sin.
ABHINHAM (adv.), repeatedly.
abhinhato (adv.), repeatedly, [with.
ab/ii-nandati, to rejoice, to l>e pleased
ABHINIBBATTI (f.) (t.t.), re- birth ia another existence.
IM
GLOSSARY.
abhi-niveno, adhering to.
abhi-paleti, to guard, to keep.
abhi-ppa-modayam, rejoicing.
abhi-ramati, to delight.
abhi-rudo, cooing, singing.
abhi-ruhati, to mount.
abhi-vastati, to cause to rain.
abhi-vadeti, caus. of abhivadati, to salute.
ah/ii-sameti, to penetrate.
a-bhojaneyyo, not to be eaten.
a-mato (adj.), immortal.
a-inanapo (adj.), uupleasing, un- pleasant.
a-manoramo (adj.), unpleasant.
a-mitto, enemy.
ARANNAM, forest.
ARAHA ARAHAM (m.), a vener- able person.
ARAHO (adj.), worth.
ARIYO (adj.), honourable, vener- able, noble.
ARIYA-SACCAM (t. t.), sublime truth.
ALAM (adv.), sufficient.
ALASO (adj.), idle.
ALOKO, intuition.
alliyati, to be attached, to adhere.
alltko (adj.), being addicted, ad- hering.
AVA and O (prep, and adv.), away, off; down.
ava-jdndti, to despise.
ava-ruddho (adj.), obstructed.
a-viddasu, ignorant.
a-vippavato, not parting.
a-vi-rufho (adj.), not grown.
a-vivayho (adj.), not marriageable.
avihimaa (f.), mercy, humanity.
avecca, gerund, of ava + yj i, to penetrate.
a-veram, fricudliuess.
a-»anto (adj.), not good, wicked.
a-»ammoho (adj.), without infatua- tion.
a-sallino, not cowering, resolute.
ASlTI (num.), eighty.
ASU (pron.), tliis, that (see Gram- mar) ; amumhi (loc.), here.
a-suci (adj.), unclean.
a-$ubho (adj.), bad.
ASURO, an asura.
a-aeso (adj.), without rest ; all, every.
a-so/co, free from sorrow.
ASNATI, to eat. [ness.
asiddo, tasting ; enjoyment, happi-
a-ssasati, to inhale air.
ASSO, horse.
AHAM (pron.), I (see Grammar).
AH I (m.), a snake.
AHO (interjection).
A (prep.), until, as far as.
a-kankhati, to desire.
a-kapjM, ornament, disguise.
d-gacchatiy to come.
a-cikkhati, to tell, to announce, to
investigate. ajahno (adj.), of noble birth, [hood. d-jtvo, livelihood, means of liveli- ATAPO, sunshine. ATAPI (adj.), ardent, zealous. a-ddti, to take ; pass, ddiyati. ADICCO, the sun. AdINAVO, distress, suffering ;
evil result. dnantariko (adj.), uninterrupted.
0L08SART.
W7
AxAPAXAIVr (t. t.), inlniled and exhaled lireath.
ANISAMSO, advjintage, profit.
aiiub/iavava(At\j.), possessing power.
anu-bhavo, power, dignity.
a-net't, to I)ring home.
apadeta (m.), inflioter, causer.
abadhiko (adj.), affected with illness.
ABADHO, illness.
a-b/iujati, to bend, to turn.
AMA (interj.), yes, truly.
a-manteti, to address. [sphere.
A YATANAM (t. t.), organs of sense ;
a-t/atiko, future.
AYASMA, old, venerable.
AYASO, despair.
AYU (n.), life.
a-yuto (adj.), endowed with.
a-raddho (p. p. p. to aradhaii), ac- complished.
a-rahhati, to begin, to attempt, to exert oneself; ger. arabbha ; p. p. p. araddho.
AR AMO, pleasure, pleasure-garden.
a-ruhati, to ascend.
a-varanam, covering.
avaso, abode.
avahati, to convey.
AVI (adv.), manifestly, in full view (see Grammar).
a-Duati, to enter, to approach.
AVUSO (voc. to ai/asmd), friend!
asanam, a seat.
A-SAVO (t. t), literally influence; human passion ; khtnasavo, one in whom human passiou is extinct.
ASEVi (adj.), addicted to.
Aha, to 8|ieak (see (jrammar).
ahanati, to strike.
AhARO, food. a-huti (f.), offering. ahuneyyo (adj.), sacrificial, wor- shipful, worthy of offerings.
INGHA (interj.), come ! pray ! ICCHATI. to wish. ICCHA, wish, desire, lust. INJATI, to move, to be shaken. INAM, debt. [sant.
ITTHO (adj.), desired, good, plea- ITI, TI (conj.), thus. ITTHATTAM, present condition. itthan-namo, having such and such
a name, thus named. ITTH I (f.), woman (for declension,
see Grammar). IDDHI (f.) (t. t.), supernatural
power. iddhiko (adj.), possessed of iddhi
(supernatural power). iddhimd, possessed of supernatural
power. IDHA (adv.), here, hither. [gwte. indakhllo, pillar in front of a city INDO, king, chief. INDRIYO (t. t.), faculty. ISI, a priest ; maheai (idem). iaaariyam, dominion. ISSARO, master, chief. ISSA, jealousy, envy,
I.
Is A, pole of a plough.
U.
uk-kujjeti, to set up again. Hg-gacchati, to rise.
158
GLOSSARY.
ug-gafihati, to rise, to lift np, to learn.
ug-gamanath, rise.
UGGO, violent.
UCCA (indecl.), as Jirst part qf compounds high ; uccdsayanath, high seat.
UC-CARO, excrement.
UJU (adj.), straight.
uj-jhayati, to be irritated, annoyed.
u-tthahati, to rise, to stand up, to exert oneself; p. p. p. vutthito.
UNNA-NABHI (m.), spider.
UNHAM, heat.
UNHO (adj.), hot.
UIjARO (adj.), mighty, great.
UTU (m. f. n.), season. [most.
UTTAMO (superl.), highest, ut-
UTTARA-SANGO, tlie upper yel- low garment of a Buddhist priest.
UTTARO (adj.), higiier; northern.
UTTANO, supine ; open, evident, clear, easy ; adv. uttdni and uttdnd, clearly.
ut-trasati, to tremble.
UD (prep., only used in composi- tion), above, away ; outside, out.
UDAKAM, water.
UDARAM, belly.
udariyam, stomach.
UDANAM, solemn utterance.
uddneti (cans.), to breathe forth.
ud-eti, to come up.
UDDHAM, upwards.
ud-dharati, to draw out ; to lift up.
UPA (adv. and prep ), near to ; below, less.
upa-cdro, approach ; gamupacdro, the approach to a village.
upa-jwati, to subsist by.
upajj hdpeti, to command.
UPAJJHO, preceptor.
upa-tthanam, attendance.
upa-tthito (p. p.p.), ready, present.
upaddho, half, partial.
upa-dissati, to be seen, discovered.
UPADHI (t. t.), a substratum of being.
upandmfiti (cans.), to offer.
UPA-NAHl (adj.), bearing hatred.
upa-ni-pajjati, to lie down.
upanissdya, near, close to.
upa-nisso, residing in.
upa-pajjati, to come to, to attain.
upamo, highest.
uparimo (adj.), uppermost.
upa-vadati, to blame.
upa-san-kamati, to go to, to ap- proach.
upa-samo, quietude, calm.
UPASAMPADA (f.) (t. t.), the upa- sampada ordination.
upasampaddpekho, wishing for ordi- nation.
UPADANAftl (t. t.), clinging to existence, attachment ; okhandhdf element of being.
upd-diyati, to take hold ; anukam- path updddya, taking pity.
updydso, despair.
UPAYO, means of success.
UPASAKO, fem. UPASIKA (t. t.), a lay devotee.
UPEKHA (f.), indifference, equa- nimity.
npekkhako, resigfned, patient.
up-eti, to go, to approach ; pd^u- peto, living, possessed of breath.
OLOSSART.
159
UPOSATHIKAlCf (t. t.), food offered on full-moon days.
UPOSATHO (t. t.), the Buddhist Sabbnth-day.
vp-pajjati, to arise.
uppanno, p. p. p. to uppajati.
UBBHARO=UDDHARO (t. t.), rooting up.
ul-lapati, to lay claim to, to assert.
ul-lumpati, to lift up.
ul-loketi, to look up.
ussaho, exertion.
E.
ekaggo (adj.), calm, tranquil.
eha-cco (adj.), one, a certain.
eka-m-antam (adv.), on one side.
EKO (num.), one ; alone.
EKO (adj.), single, solitary.
EKODIBHAVO (t. t.), unity, per- haps 'predominance.'
etarahi (adv.), now.
etadiso, such like.
ETI, to go, to enter (with ace).
EVA and EVAM (adv.), thus.
ESANA (f.), wish, desire.
ESl (adj.), seeking, desiring.
ehi-passiko (adj.), inviting (epithet of the dhamma).
O.
o-kaso, room, place.
O'kkanti ({.), descent.
OGHO, flood, torrent.
opanayiko, leading to perfection
(epithet of the dhamma). otthdvo (adj.), steady. ODATO, white, pure. opako, without result.
o-pildpeti, to let float.
o-bhasati, to shine.
o-bhaso, light.
o-hito (p. p. p.), put down, deposited.
K.
KAIVfSO, metal, bronze. KANKHATI, to doubt. KACCHURO, scab. KATHINAM (t. t.), a robe made
for a Buddhist priest in a single
day, out of the rough material. K AT HI NO (adj.), hard, solid. KANDU (f.), itch. KANNO, ear.
KANHO (adj.), black, sinful. katapuhnatd, meritorlousness. KATAMO (pron.), what ? which ? KATHAM (adv.), how. KATHA (f.), discourse. kad-ariyo, a bad man. KANTO (a(^j.), loved, agreeable. KAPPASIKAM, cotton. KAPPIYO (adj.), fit, right, proper;
kappiyabhumi, a suitable site. KAPPETI (cans.), to enter upon, to
arrange. KAPPO, time; rule; ordinance; all,
the whole ; kevalakappo, whole. KAMPATI, to shake. KAMBAKAM, woollen garment. KAMMAM, doing, action. kammanta (f.), calling. kammanto, conduct ; occupntiuu,
work, kamma-vipako, result of actions. kamyata ({.), desire. KARAI^AM, making. KARlSAM, excrement.
100
GLOSSARY.
KARUIVA. (f.), compassion. KAROTI, to make (see Grammar);
mantuikaroti, to piiy attention ;
kalaiikaroti, to die ; anjalim
karoti, to salute respectfully. KALEBARAM, a corpse. K AS ATI, to plough. kasi, ploughing. kassako, a ploughman. KAMO, wish, desire ; lust, pasgion. KAYO, body.
kayiko (adj.), bodily, physical. KARl (adj.), doing, acting. KARO, making, constituent part. kalakiriyd (f.), death. KALO, time; kalena, in due time;
bhattakalo, meal-time. kdlam mahhati, he deems it right. KASO, a cough. -KIM (adv.), why, pray? what. khhsu, what.
kihci[d), anything, whatsoever. KINCIKKHAM, a trifle. KITTAYATI, kitteti, to proclaim. KITTI (f.), fame. KIPILLIKO, an ant. [tion.
KILAMATHO, fatigue, mortifica- KILASO, scab, dry leprosy. KiRAM, meat. KlVA (adv.), how? KUKUCCAM, misconduct. KUKUTTHAKO, Phasiunus gal-
lus, a bird. KUCCHI(f.), belly. KU^JARO, elephant. KUTTHAM, leprosy. KUNTHO, an ant. KUMARO, hoy. kumari ((.), a girl.
KULAIVI, flock, herd ; family. kulaputto, son of noble family ;
high caste. KULlRAKO, a crab. KUSALO (adj.) (t. t.), skilful. KCLAM, rag. [complished.
KEVALl (m.) (t.t.), one who is ac- KEVALO (adj.), whole, entire. KESO, hair. KO (inter, pron.), who ? which ?
what ? (see Grammar). koci, whosoever. KOST.A, heron. KODHO, anger.
kovido, knowing, acquainted with. KOPlNAM, pudenda. KOSEYYAM, silken stuff.
KH.
KHANO, moment (brief measure of time).
khandiccam, state of being broken.
KHATTIYO, warrior.
KHANTi (f.), patience.
KHANDO, the shoulders ; 1. 1. ele- ment of being.
KHAMATI, to endure ; to forgive ; to be approved.
KHAYO, extinction, vanishing.
KHARO, solid; harsh.
KHASA (f.), scab.
KHIPATI, to throw.
KHIYATI, to decrease, to waste away; to murmur; p. p. p. khijio.
KHILO, a pin, a stake.
KHUDDO (adj.), mean.
KHURO, hoof of a horse or ox.
KHELO, saliva, phlegm.
KHETTAld, land, district.
GLOSSARY.
161
KHEMAI!^, safety, well-being ;
yogakkhemam, nibbana. KHEMO, fern. KHEMi (adj.),
secure. KHO (inter).), indeed. KHOMAM, linen.
G.
GACCHATI, to go (see Grammar).
GANG, multitude.
GANDO, goitre.
GANH ATI, to take, to seize ; p. p. p. gahito.
GANTHETI, to tie, to bind.
GANDO, smell, odour.
GABBHARO, a cleft.
GABBHO, womb, belly.
GAMBHiRO (adj.), deep.
gammo, accessible.
GARAHA (f.), blame.
GARU (m.), parent, teacher.
garu-karo, respect.
GAHATTHO, a householder.
GATHA, stanza.
gamini (adj.), leading.
GAMO, village.
^ara^Ao (adj.), blameable; contemp- tible.
GARAVO, reverence.
gavi, cow.
GIMHO, heat.
GIMHANAM, hot season.
GIRA, voice, speech.
GIRI, mountain.
GILATI, to devour.
GILANO (adj.), sick, iU.
OITAM, singing, a song.
GUTTI (f.), guarding.
GUMBO, a bush, a thicket.
GUHA (f.), rock-cave. GEDHO, greediness. GO (m. f.), ox, cow (see Grammar). GOTTAlVr, famUy, lineage. GOPATI, to protect, to guard; p. p. p. gutto, cp. kayagutto.
GH.
GHARAIVI, house.
gharamen, leading the life of a
householder. GHARO, house. GHANAM, nose. GHAYATI, to smeU.
C.
CA (conj.), and, also. CAKKHU (n.), eye, insight. cakkhumd (adj.), having eyes,
having insight, CANDO (adj.), wrathful, passionate. catuttho, fourth ; catutthath, for
the fourth time. catud-disam, the four cardinal
points. catup-pado, having four feet. CATTARO (num.), four; cataio
((.), cattari (n.). CARANAM, good conduct. CARATI, to go. CAVATI, to disappear ; p. p. p.
cuto. CAVANAlfl, disappearance, death. CAGO, liberality, self-sacrifice ;
abandoning. CICCITAYATI, to splash. CITTAM, mind. cittako (adj.), mindful. CINTETI, to think.
11
162
6I.088ART.
CiVARAM, robe.
CUTI, disappearing, death.
cetasiko (adj.), mental.
CETO, mind.
ceto-vimutti, emancipation of mind.
CORO, a tliief.
CH.
CHA (num.), six.
CHATTHO, sixtli.
CHAPPETI, to tlirow away, to
renounce. CHANDO, wish, resolve, intention. CHAMBHATI, to be alarmed. CHAMBHITATTAM, trembling. CHAYA (f.), shadow. CHINDATI, to cut off.
J.
Janapado, a country.
janeti (caus. jay at i), to bring forth,
to produce. JANETTI, a mother. JANO, man, person, being. JARA (f.), old age, decay. JARO, fever. JALATI, to bum. JAHATf, to leave behind. JATARCPAM, gold. JATI (f.), birth. JATU (adv.), verily. Jato (p. p. p.), lomahatthajato, the
hair standing on end terrified. JANATI, to know. [duced.
JAY ATI, to be bom, to be pro- JALA (f.), flame. JIGUCCHATI, to dislike. JIOHACCHA (f.), hunger. jinnako (adj.), old.
JIVHA (f.), tongue.
JlRANAM, growing old; decay.
JlRATI, to g-r()w ohl.
JiVIKA (f.), livelihood, life.
JIVITAM, life.
JIVI (adj.), living.
JUTI (f.), splendour ; jutima, po8-
sesf^ed with splendour. JO, at last part of a compound
' arising from.'
JH. JHANAM (t. t.), meditation.
SATTI (f.), announcement, declara- tion, formula. ^ANAM, knowledge. ]SATAK0, a relative. 5^ATI, kinsman. NAYO, right method.
p.
DAMSO, a gad-fly.
PASATf, to bite ; p. p. p. dattho.
PAHO, burning.
TH.
XHANl (adj.), having breasts ;
timbarutthani, having breasts
like a tinduka fruit. THANAM, standing. thanaso (adv.), causally, necessarily. THITI (f.), durability; life.
T.
TAOGHA (adv.), verily.
TACO, skin.
TANDULO, rice ready for boiling.
GLOSSARY.
163
TANHA (f.), lust, desire; maha- tanho, Imviiig great desire.
tatiyo, third ; tatlyam, for the third time.
TATRA (adv.), tliere.
TAPASSi (m.), hermit.
TAPO, penance.
TAMO, darkness. [tint.
TAYO (num.), three; f. tisso, n.
TARATI, to cross, to overcome.
TALAM, surface, level.
TASO (adj.), moving, moveable.
TALO, fan-palm. [mar).
TITTHATI, to stand (see Grana-
TINAM, grass.
TIDDANAM, destroyer.
TIMBARU (m.). the tinduka-tree.
tiracchdnagato, a beast, an animal.
TIRIYAM (adv.), across.
TU (particle), now, but.
TUNDlKiRO, cotton-tree.
TUNHI (adv.), silently.
TUVATAM (adv.), quickly.
TEJO (n.), splendour.
TELAM, rape-oil.
TVAM (pron.), you, thou (see Grammar).
TH.
THADDHO (adj.), firm, stubborn, proud ; jati-tthaddho, proud of his birth.
THANAYATI, to thunder.
THAVARO (adj.), stationary, firm.
THERO, a priest, an elder.
THOLO (adj.), big.
D. DAKKHATA (f.), »kUL
DAKKHINO (adj.), right-handed;
southern. DAKKHINEYYO (adj.), worthy of
oflfe rings. DALHO (adj.), firm. DANDO, a staff. DADATI, to give (see Grammar,
p. 56). DADDALLATI, to blaze, to shine
brilliantly. DADDU (f.), leprosy. DANTO, a tooth. DAMO, self-command. dammo (adj.), to be tamed. DAYA (f.), mercy, pity. DARl (f.), a cave. DAVO, amusement. DASA (num.), ten. DASSANAM, insight, discernment. DANAM, alms. DANI (adv.), now. DAYADO, kinsman. DAYO, a forest. DARO, DARA, wife. ,
DASO, slave. di-jo, twice born. ditthapado, one who has seen the
state {i.e. Nibbana). DITTHA (interjection). DITTHI (f.), view, beUef. DIBBO (adj.), celestial. DIVASO, a day. divasd (adv.), during the day. diva ca ratio, day and night. DISA (f.), a point of the compass. disaati (pass, of passati), to be seen. DiGHO (adj.), long. DUKKHAM (t.t.), pain. DUG-GATI, hell, bad place.
un
GL088ART.
dutiyo, second ; dutiyath (adv.), fur
the second time. duvijano, difficult to understand. DUSSAM, cloth. DOBHATI, to illtreat. durato (adv.), from far. DORE (adv.), far. deva-ko, god. devatd, a deva. devaputto, a god. DEVO, a god.
DESAYATI, deseti, to preach. DESO, country. DESSi, hater. DEHO, body.
domanasaam, dejection, gloom. DOSO (Skr. dvesha), anger, hatred. DOSO (Skr. dosha), defect, blemish. DVAYO, of two sorts, divers. dvi-padako, having two feet. DVE (num.), two. dvedha (adv.), in two parts.
DH.
DHAJAGGAM, flag.
DHANAM, property, wealth.
DHAMMO (t. t.), law, condition ; ditthadhammo, the visible condi- tion, the present world.
uttarimanuasa-dhavimo, superhu- man condition.
dhamma-vicayo, religious research.
DHAMMO (adj.), religious ; fem. dhammi.
DHATU (n. and f.), substance; principle.
DHARANAM, bearing in mind.
dharayati (cans.), to bear in mind.
DHITI (f.)f wisdom, energy.
DHiRO (adj.), wise. DHUTTO, fraudulent. DHUNATI, to shake. dhurava, taking the yoke. DHURO, ayoke. DHORAYHO, beast of burden.
N.
NA (neg.), not.
NAKHO, nail of the finger.
NAGARAM, a town.
NANGALAM, plough.
NACCAM, dancing.
NANDI (f.), joy.
NAMATI, to bow down.
NAM ASS ATI, to honour.
NAMO (indecl.), honour, reverence
(with the dative). NARASA BHO, chief of men. NARO, man. NALINi (f.), a pond. NAVA (num.), nine. NAVANlTAM, cream. tiavamo, ninth. NAVO (adj.), new. NAHATAKO (t. t.), one in whom
spiritual instruction is complete ;
who is cleansed, pure. NAHARU, tendon, muscle. NAGO, a serpent ; susunago, a
young serpent. NALIKERO, coconut-tree. NANATTAM, diversity. NANA (adv.), various, different ;
away from. ndna-pjtakdro, of various sorts. NAMA (adv.), by name ; indeed. NAMAM, name ; namanpam (t. t.). ndmaso (adv.), with name.
GLOSSARY.
1«
NIKAYO, assembly, multitude ; sa^^an/Arayo, assemblage of beings.
NI (prep., only iu composition), downwards.
NI and NIR (prep., only in com- position), outward.
ni-kubbati, to deceive.
nik-kanii (adj.), free from desire.
nik-kttjjito, what has been over- thrown.
nik-k/iamati, to go out.
nik-khamati, to devote.
ni-kkhepo, putting down ; inter- ment.
NIGAMO, a town.
ni-gdhako, an oppressor, enemy.
NIGRODHO, banyan-tree.
NICCO (adj.), perpetual.
ni-jigimsati, to covet.
ni-pako (adj.), prudent.
ni-patati, to fall down.
NIBBATI (t.t.), to be extinguished, to go out.
NIBBANAM (t. t.), the summum bonum of the Buddhists.
NIBBUTI, tranquillity (Nibbdna).
nibbuto (t. t.), free from care, or having attained Nibbana.
nibhdsi (adj.), shining.
NIMANTANAM (t. t.), invitation.
NIMITTAM, sign, mark; subject of thought.
nit/ydniko, leading to salvation.
NIYO (adj.), own.
NIRAYO, hell.
nt-rt<i//}a/t (pass.), to cease, to perish.
NIRODHO (t.t.), cessation.
NIVATO, humility. [off.
ni-vareti (cans.), to keep off, to ward
ni-vdsi (adj.), dwelling.
ni-vdseti, to dress.
ni-vesanam, house, abode.
ni-vutOy obstructed.
ni-sdmeti, to attend, listen to.
ni-sidati, to sit down.
NISSAYO (t. t.), resource ; cattdro
nissaya, nis-saranarh, outcome, result. nis-sdya (ger.), dependent upon. nihtno (adj.), low, vile. NICO (adj.), low, mean, base. nt-yati, to go out. NONA (adv.), surely. nekkhammam, giving up the world. ne-katiko, fallacious. NETTAM, eye.
P.
PA (prep.), frequently in composi- tion, before, onward.
PAMSU (n.), dust, dirt.
pa-kdsati, to be visible, to manifest.
PAKKHANDIKA (f.), diarrheea.
PAKKHI (adj.), possessed with wing«.
PARK H IK AM (t. t.), a feast held on the eighth day of the month.
pa-kkhipati, to throw.
pa-gumbo, thicket.
pa-gganhdti, to hold out, to bring forth, to get ready.
PACATI, to cook.
pa-cdro, attendant.
pacca-kdlo, present time.
PACCAITAM (adv.), singly.
paccantko (adj.), adverse, hostile, opposite.
PACCAYO, a requisite.
160
OLOSSART.
pacca-vekkhati, to look at.
pacc-ud-a-vattati, to retreat.
pacceko, each one, single, several.
PACCHIMO (adj.), l.indermost, last ; pacchimd disd, the west.
pa-jahati, to abandon.
PA J A (f.), progeny, race.
pa-jjalat't, to burn, to blaze.
pa-janati, to know, to understand ; caus. pahndpeti, to make known ; p. p. p. panhatto.
pajdyati, to multiply.
pajjalati, to shine.
pajjoto, light, lustre, lamp ; tela- pajjoto, an oil-lamp.
PANCA (num.), five.
pahcamo, the fifth,
PANNA, wisdom, intellect, under- standing.
PANHAM (panham), question.
PATI and PATI, towards, back, in return; in composition before vowels, pace.
pati-kkatnati, to step backwards.
pati-kkamo, retreating.
pati-ggahanam, acceptance, receiv- ing (to ganhdti).
pati-ghdto, repulsion, warding ofi^.
PATI-GHO, anger.
puti-cchddanarh, concealment.
pati-cchddi, covering.
pati-cchddeti, to conceal.
pati-jdndti, to know, to personate ; aor. paccamasi.
pati-nis-sago (t. t.), forsaking.
patipadd ({.), step, way.
pati-pujeti, to honour.
pati-ppa-ssambhati, to be calmed, to subside, to come to an end.
pati-bujjhati, to awake.
pati-bhdti, to appear, to be evident.
pati-rupo (adj.), suitable, fit.
pati-lab/tati, to obtain, to receive.
pati-ldbho, obtaining ; attainment.
pati-vatteti, to subvert ; with a, not to be subverted.
pati-vijjhati, to acquire.
pati-sankhdti, to reflect.
pati-sahcikkhati, to consider.
pati-mm-vedi (adj.), experiencing.
pati-sarano, refuge, help,
pati-sundti, to assent ; aor. pace- assosi, paccassosum.
pati-sevati, to practise, to receive.
PATHAVl (f.), earth.
pa-ndmati, to bend,
pa-ni-dahati, to stretch.
PANIDHI (m.), aspiration (t.t).
pantto (adj.), accomplished, excel- lent ; as neuter, a term for nibbdna.
PANDITO, wise man.
PANDU (adj,), yellow.
PANHO and PANHO, question.
PATATI, to fall ; caus. patayatu
pati-rupo, suitable.
pati-sallanam, solitude.
patisalldndrdmo, delighting in soli- tude.
PA-TITTHA (f.), fixity, resting- place.
PATTAM, a leaf.
pattakallam, seasonableness, time- liness.
pattactvaram, bowl and robe.
PATTI (f.), obtaining, acquisition.
PATTO, bowl.
patto, p. p. p, of pdpundti.
GLOSSARY.
167
PATTHAYATI, to wish for, to desire.
PA DAM, step; nibbana.
pa-dahati, to strive, to exert.
PA-DlPO, lamp.
pa-duttho, wiclied, evil.
PANA (adv.), now, further (the same as puna).
pa-nudati, to remove, to reject.
PANTHO, a road ; also neuter.
PAPPOTI, see papunati.
PAPPHASAM, lungs.
pa-bba-jati, to go forth.
PA-BBAJITO (t. t.), one who has given up the world.
PABBAJJA (f.), monastic life.
PABBAJJA (f.) (t.t.), the pabbajja ordination.
PABBATO, mountain..
pabhamkaro, light-giving.
PABHASO, splendour.
pa-majjati, to delay. [ful.
pamatto, p. p. p. to pamajjati, sloth-
pa-maddt (adj.), crushing, destroy- ing.
PA-MANAM, measure.
PAMADO, carelessness.
pO'tnuhcati, to release.
pa-mussati, to leave behind.
PAMOCANAM, deliverance.
payirupa-sati, to honour.
pa-yutto, tied.
PARAM (adv.), beyond, after.
paramo, highest.
parabhava, sufiering, loss.
PARABHAVO, decay, loss.
PARI (prep.), around, about, fre- quently used in composition, where it appears also as PALI.
PARIKKHARO, apparatus. pari-kkhino, wasted. pari-cito (p. p. p.), accumulated. PARINAMO, change, alteration ;
digestion. PARITTA (f. and n.), protection. PARIDEVO, lamentation. pari-nibbdti (t. t.), to attain Nibbana. pari-pako, maturity, perfection. pari-punno, completed. pari-bhasati, to revile. pari-mukham (adv.), in front, before. pariy-addti, to seize, lay hold of. pariy-dpundti, to learn thoroughly ;
p. p. p. pariydputo. pari-ydyo, succession, order, way. pari-yosdnam, termination. pari-rundhati, to surround ; to lay
siege. parl-vatto, circle, succession ; modi«
fication. pari-vanneti, to describe, to praise. pari-vdreti (cans.), to surround, to
accompany. PARI-VESANA (f. and n.), dUtri-
bution of food. PARISA, assembly. pari-sujjhati (pass.), to be purified. parisuddho (adj.), pure, clear. PARISSAYAM, danger. PARIHARO, attention. pareto, dead, destroyed. PARO (adj.), distant, further ;
other. PARO (adv.), beyond, more than. PALASO, a leaf. paligho, an obstacle. PA-VACANAM, the word of the
Buddha.
168
GLOSSARY.
pa-vatteti (caus.), to set rolling; ; pavattite dhammacakke, having founded the kingdom of truth.
PAVANAM, side of a mountain.
pa-vapati, to sow.
pa-vassati, to rain.
pa-vuati, to enter.
palayati, to run away.
pali-gunthati, to envelop, to en- tangle.
PALLANKO, a couch.
pa-sattho (p. p. p.), praised. [fied.
pa-sanno, p. p. p. to pasidati, satis-
pa-sahati, to use force.
pa-sado, brightness, clearness, glad- ness.
pa-acuiati, to rule.
PASU, cattle.
PASSATI, to see.
pa-ssaddhi (f.), calming down.
pa-ssambhati, to calm down ; p. p. p. passaddho.
pa-ssambhayam, calming down.
pa-ssasati, to exhale air.
PASSAVO, urine.
PAHANAM, abandoning.
pa-hitatto, resolute.
pahuto, much, abundant.
pa-hoti, to be able.
pa-honako (adj.), sufficient.
pakimo (adj.), cooked, dressed, ripfned.
PACANAM, a goad.
PANAM, living being.
panatipati (adj.), taking life.
PANO, breath.
PANAKO, worm, insect.
PANI (m.), hand.
patikankho, to be expected.
PATIPADIKAM (t.t.), food offered on the day following fuU-muon day.
PATANAM, causing to fall.
gabbhapatanam, causing miscar- riage ; abortion.
PATi (f.), a bowl.
PATU (adv.), manifestly.
patu-bhavati, to become visible ; aor. patur-ahosi.
patu-bhavo, appearance.
pada-talarh, sole of the foot.
PADO, a small silver coin.
pdddraho, worth a pdda.
PADO, foot.
PANAM, drinking.
pdpako (adj.), bad.
pdpiccho, having sinful desires.
PAPUNATI, PAPONOTI, PAPP- OTI, to attain ; pattabbo, attitin- able.
PAPO (adj.), evil, bad.
PAYASO, rice-milk.
PARAM, the other shore.
pdrarh Gangdya, across the Ganges.
pdri-sajjo (adj.), belonging to an assembly ; brahmapdrisajjo, be- longing to the retinue of Maha- brabma.
pdri-suddhi, purity, perfection.
PALAYATI, to guard, to preserve.
pdliccam, hoariness, greyness of hair. [season.
pd-vuasako, belonging to the rainy
PASANO, a stone.
PASADO, house of more than one storey, tower, palace.
pdhuneyyo (adj.), worthy of being guests.
GLOSSARY.
109
pitthi-mamsiko (adj.), backbiting.
pilakd (f.), a boil.
PINIJAPATO (t.t.), food received
in the alms bowl. PINDI (f.), lump, mass. PINDO, lump, ball ; food ; alms. PITA (m.), father (see Grammar). PITTAM, bile. PI-NASO, cold in the head. PI PAS A, thirst. PIPPHALI (f.), long pepper. PIYO (adj.), dear. PISUNO (adj.), backbiting. PIHAKAM, spleen. PiTI, joy, delight. PUGGALO, individual. PUCCHATI, to ask, to question. PUNNO (adj.), good, virtuous. PUTTO, son. [wide.
PUTHU (adv.), separately, far and PUNA, see PANA. punab-bhavo, rebirth. PUPPHAM, flower. pubbanho, forenoon. PUBBO (adj.), former, early. PUBBO, pus, matter. PURAM, town. pura-kkharoti, to put in front. purato (adv.), in front of. puratthhno (adj.), eastern. PURA (adv.), formerly, previously. PURANO, former. PURIMO. east.
PURISAKO, minister, attendant. PURISO, man, a male. pujako, honouring. POJA, attention, veneration. POJETI, to honour. PCTI, stinking, foal.
PORO, full.
PEKHA (f.), desire ; punnapekho, looking for good works.
pecca (ger,), having departed.
peseti (caus.), to send.
POKKHARASAKATO, a bird.
POTAKO, youth, cub.
potikd (f.), maiden.
pothujjaniho, belonging to an un- converted person ; sensual.
ponobbhaviko, connected with re- birth.
PORANO and PORANAKO, old.
POSO, man.
PLAVATI, or piluvati, to float; caus. pildpeti.
PH.
PHARATI, to flash, to shine forth.
PHARUSO, harsh, unkind.
PHALAM, fruit.
PHALATI, to split asunder, to break open.
PHANITAM, sugar.
phdleti (caus.), to split, to cleave.
PHALO, ploughshare.
PHASU (adj.), comfortable.
phdsu-vihdro, comfort, ease.
PHUTO, thrilled, pervaded.
PHUSATI, to touch, to reach; p. p. p. phuttho.
PHUSSITO (adj.), flowering, blos- soming.
PHOTTABBAM (t. t.), touch.
B.
BANDHATI, to bind. BANDHAXAM, binding; bonds, fetter.
170
OL088ART.
BANDHU (m.), kinsmnn.
BALI (in.), religious offering.
BALIVADDO, an ox.
BAHU(adj.), many.
bahu-ppado, having many feet.
BALHO (adj.), hard, severe, as first part of a compound ' very.'
BALO (adj.), young, foolish.
BAHIRO (adj.), external.
BiJAM, g«rm, seed.
BUDDHO, an epithet of Gotama, and used as a designation of Gotama ' the Enlightened.'
BOJJHANGO (t. t.), constituents of wisdom.
BODHI (f.), wisdom.
BRAVlTI, BROTI, to say, to tell.
BRAHMAM, practice of devotion.
BRAHMACARIYAM (t. t., also fem.), a religious life ; the duties of a religious life.
BRAHMANO, a brahmin.
by-anti-karoti, to abolish, to re- move.
BY AS AN AM, misfortune, unhap> piness.
byd-karoti, to answer.
BYADHI (m.), illness.
BYAPADO, wish to injure.
BYAROSANA (f.), anger.
BH.
BHAKKHO (adj.), eating.
BHAOANDALA (f.), fistula.
BH AGAVA (adj.), worshipful,
venerable ; an epithet of the
Buddha. BHAGINl (f.), sister. BHANGAJVI, hempen cloth.
BHAJATf, to serve, to honour; to cultivate.
BHANATI, to shine.
BHANATI, to speak; pass, bha- nnati.
BHATTAM, food; uddeta (t.t.), food given on special occasions ; aaldka° (t. t), ticket food.
BHADANTO, term for addressing a Buddhist monk.
BHADDO, BHADRO (adj.), good.
BHAYAM, fear.
BHARATI, to bear, to support.
BH AVAIVT, lord, sir (see Grammar).
BHAVATI, to be, to exist.
BHAVANAM, being, existence ; realm.
BHAVO, corporeal existence, birth.
BHAGO, portion, part, share.
BHATARO, brother.
BHATA (m.), brother.
BHARO, burden.
bhdveti (cans, to bhavati), to in- crease, to cause to exist.
BHAVO, property.
BHASATI, to tell.
BHIKKHU, title of a Buddhist monk.
BHIKH;^N! (f), female mendicant.
BHISMO (adj.), terrible.
BHiYO, BHIYYO (adj.), more.
BHiRU (adj.), timid.
BHUJISSO, a free man; a freed slave.
BHUNJATI, to enjoy ; to eat.
bhummo (adj.), terrestrial.
BHUSAM (adv.), much, exceed- ingly.
bhutakalo, time to speak the truth.
GLOSSARY.
171
bhutapubbo (adj.), that has b«en
before. BH CTO, spirit, being. BHCMI(f.), the earth. BHEDO, parting. BHERAVO (adj.), frightful. BHESAJJAM, medicine. BHO, sir, master (see Grammar). BHOGO, wealth ; appa-bhogo,
having little property. BHOJANAM, food.
M.
MAMS AM, flesh. MAKASO, a gnat, mosquito. MAKKHI (adj.), concealing ; pa-
pamakkhi, hypocritical. MAGGO, path. MANKU, troubled, restless. MANGALO (adj.), happy. MACCU (m.), death. MAJJAM, strong drink. majjhimo (adj.), middle. MAJJHO, middle. MANNATI, to think. MAXDANAM, adornment. MANDALI (adj.), having a disc. MATTA (f.), measure ; quality. MATTHAKAM, head. MATTHALUNGAM, brain. MADO, enjoyment. MADHU(n.), honey. madfiumeho, diabetes. MANAPO, pleasing, pleasant,
charming. MANUSSO, man, human being. MANO, mind (also neuter). tnanoramo (adj.), pleasant, delight*
ful.
MANTETI, to consult, to advise. MANTO, hymn ; the Vedns. MANDIVO, slowness, stupidity. mamayito, concerning oneself ; own. MAYURO, MORO, peacock. MARANAM, dying, death. mahab-balo, having great strength. MAHA, great (see Grammar). mahd-matto, king's minister, g^at
noble. maha-raja, king, great king. MA, negation. MALUTO, wind. MANAVAKO (adj.), young; a
young man. MATA (f.), mother (see Grammar). MANASO, lust. MANUSO, MANUSi (f.) (adj.),
human. MANO, pride, arrogance. MAYA (f.), illusion, deceit; mayavi,
deceitful. MARISO, venerable person ; term
of address. MALA (f.), a garland. MASO, month. MIGO, antelope, deer. MICCHA (adv.), falsely, wrongly. miccha-caro, wrong conduct. MITTO, friend. MIDDHAM, sleep ; vigatamiddho,
awake. MINATI, to measure ; p. f. p.
tnetabbo. MUKHAM, mouth, face; means,
cause. MURHO, face. MUCCHA (f.), faintnesB. MUNCATI, to release.
172
GLOSSARY.
MUNDAKO, shaveling, term of
reproach. MUTTAM, urine ; putimuttam,
urine of cattle. MUTTr(f.), release. MUDU (adj.), soft. MUDDHA (m.), head. MUDHA (adv.), gratis, for nothing. MUSA (adv.), wrongly. musa-vddo, lying, falsehood. MUHUTTO, second, hrief measure
of time. MOLHO, stupid. MCLAM, root. MCSTKO, a fly. MEG HO, cloud, storm, rain. METHUNO (adj.), relating to
sexual intercourse. ME DO, fat, blubber. MERAYAM, intoxicating liquor. MODATI, to rejoice. MORO, see MAYURO. MOHO, ignorance.
Y.
YAKANAJfr, the liver. YAKKHO, a superhuman being, a
yaksha. YATI, to restrain ; p. p. p. yato. YATO (adv.), since. YATTHA (adv.), the same as
^ yatra,'' inasmuch. YATHA (adv.), as. yathabhutam (adv.), according to
the reality. YADA (adv.), when, whenever. YASO, fame, renown. ycusassivd, surrounded by eminent
men.
yasassl (adj.), famous.
YACATI, to ask, to beg, to entreat.
YATI, to go.
YATRA (f.), livelihood.
YANAM, going, preceding ; car- riage, car.
ydni-fcato, used as a vehicle.
YAPANAM, maintenance.
YAPANATI, to live.
YAVA (adv.), as long ; ydva ki- vanca, and as long as ; in con- junction with eva, ydvad eva, so long as.
Y'UGAM, pair ; generation.
YUGO (also neuter), yoke. [to.
Y UN J ATI, to turn one's attention
YEBHUYYO (adj.), abundant ; yebhuyyena, in great numbers.
YO (pron.), who (see Grammar).
YOGAKKHEMO, security ; t. t. Nibbana.
YOTTAM, tie.
YONI (f.), womb ; source, origin.
YONISO, really.
YOBBANAM, youth.
R.
RAKKHATI, to protect.
RAKKHA (f.), protection.
RAJATAM, silver.
RAJJAM, kingdom.
RATTI (f.), night.
ratti-n-divo, day and night.
RABHASO (adj.), contemptuous, fierce.
RAMATI, to enjoy oneself, to de- light in ; rato, delighting.
RASO, sap, juice ; sweet thing ; taste.
GLOSSART.
178
rtusako (adj.), short. RASSO (adj.), short. RAHADO, a deep pool, a lake. RAHO, solitude.
RAGO, evil desire, greed, attach- ment, lust. rajadhant, royal city. rajabhato, king's soldier. RAJA (m.), king, see Grammar. RAMO, joy, delight. RITTO [rishta], injured. RUDDO (adj.), cruel. RUKKHO, a tree. ROPAM (t. t.), form, figure. ROGO, illness. ROCETI (caus.), to approve. ROSAKO (adj.), wTathful.
LABHATI, to take ; p. p. p. laddho.
LAYO, instant (brief measure of time).
LASIKA (f.), the fluid which lubri- cates the joints.
LABHA (adv. dat.), for the ad- vantage of.
LUDDO (adj.), cruel.
LOKO, world.
loka-jettho, chief of the world.
LOKA-DHAMMO (t. t.), things of the world, worldly condition.
loka-dhatu, world-system.
loka-vidu, knowing the world (epi- thet of the Buddha).
LOMAM, hair of the body.
LOMAHAIMSO, horripilation.
LOHITAM, blood.
LOHITO (adj.), red.
V.
VAKKAM, kidney.
vaggiyo (adj.), belonging to a group.
VAGGU (adj.), beautiful.
VACCO, lustre.
VAJATI, to walk.
VAJIRO, Indra's thunderbolt.
VANCANIKO, deceitful.
VANCETI (caus.), to deceive.
VADDHATI, to grow, to increase;
to pour out. VANNO, appearance, beauty, form ;
caste ; vannava (adj.), having
beauty. VATA (inter).), indeed ! verily ! VATTATI, to take place. VATTHAM, cloth ; raiment. VATTHU (n.), substance. VATTHU (m.), a site, a building
(Skr. vdstu). V AD ATI, to declare ; to speak. VANAM, wood, forest. VANATHO, desire, lust. VANIBBAKO, mendicant. VANDAKO, praising. VANDATI, to praise. VAPATI, to sow. VAPPO, sowing.
varanhu, knowing what is excellent. varado, giving what is excellent. varaharo, bringing what is excellent. VARO (adj.), excellent VALl (f.), a wrinkle. valittaro (adj.), ^Tinkled. VASATI, to dwell. vatalako, wretched, outcast. VASA (f.), serum ; marrow of the
flesh.
174
GLOSSARY.
VASALO, outcast.
VASSO, rain ; a year.
VA (conj.), pa — tfd, either . . or.
VACA (f.), word, saying, speech.
VATO, wind.
VADITAM, music.
VADO, speaking, speech.
VAYAMATI, to struggle, to strive.
VAyAMO (t. t.), exertion, endea- vour.
VASO, dwelling, living, abode.
VAHANAM, carrying; a vehicle; an animal used in riding.
VI (prep.), used in composition, asunder, apart from.
vi-kalo, wrong time.
VIGGAHO, body ; manussa°, a human being. [parsing.
vi-kirano (adj.), squandering, dis-
vi-kkandati, to cry out.
vi-gahati, to obtain.
vi-cakkhano, knowing', wise, dis- cerning.
vi-carati, to wander.
vi-cdro, investigation.
VICIKICCHITAM, doubt.
VICCHIKO, scorpion.
vi-jand-vato (adj.), understanding.
vi-jeti, vi-jinuti, to conquer.
VIJJATI, to know (see Grammar).
VIJJATI, to be, to exist.
VIJJA (f.), knowledge, wisdom.
VIJJU (f.), lightning.
vijjuko (adj.), lightning.
VIIK^NANAM, consciousness, in- telligence.
vihndpeti (cans, to vijdndti), to speak to, to address, to inform.
VINNO (adj.), intelligent.
VI-TAKKO, reflection, thought. VITACCHIKA (f.), scabies. VITTAM, property, wealth. vitthdrati, to declare, to amplify ;
aor. vitthasi. [cation.
vitthdro, detail, extension, amplifi- VI DO (adj.), knowing, wise. VI-NAYO, training. VINA (adv.), without. vi-ndseti, to waste. vineti, to remove, to put away. vinodanam, removal, dispelling. vinodeti (cans.), to dispel. VINDATI, to acquire. vi-pdceti, to be indignant. VI-PARI-NAMO, change, reverse. vi-ppa-mutto (p. p. p.), released. vi-ppa-yogo, absence. vippa-vasati, to go abroad ; p. p. p.
vippavuttho. vippavdso, absence ; ticivarenca
avippavdso, not parting with the
three robes. vi-ppa-sldati, to become calm. vi'bhajati, to divide, to distinguish. VIBHAVO, power, prosperity. VI-BHAVO (t. t.), absence of ex- istence, formless existence. vibhdvayatl, to understand. vibhusanaiii, adornment. vi-muncati, to release ; p. p. p.
vimutto. VI.MUTTI(f.), release. VI-MOKHO, release. VI-MOCAVAM, releasing. vi-rajo, free from corruption, pure ;
free from dust. vi-rajjdti, to be displeased ; p. p. p.
viratto.
GLOSSARY.
176
VIRATI (f.), abstinence. vi-ramati, to abstnin. vi-ravati, to cry aloud. vi-rago, absence of desire. vira>eti (cans.), to put away. VIRIYAM, exertion, strength. vi-ruhati, to go on. vi-rocati, to lie brilliant. VILEPANAM, toilet perfume. vi-varati, to open ; p. p. p. vivato. VI-VEKO, separation, seclusion ;
discrimination. viviccati (pass.), to separate oneself. VISAM, poison. vi-samo (adj.), uneven. vi-auddho, (adj.), pure. VISOKAM, show, spectacle. VISOCIKA (f.), cholera. VISESO, distinction. vi-ssuto (adj.), renowned. viharati, to dwell.
VI-HARO, living; Buddhist temple. vi-himsati, to hurt. VI HI MSA (f.), hurting. mta-malo, spotless. VITO (adj.), devoid of; a-vito, not
free from. vitipatati, to transgress. vi-ti-sareti, to remind mutually. ViRO, hero. ViSATI (num.), twenty. VUTTHI (f.), rain. VUTTI (f.), conduct. vutiiavd, dwelling, residing. vun-ma (adj.), dwelling. vupakattho, distant, removed. VOPASAMO, paciBcation. VE (interj.), indeed. VEiyU (m.), a bamboo, a reed.
VEDAGO (t. t.), knowing the law. VEDANA (f.) (t. t.), perception,
sensation. VEPULLAM, development. veyyd-karanam, explanation. VEYYABADHIKO, sick, ill; to
byabddho. [al>l.).
VERAMANi (f.), abstinence (with VEROCANAKO, bright. VELA (f.), time, occasion. VELO, time.
VEVANNIYAM, change, diversity. VESi (f.), harlot. VEHASO, sky. VOROPETI (cans.), to deprive of.
S.
SA, as first member of a compound ' with.'
SAMYOJANAlff (t. t.), bond, at- tachment.
samhanti, to strike.
SAKO (adj.), own.
SAKKACCA (adv.), attentively.
SAK-KAYA-DITTHI (t. t.), con- ceit.
SAK-KAYO, own body or person.
SAK-KARO, hospitality.
aak-karoti, to receive hospitality, to honour.
SAKKO (adj.), able.
SAKKHf, witness.
SAKHA (m.), companion, friend (see Grammar).
SAGGO, heaven.
8ANKAPP0 (t.t.), thought, Imagi- nation, aspiration.
tan-kampati, to quake, to tremble.
san-kuddho, ang^y.
176
GLOSSARY.
SAN-KHARO (t. t.), the elements,
matter. san-khipati, to shorten, to abridge. aan-khittena, concisely, l)riefly. SAN-GAHO, protecting. SAN-GAM O, conflict, battle. SAN-GHATi (t.t.), one of the three
robes of a priest. SANG HO, the Buddliist clerical
community. SACE (conj.), if. SACCAM, truth. tacchikaroti, to see face to face ;
p. p. p. sacchikato. SACCHIKIRIYA (f.), realization. sahcicca (adv. ger.), intentionally. SANJATI (f.), birth. samamo, refraining. SANNA (t. t.) (f.), perception. SATHO (adj.), wicked, crafty. SATTHI (num.), sixty. SANHO (adj.), soft ; smooth, gentle. SATAM (num.), a hundred. SATI (f.), thoughtfuluess, remem- brance. aatima (adj.) of retentive memory;
thoughtful, reflecting. Sato, p. p. p. garati, recollecting,
mindful. SAITA (num.), seven. SATTATI, seventy. tattavdso, abode of beings. SATTO, being. SATTHAM, weapon. SATTHA (m.), teacher. tad-attho, one's own advantage. SADA (adv.), always. SAD-DAHATI, to believe; p.p.
aaddahdno.
SADDO, sound.
SADDHA, faith.
SADDHIM (adv.), with.
SANTA M (a term for Nibbana).
aan-tatto, scorched.
tan-tarati, to be in haste.
SANTIKE (adv.), in the presence of.
SANTUTTHi (f.), contentment.
SANTUSSAKO, contented.
SANTO, true, good.
san-dasseti (cans.), to show, to teach.
san-ditthiko (adj.), visible.
aan-dhupdyati, to smoke.
8an-nayhati, to bind, to fasten.
san-ni-patati, to assemble.
8annipatiko{a,A].), gathered together.
SAPADANAM (adv.), constantly ; 8ap° pinddya carati, goes his begging-rounds constantly.
SAPPI, cow's butter.
sap-puriso, good man.
sabbattha (adv.), everywhere.
sabbattho, in every respect.
sabba-dhi, from all sides.
SABBO (pron. adj.), every one, all (see Grammar).
SABHA (f.), an assembly.
samanako, wretched samana.
SAMANO, an ascetic.
SAM ATTO (adj.), complete.
SAMATHO, tranquillity.
SAMANTO, all, entire ; aamantd, from every side.
aamanndgato, endowed with.
SAMAYO, time, assembly, agree- ment ; ekatii samayam, once upon a time.
aama-vekkhati, to take into con- sideration.
GLOSSARY.
177
sam-a-gacchati, to assemble. tam-a-carati, to follow. sam-a-dapeti (caus. samadiyati), to
instig'ate, to advise. sam-a-dahati, to put together ; pass.
samadhlyati, to become tran-
quilized. SAMADHI (f.) (t.t.), meditation. SAMANO (adj.), equal, same,
similar. [ment.
SAM-A-PATTI (f.) (t.t.), attain- tam-d-hito, steadfast. tam-ikkliati, to consider, to reflect. SAM-ITI (f.), assembly. sam-uk-kajjisati, to exalt. sain-ug-ghato, removal. sam-ut-thanam, rising, originating. sam-ut'tejeti (caus.), to stir, to excite. SAM-UD-AYO, rise, origin. sam ud-eti, to arise ; samudito, ele- vated. SAMUDDO, sea. sam-upabbulho (p. p. p.), set up. sam-uhanti, to remove. SAMO, equal. sam-pa-kampati, to tremble, to
sbake ; a-sam-pa-kampiyo, that
cannot be shaken. sam-paj'ano, conscious. sam-patto (p. p. p.), endowed with. sam-pa-dhupayati, to smoke in
volumes. sam-panno (p. p. p.), endowed with. SAM-PA- YOGO, union, presence. tam-parayiko (adj.), relating to the
future. SAM-PARAYO, future state, next
world. tam-pa-vedhati, to tremble.
tam-pa-gadanath, making serene ;
tranqiiilization. sam-passati, to behold, to discern. sam-pa-hamseti (cnus.), to gladden,
to delight, to praise. sampha-ppa-lapo, frivolous talk. sam-phassa-jo, urising from contact. SAM-PHASSANAM (t.t.), contact. sam-phasso, contact. sam-bahulo (adj.), many. sam-bddAo, pressure, straits. SAM-BOJJHAJNfGO (t. t), con-
stitucnt of bodhi. sambhav-esi (adj.), seeking rebirth. SAM-BHAVO, production. sam-mannati, to agree to, to decide ;
to sanction. SAMMA (indecl.), fully, thoroughly (used frequently in composition) ; Sammd sambuddho, the All Wise. aam-mukht-bhuto, confronted. sam-mukho (adj.), face to face. SAM-MUTI (f.), consent, choice,
determination. sam-muyhatit to be stupefied ; p.p. p.
sammulho. sani'modati, to agree with ; taddhiih 8°, to exchange friendly greetings. SAMVARI (f.), night. sam-vaso, living with. sam-viggo, excited. SAYATI, to lie down. SA YANAM (SENAM), lying, sleep- ing ; bed, couch. SARANAM, refuge. SARABO (f.), a lizard. sar'ito (p. p. p.), flowing. SARiRAM, body. SARO, sound.
12
178
GL08RARY.
SALAKA, a peg ; slip, bit of wood. tal-lahuko (i><lJ-)> l>g)>t. SALLiNO, bent together. SAVANAM, hearing. SASSU (f.), mother-in-law. SAHA (in composition), together,
with. saha-gato, accompanied. safiasa (adv.), with violence. SAHASSl, thousand (in composi- tion). SAHA (adv.), witli. aaha-silt (adj.), being fond of society. SAKACCHA (f.), conversation. SADHU (adv.), well, good. SANAM, hempen cloth. SAMICI (f.), correctness. SAYANHO, evening. SAYATI, to taste. SARATHI, charioteer. aarantyo (adj.), that which should
be remembered. sa-ruppo (adj.), 6t, proper. SALI (m.), rice. SALIKA (f.), the maynah-bird. SAVAKO, a disciple. taveti. {ctius. to sunoti), to impart,
to inform. SASANAM, order, command. Buddhas°, the teaching of the
Buddha. SASO, astlimn. SIKKHATI, to learn. SIKHA (f.), peak, summit; aggi-
sikfia, flame of fire. SIKKH APADA.\I (t. t.), sentence of
moral training. SINGHANIKA, mucus of the nose. SITO (Skr. gritd), resting upon.
8IPPAM, skill.
SIRIMSAPO, a snake.
tiri-tna (adj.), having magnificence,
glory. SFRl (f.), fortune, prosperity. SI LA (f.), a rock. SITjOKO, a stanza, a qloka. SIVIKA(f.), a palanquin. SI VO (adj.), auspicious, blest, happy. STMA (f.). boundary, limit. SiTAM, coldness. SiTO (adj.), col<l, cool. SiLAM (t, t.), nature, character ;
moral character, piety. SiLABBATAM (t.t.), aflfection of
good rites. sila-va (adj.), virtuous. SILI (adj.), having a habit, dispo- sition ; niddd-tP, drowsy, slothful. SiSAM, head. Si HO, lion.
SU (in composition), well, good. SUKO, a parrot. SUKHO (adj.), blest, happy. SUKHO, bliss. SU-GATO, happy (epithet of the
Buddha). su-gandho, of good smell. su-ggahito (adj.), grasped. 8UCI (f.), purity. 8u-cinno, well done. SUNNAGARAI^r, solitude, place
void of houses. SUNOTI, SUNATI, to hear (see
Grammar). 8uto (p. p. p.), heard, renowned. gudath (part.), sma + idam. tu-dul-lahho, very difficult to obtain. 8U-DHAMMAT0 (t.t), perfection.
GLOSSARY.
179
8UDDH0 (adj.), clean.
su-pati-panno, well-conducted.
SUPATI, to sleep.
SUPINAM, sleep. [joined.
su-ppa-yutto (p. p. p.), thoroughly
su-bhavo, easily supported.
su-mano, satisfied.
su-mapito (adj.), well-built.
SURA (f.), intoxicating liquor.
SURIYO, the sun.
su-vi-jdno, easily known.
SUSU, a boy.
SUSSOSA (f.), desire to hear.
SCJU (adj.), conscientious.
SOLO, rheumatism.
SEMHAM, phlegm.
SEKHO (t. t.), one who is under training.
SETTHO (adj.), best, foremost.
SEDO, sweat, moisture.
SENA (f.), army.
SEN-ASANAM, [sleeping and sit- ting] dwelling.
seyyako (adj.), lying, sleeping.
SEVATI, to serve, to follow.
SEVANA (f.), addicted to, devotion to ; A-sevana, not addicted to.
SO (pron.), this (see Grammar).
SO (adj.), own ; sarh (adv.) by oneself.
SOKO, sorrow, grief.
SOCATI, to grieve.
socanatfam, mourning.
SOCANAM, mourning.
SONDO (adj.), addicted to drink ; fem. SOXpI.
SOTAJ*, ear. [tlon.
SOTAPATTI (f.), (t. t.), sanctifica- SOTTHANAM, blessing. SOBHATI, to shine. SORACCAM, tenderness. sovacassatd (f.), pleasant speech. SOSO, consumption. 8v-akkhdto, well told.
H.
HA (interj.), truly.
HATTHI (m.), elephant.
HATTHO (p. p. p.), bristling.
HATTHO, hand.
H ADA YAM, heart.
HANTI, to kill.
HAND A (interj.), come onl
HAM MI YAM, house surrounded
by walls. HARATI, to carry away. HARI (adj.), green. HARITAM, grass. haritattam, greenness, yellowness. HAVE (interj.), truly. HI (part.), for, because ; certainly,
indeed ; also. HIMSATI, to hurt. HIRANNAM, gold. HIRi, modesty, shame. HITO (p. p. p. and adj.), beneficial. hino (p. p. p.), wasted, decayed. HETHETI, to injure. HETTHIMO (adj.), lower, lowest. HETU (adv.), on account of, by
means of. HOT!, to be ; see bhavati.
HERTFORD :
FRINTZD BY eTIFHEN ATIBTIS AND SONS.
SINHALESE ALPHABET.
Vowels
^ a ^ a. (^ i if I (^y u. (^ u Se €d o. Vowel Symbols.
0. ^. ^ . J. J. ^. (B^ 0.
t^ ka. Z^^ha £)ki fc fi SJ^Jku. ty\Jkn6^ke. 6t3nko.
^khu. ^ khu. Nasal Vowels.
The symhol is <? . <Y>6» ant. It is also used for any nasal hefore anc^her Consonant
Consonants.
^ ka. 'o) . kha 00 ga. t50 gha €D ^a
O ca d^cka ^j^ f^jha Q5^ ^
0 ta (^ tha €d du tb d^a S^ 'na
tX) du (3 tha C^ da Zd dha ^^ Tia
^ pa e3 pha ^ Va &S Vha ^ ma
60 ya 6 ra /^ la* -^t~) 'i'^
t^ sa 60 %a f^ la.
Consonant Symbols
r. ^ hra
Tlrama ' ^ k. ^ nv.
Compound Consonants.
QCs 'nj^aW^ ^a (XS'^ja ® nda (Lb tlha (to ddha tD cca €U) 'bha c^ 'nilMZ.
^U) Tikha. e^^ jjha r^ tlha S^ 'ndha
un
Burmese Alphabet.
Vowels. __
SYMBOLS.} L) lb
CJOka,. COokcij c8ki. cSH. coku. en ku. crcoke.cxrDokc. O/ ga GO I go.
Nns/iL Vowels. The syrnhil for the nasal votv-ds is ° 5^ am . 11 is also vised tb express any nasal htforc another consonant. Simple Consonants. CIO ka O kha
O.S) ca C ta OO ta U pa (JO ya OO Sa
DO cha G tha OO ^ha (J -pha O.OJ ra OO ha
Consonant Symbols. C iia. ^ OJ ya, J
1 ^« C
ij-a
a
J Virdma
O ga O ja
3 <ia
CO la
OCT nka
IX) gha qj jha ^ dha O dha OO hha O V-a
C na OD na COO 7ia t> -na Q ma
O -V-a OO ha
O^ yya ^ Uhya
(m kra /3 ^ra
GO ft^a
on nha O rtiha
ob^t.
Compound Consonants.
(^ ryda eg ?i/ia g ddka
ddha
O) ppa O ^/^^ta
OOO Ssa.
h
OO OQ s^n a O ^
stn
XAMBODIAN ALPHABET.
Vowels. ,
%^a. %^cL. /Ti. ^ i. Q^vb. QjjM 0\e. €\ o.
^ i^ ^ ^Q^ 0,^ Vowel Symbols.
o <i>
PTka. e^ka ^ki ^ki. eTku.?^ku.C^ke.C^h
Nasal Vowels. The symhol ^ is added to the simple irow-el: %^ arn . It is also used as a nasal hefcrt another consonant .
Simple Consonants
^ ka O kha f? ga Xl^ gka O -iia
i3 ca ^ cha ^ ja flSJ jha TQ ^a
i^ ta ^ Iha n da (T^ dha ti^ na
^ ta ^ thu ^ da t(S dha ^ Tva
tS pa W pha G^ Int '^ Vha %^ ma
i^X^tfcL ^ ra SkS la ^ v-a
^ sa U^ha "^ la
Compound Consonants
fSymtcl for rcL j )0 l^ra \^^ ndra
»» «» gemintdtcn j ^Vssa SS^ ppa
**P§ klika iz^^ ncfka ^ ccka C^ nca ^)0 ttka (AO nda f^ ttha O ti^a ^^ ddha ^ dvu JV nna %^ mVa.
k
V
C
CO
o o
t ~2
o
tf> i— J
o
t
At o o
14
O A -J
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARif
Acme Library Card Pocket
Under Pat. " Rrf. Index File." Made by LIBRARY BUREAU
;« u :* . r»
.:^M